Home

PowerLogic User's Guide - Electrical and Information Technology

1. Y Include Part Attributes fs Include Valve and tolerance Select Sheets Select All SHEET2 JSHEET3 Unselect All IV Include Subsheets Output PowerPCB V3 hd IV Include Design Rules Cancel Help Output File Name Lists the default netlist file name which is the design file name with the extension asc Type a new name or choose Browse to open the Export Netlist dialog box Select Sheets Specifies which sheets to netlist Turn on the check box next to the sheet name to include the sheet in the netlist Include Subsheets When on include in the netlist any connections to hierarchical symbols Output Choose PowerPCB V2 or PowerPCB V3 format PowerLogic User s Guide 2 6 Creating a Netlist Include Design Rules Includes design rules and trace width setting in the netlist for passing to PowerPCB Include Part Attributes Controls whether part attributes are included in the netlist Note This option grays if you choose PowerPCB V2 format from the Output drop down list box PowerPCB 3 0 and later versions now retain the attributes assigned for parts in PowerLogic Include Value and Tolerance Controls whether the part value and tolerance fields for resistors capacitors etc appear in the netlist Note This option grays if you choose PowerPCB V3 format from the Output drop down list box When Output of value tolerance is on the component list portion of the netlist con
2. 1 Choose the Drafting Toolbox icon from the toolbar See the Drafting Operations chapter for more information Choose the Create 2D Line icon from the Drafting toolbox and then construct the body of decal See the Drafting Operations chapter for more information E le Choose the Terminal Toolbox icon from the toolbar See the Terminal Toolbox topic in this chapter for more information a z t Ov Choose the Add Terminal icon from the Terminal toolbox See the Adding Terminals topic in this chapter for more information ur le 5 Indicate the locations for the terminals 6 Choose Cancel from the pop up menu when you finish adding terminals 7 Optionally use the other options of the Terminal toolbox to add additional terminals change the pin decal or change the pin sequence number The other options in the Terminal toolbox gray when you create a CAE Decal To automatically construct the decal x 1 Choose the Decal Wizard icon from the Drafting toolbox to open the Decal Wizard See the Decal Wizard topic in this chapter for more information 2 Use the Decal Wizard to create the outline and add terminals 3 Use the Terminal toolbox to modify the pin numbers created by the Decal Wizard and add pin names gate swapping information etc See the Terminal Toolbox topic in this chapter for more information 4 Optionally use the Terminal toolbox to add additional terminals change the pin decal or ch
3. Lists the pin decals that are displayed in the dialog boxes that access pin decals for example the Pin Decal Browse dialog box You can display up to 100 pin decals Get Gate Decal from Library Use the Get Gate Decal from Library dialog box to open an existing CAE Decal in the Part Editor To open this dialog box 1 2 3 4 Choose Tools Part Editor Choose File Open The Select Type of Editing Item dialog box appears Choose CAE Decal Choose OK PowerLogic User s Guide 7 32 Creating New Parts from Existing Parts RD1024K1 Decals common RD255K4 common REFIN common REFOUT common RESVAR H1 omen common RESVAR H2 common RESVAR V1 common RESVAR V2 zl Help Filter Library All Libraries X Items a Apply Decals Displays the decals that match to the search filter Choose the decal you want to use The selected decal appears in the area to the left of the list box Filter Searches the selected library for a specific part or item name or for names that match a wildcard text string See the Preface for more information Get Part Type from Library Use the Get Part Type from Library dialog box to open an existing part in the Part Editor To open this dialog box 1 Choose Tools Part Editor 2 Choose File Open The Select Type of Editing Item dialog box appears 3 Choose Part Type 4 Choose OK RESN1 Parts comman RN4 Carcel common RN4 2 common RN8 common RS030 zl
4. Choose File Save Choose File Exit Part Editor PowerLogic User s Guide 7 40 Special Symbols Select Pin Decal Use the Select Pin Decal dialog box to access and create graphics for a new special symbol This dialog box appears when you choose the Extended Selection command from the pop up menu to edit a gate for a special symbol Select Pin Decal x Pin Decal REFOUT To create graphics for a new symbol name 1 Choose the new alternate symbol name 2 Choose OK A Create New Decal information window appears 3 Choose OK You enter the special part editor and the appropriate text strings are added You can also modify one of the existing parts by choosing it from the list Assign Alternatives for Off page Part Use the Assign Alternatives for Off page Part dialog box to assign or create additional off page reference symbols To open this dialog box 1 Choose Tools Part Editor 2 Choose File Open The Select Type of Editing Item dialog box appears 3 Choose Off page 4 Choose OK The current symbols appear 5 Choose Edit Electrical or choose the Edit Electrical icon from the toolbar Assign Alternatives for OffPage Part x Picture Special Symbol Source Load Add No Delete Edit PowerLogic User s Guide 7 41 Special Symbols To add a new off page reference symbol 1 2 Choose Add This creates a new entry for the symbol Type a name for the new symbol Note t
5. Object Opens edits converts your object This menu changes depending on the OLE object See the OLE in PowerLogic chapter for more information View Menu Zoom Choosing the Zoom icon invokes Zoom mode The magnifying glass cursor indicates Zoom mode To zoom in locate the cursor to indicate the center of the zoom area and press the left button To zoom out locate the cursor and press the right button You can specify the zoom area Press and hold the left button and drag diagonally upward to zoom in diagonally downward to zoom out Sheet Adjusts the display to fit the sheet outline in the work area Information that is external to the sheet outline such as dimensions and notes does not display Redraw Refreshes the work area display without modifying the current zoom factor or coordinate position PowerLogic User s Guide 1 8 Menu Commands Extents Fits the display to encompass all objects contained in the current design This includes objects contained on a non viewed layer Push Hierarchy Pushes down the hierarchy into a hierarchical symbol to view the underlying logic Pop Hierarchy Pops up the hierarchy to the next level Capture Opens the Capture View dialog box for saving and restoring work area views Previous View Restores the previous view of the work area Setup Menu Sheets Opens the Sheets dialog box Preferences Opens the Preferences dialog box Design Rules Opens t
6. Pushing Into the Hierarchy Use the View Push Hierarchy command to look inside or push down into a hierarchical symbol to view the underlying logic To navigate into a hierarchical symbol 1 Choose the View Push Hierarchy command from the menu 2 Select the hierarchical symbol If there is no underlying schematic representation of the selected symbol a blank sheet appears Moving Up the Hierarchy Use the View Pop Hierarchy command while in a hierarchical sub schematic to replace the current sheet with its corresponding hierarchical symbol Swapping Reference Designators os To swap two reference designators choose the Swap Reference Designator icon from the E Design toolbox 1 From the Design toolbox choose the Swap Ref Des Icon 2 Select the first part 3 Select another part to swap its reference designator with If the reference designator prefixes of the selected parts are different this swap also updates the reference designators of other parts in the package PowerLogic User s Guide 4 12 Bus Toolbox Swapping Pins oly To swap two part pins choose the Swap Pins icon from the Design toolbox PowerLogic swaps the pin number name and terminal of the pins you select You can also reverse pins when you place a part with the Mirror X and Mirror Y commands on the pop up menu This is often useful for improving the flow of the schematic 1 Choose the Swap Pins icon from the Design toolbox 2 Select the fir
7. Synchronize Pce Rules From PCB 9e Hee Compare PCB Compares the netlist in the current PowerLogic schematic to the netlist in the current PowerPCB design This comparison uses the Check ASCIT tool If differences exist they are reported in PowerPCB s default text editor See the Check ASCIT topic in the PowerPCB On line Help for more information Synchronize PCB Compares the netlist in the current PowerLogic schematic to the part and netlist in the current PowerPCB design Then the PowerPCB design is updated The Design synchronization complete message appears when the design is updated This comparison uses the ECOGEN tool See the ECOGEN topic in the PowerPCB On line Help for more information Rules to PCB Exports PowerLogic design rules to PowerPCB PowerPCB rules are updated PowerLogic User s Guide 9 15 OLE PowerPCB Connection Rules from PCB Exports PowerPCB design rules to PowerLogic PowerLogic design rules are updated Send Netlist Exports a netlist with rules from the current PowerLogic schematic to the current PowerPCB design PowerPCB is updated OLE Document Tab The Document tab allows you to open a file or create a new file within PowerPCB The name of the PowerPCB file to which PowerLogic is connected also appears in this tab OLE PowerPCB Connection Receive Send Design Document Preferences ESpadspwr files purdemoa pcb New PCB File Creates a new file within Po
8. 256 Part Para Ref 1024 Part Para Names 2048 Nets 256 Nets chars 1024 Off Page 736 NEXT SHEET NUMBER 1 ALLOCATED ALLOCATED 64 1024 64 128 512 64 128 512 lolx USED 2 126 27 263 1154 68 144 The Off Page report lists the X Y coordinate location and sheet number of all off page ground and power symbols in the schematic Use the report to quickly locate an off page symbol using the S Search modeless command An error message appears when a net contains only one off page reference The format of the Off Page report follows OFF PAGE REFERENCE REPORT time Signal Sheet Signal Sheet name no X Y coordinate name no X Y coordinate PADSPWR LOGICFILES filename SCH dat Sheet no X Y coordinate Sheet no X Y coordinate PowerLogic User s Guide 11 16 Creating Reports Bill of Materials The Bill of Materials report produces a user configurable list of the parts contained in the current schematic You can direct any part attribute in the schematic to a Bill of Materials report 1 In the Reports dialog box choose Setup to specify or modify the Bill of Materials report characteristics 2 Choose the tab that represents the Bill of Materials report characteristics that you want to set Choose from Attributes Format or Clipboard View 3 When you choose one these tabs the options for that tab appear Set the options you
9. Initially the program assigns the pin number as the pin name Alphanumeric pin names can be a maximum of 4 characters All alphanumeric characters are accepted You cannot use special characters such as exclamation marks asterisks O and dollar signs If alphanumeric pin names are specified in the electrical description they are substituted for the part type pin numbers in the schematic and the netlist For example in place of pin number 1 the first alphanumeric pin name will appear in place of pin number 2 the second alphanumeric pin name listed will appear and so forth You must define all terminals with an alphanumeric name when non numeric pin names are enabled for a part type If you only need a few pins defined as alphanumeric then define the non alphanumeric pins as the terminal number For example IN OUT 345 GND To change the pin name 1 Double click on the pin you want to change in the Alphanumeric Pins multicolumn list box or select the pin and choose Edit 2 Type a new name in the Name column Part Information for Part RN2 2 x General PCB Decals Gates Signal Pins Attributes Alphanumeric Pins Connector OK Cancel Help PowerLogic User s Guide 7 24 Part Information for Part Alphanumeric Pins Multicolumn List Box Lists assigned pins by number and any associated name you define Number Lists the decal pin number You can associate the decal pin with the alphanumer
10. Manufacturer 2 Edit Part Number 4M100415 Apply update to This Part All Parts This Type Cancel Help Browse Lib Attr Opens the Browse Library Attributes dialog box that lists all attribute names in all libraries Choose an attribute to add from this list Add Adds an attribute Type new attribute names and values in the Name and Value text boxes To add an attribute 1 Choose Add 2 Type an attribute name in the Name text box 3 Type an attribute value in the Value text box Delete Removes the selected attribute from the list Edit Modifies an attribute Select an attribute from the Attributes multicolumn list box and then choose Edit and type a new name or value in the appropriate text box You can also double click on an attribute To modify an attribute 1 Select an attribute from the Attributes list box 2 Choose Edit You can also double click on an attribute 3 Type a new name or value in the appropriate text box and press Enter Apply Update To Area Applies the attribute changes to either the selected part or all parts of the same type PowerLogic User s Guide 5 6 Managing Attributes in a Schematic Query Modify Part Text Visibility The Visibility button on the Query Modify Part dialog box controls the display of text associated with the selected part You can control the visibility of one part or all parts of the same type See the Query Modify Part topic in the Design
11. Note capitalization This option is associated with another modeless command BLT BLT is the Log Test it finds and runs the BMW macros to playback a recorded PowerLogic session See the Modeless Commands topic in this chapter for more information PowerLogic User s Guide 1 1 Starting PowerLogic build Includes the build number in the Help About option filename Opens the specified filename when opening PowerLogic You must include the path to the file Type the filename Do not use a hyphen before the filename in the command line Opens the last file you had open when you start PowerLogic mmacro name Runs the specified macro in the default macro file for example to run the macro file MyMacro type mMyMacro Mmacro file Specifies what file to use as the default macro file for example to run the macro MyMacro that lives in the macro file userl mcr type Muser1 mcr mMyMacro nc Starts PowerLogic without displaying the splash screen that includes copyright information Using Start up Options To use command line options ie aS Qe des ck Choose Start Settings Taskbar Choose the Start Menu Programs tab and choose the Advanced button Highlight the icon in which to add the command line option Choose File Properties Choose the Shortcut tab At the end of the executable string in the Target text box press the Spacebar and type the command line switch you want to use For example to start a macr
12. Sheet No 3 Add All gt gt Preview eno ee lt lt Remove Help Bemove All m Items M Cons WN M Pats NM M Pinnum y M Bues E M RefDes NM 7 NetNeme MI M Lines Eo M Pes N Iv Text Bg rog Iv HierComp Mil r Selected Color Bee ee eee eee CM O ED MES AO E ES DS MES AO YI Available Lists all available sheets Double click on the item name to add it to the Selected list Selected Lists all sheets selected for plotting Add Adds the selected sheet s in the Available list to the Selected list Add All Adds every sheet in the Available list to the Selected list Remove Removes the selected sheet s from the Selected list and returns them to the Available list Remove All Removes every sheet from the Selected list and returns them to the Available list PowerLogic User s Guide 11 3 Print Plot Operations Items Area Specifies items for printing plotting and assigns colors to items Items with a check box that is turned on will print plot To assign color to an item first choose a color in the Selected Color area then choose the color box to the right of each item that you want to change Selected Color Area Specifies a color for assignment to items e For pen plots and color printers choose one of the available colors To change the available colors refer to the Pen Plotter Setup topic in this chapter e For black and white printers and photoplots black is the only av
13. The pin is added to the Signal Pins multicolumn list box You can assign a signal name after adding the pin Remove Removes the selected signal name assignments from the Signal Pins multicolumn list box Attributes Tab Use the Attributes tab in the Part Information dialog box to add an attribute to a part See the Working with Attributes chapter for information on adding attributes to the libraries or at the schematic level To add an attribute to a part 1 Choose Add 2 Type an attribute name in the Attribute column 3 Type an attribute value in the Value column To modify an attribute 1 Double click on an attribute from the Attribute multicolumn list box or select the attribute and choose Edit 2 Type a new name or value in the appropriate text box To delete an attribute from the part 1 Select the attribute 2 Choose Delete PowerLogic User s Guide 7 22 Part Information for Part Note Modifying attributes in the Attributes tab modifies the attribute only in the part being edited Use the Manage Schematic Attributes dialog box and the Library Manager dialog box to manage attributes design wide or in all libraries Part Information for Part PAL16R8 xi General PCB Decals Gates Signal Pins Attributes Eeee Ens Connector Attribute Value PROGRAMMABLE ARRAY LOGIC PAL PART NUMBER TBD MFG 1 ADVANCED MICRO DEVICES MFG 2 NATIONAL SEMICONDUCTOR Edit Add Delete Brow
14. allow you to use parts with errors in a design PowerLogic User s Guide 7 46 yO sa Chapter 8 b d Drafting Operations This chapter discusses drafting commands in PowerLogic and how to use the Query Modify mode to get information on and modify objects in PowerLogic The topics in this chapter include Drafting Toolbox Query Modify Drafting Toolbox The Drafting toolbox provides drafting commands to create lines arcs text and all other items not generally associated with connectivity Use the Drafting toolbox to create and edit drafting objects Use pop up menus to choose the shape you want to draw or to cancel a command 49 To open the Drafting toolbox choose the Drafting Toolbox icon from the toolbar o Iv e Me as i Ie gc Add Text Adds a free text item to the schematic See the Adding Text topic in this chapter for more information E Create 2D Line Adds a 2D line item such as a polygon circle rectangle or path Also specifies the drafting angle for and adds arcs to polygons or paths See the Creating 2D Line Items topic in this chapter for more information Y Modify 2D Line Modifies 2D line items using the following techniques e Pulls an arc from a segment or corner e Splits a segment e Changes the line width of an item e Fills a closed polygon e Changes the line style to solid or dotted See the Modifying 2D Line Items topic in this chapter for more information Po
15. extension PowerLogic User s Guide 3 10 The Macro Recorder The PowerLogic macro recorder is based on the design database grid rather than the screen display Recorded actions are screen resolution independent allowing you to create macros on one system and play them back on other platforms and systems with different screen resolutions Start a macro command by selecting Setup Macro The Macro dialog box appears which provides access to all of the macro command functions The Macro command also allows you to record an entire PowerLogic session in one log file providing troubleshooting information and documenting failures Macros and Dialog Boxes Dialog box actions are recorded as results rather than actions so when you replay you don t see the dialog boxes in the replay process as you do with the Microsoft Windows macro recorder Because of this you can t create a macro that stops on an open dialog box it must follow through to some result or action For example you can create a macro that chooses File Open selects a file and chooses OK The macro when played back opens that file You cannot however record a macro that selects File Open opens the Open dialog box then waits for you to select a file The Microsoft Windows macro recorder performs like this however it is screen dependent and you cannot transfer its macros from one computer to another Macro Files Macros are created in and stored in macro files that h
16. macro file e Choose Tools Macros from the menu highlight the macro to play from the list then choose Run e For macros that you added to the Tools menu with Add to Menu choose Tools and select the macro name under Macros e Press the assigned shortcut key See the Assigning Shortcut Keys topic in this chapter for information on assigning macros and adding macros to the Tools menu PowerLogic User s Guide 3 17 The Macro Recorder Recording a PowerLogic Session When you enable on line macros you create a log file of the session which you can play back Use log files to reproduce problems for program troubleshooting or to start a series of actions to create items in the design To enable recording of an entire session change the following in your pwrlogic ini file macros LOGMode 0 LOGCompressionMode 1 to macros LOGMode 1 LOGCompressionMode 0 The file next log is created in your padspwr powerlogic directory the next time you start PowerLogic All actions in the next session are recorded to this file and the file is stored when you exit PowerLogic or a system failure occurs In addition to the log file a copy of the current pwrlogic ini is created and named next ini Note Existing next log and next ini files are overwritten each time you start PowerLogic Copy these files to other names to retain them Play Back a Recorded Session To play back a recorded log file Rename the current powerlog
17. want to change Optionally you can choose the other tabs to set other options if necessary 4 When you finish the Bill of Materials setup choose OK Choose Cancel to close the dialog box without saving any of the changes Attributes Tab The Attribute tab dialog enables you to modify the attribute content the corresponding column headings and column width of the Bill of Material report The content of the multicolumn list box originates from the ini file To update the ini section with new values from the Attributes tab choose OK The attribute order in the content list determines the column arrangement in the BOM report There is a limit of 12 attributes in the Bill of Materials report Wi of Materials Setup x Attributes Format Clipboard View Part Attribute Field Header Item 5 QTY Oy 5 REF DES Reference 10 PART TYPE Part Name 15 MFG 1 Manufacturer 15 PART DESC Description 30 Part Attribute Lists up to twelve attribute names The name must exactly match the exact name of the attribute in the part library Each attribute defines a column in the BOM report PowerLogic User s Guide 11 17 Creating Reports Field Header Specifies the column heading for each attribute in the report You can specify any character except the colon Width Specifies an integer that represents the number of characters across the column for each attribute in the report Type a value between 1 a
18. 14 OLE Desien Taba uae A a Rk 9 15 OLE Doc ment PAD aede p testi adu te eias 9 16 O S TAB t tmu UE aestus iit ttu 9 16 Visual Basic SOriptingsssesadi n n WR HERE REP REPRE EHE EEEE A REL Dash dad eee eo ara 9 17 Sax Basic Engine Dialog BOX contecta ie die d eet 9 18 Visual Basic Scripts Dialog Box eene ener 9 21 Visual Basic Sample Scripts ssssssssssssssseee eee eee 9 22 Chapter 10 Design Rules and Layers Setting Design Rules nido 10 1 Rules erario tet eet ete t ete oh abia 10 2 Default Rules 5 iden ii dug uan eun 10 3 MULUS MAC MM Mp Rp pM 10 4 IT A E SA 10 6 PowerLogic User s Guide xiv Contents Conditional Rules anta UU 10 7 Differential Paisie toot dre ete oo tt e rade ete eee OEN 10 9 A ONO 10 10 Glearance RuleSusots sits decente eterne emen ts eedem eine ba Rd tate 10 11 Routiag Rules ty fie es tested addat a i Ua Ua a t d bo d t d dit 10 12 High speed Rules tirita caddie a HO RE QR REA FE een rd dns 10 15 Export Rules to PCBs enti d eve ecce cen eee e esi eee Re n 10 18 Import Rules from PGB td ad ecc aes inane eee pd Ii 10 18 IA EN 10 19 Layer Thickness Dialog Box x aeg tege ds 10 20 Plane Layer Net Assignments sssesssseeeee eee eee enne nennen nenne enne 10 21 Increasing the Number of Electrical Layers sssssseeseee eene 10 22 Reassigning Electrical Layer Data oooconnonocococonononocononnnnoconnnn coronan eee enne nnns 10 22 Chapter 11 Printing and Plotting Prit Pl t Operations S
19. 4 5 6 Te Choose Tools Forward ECO to PCB The Forward ECO to PCB dialog box appears Specify the design to update Specify the file that contains the updates that you want to place in an older design Specify an output file Specify whether the part types in the PCB design have Value and Tolerance attributes included Specify an unused pins net name if one exists in either the current or older design Choose the Run button PowerLogic places the ECO file in the padspwr logicfiles directory You can now open the PCB layout system and import the engineering changes Forward ECO to PCB Newjscnenaic Design les es 9 v C Jv Include value and Tolerance PowerLogic User s Guide 2 9 ECO Operations Original Schematic Design to Compare Area Specify the schematic design to update Use Current Schematic Design Turn this option on to use the open design as the original design You cannot choose the current design as both the original design and the new design If you do not want to use the current design as the original design turn this option off and specify an original design in the Original Schematic Design File text box To compare a schematic to a design first export the PCB file to ASCII format Original Schematic Design File Specify a design to use as the original design You can specify a sch file a schematic netlist file in ASCII format or a PCB design in ASCII format Either type a pa
20. 7 6 dialog box 7 6 to library 8 2 views 1 21 Save As 1 5 Save icon 1 13 PowerLogic User s Guie Index Sax Basic Engine dialog box 9 18 Scaling plots 11 5 Schematic editor mode 1 14 Schematic maximum size xvii Schematic parameters outputting 2 4 Schematics creating 4 1 Scripting in Visual Basic 9 17 9 24 Scroll bars 1 19 Search 1 12 Search modeless commands 1 22 Segments move bus segment 4 15 splitting 8 6 Select gate decals 7 8 dialog box 7 8 libraries 6 2 OLE objects 9 7 pin decals 7 41 sheets netlist output 2 6 Select icon 1 13 Select items dialog box 11 3 Selection commands pop up menu 1 30 Sending a netlist to PowerPCB 9 16 Set verb mode 1 31 Setting preferences 3 1 Setting the part origin 7 46 Setup menu 1 9 Setup plotter or printer 11 2 Setup via dialog box 10 15 Shapes adding 8 4 Sheet command 1 8 1 14 Sheet dialog box 4 16 Sheet list box 1 13 Sheet number 11 16 Sheet parameters outputting 2 4 Sheets 1 19 off page numbers per line 4 35 parent 4 34 previous forward 1 16 Sheets to print or plot 11 3 Shielding 10 17 In 13 Shortcut keys 1 25 assigning to macros 3 16 Shoving allowing 10 14 Show current statement Visual Basic 9 20 Signal names assigning to pins 7 21 Signal pins 4 29 Signal pins tab part information dialog box 7 21 Single gate parts 4 4 creating 7 2 Sizing OLE objects 9 8 Source application opening an OLE o
21. Assign The decal moves to the Assigned Decals list box the decal is assigned to the part Note As a shortcut double click on a decal name to assign it to the part You can assign up to four decals All assigned decals must have the same number of pins Unassign Removes decals from the Assigned Decals list box and returns them to the Unassigned Decals list box To delete a decal assignment 1 Select a decal name from the Assigned Decals list box 2 Choose Unassign The decal moves to the Unassigned Decals list box the decal is not assigned to the part PowerLogic User s Guide 7 20 Part Information for Part Up and Down Changes the order of assigned decals in the Assigned Decals list box The first decal is the default decal Use Up and Down to move the decal you want to use as the default decal to the top of the Assigned Decals list box Reset Returns the options on the current tab to their original settings the settings that appeared when you first opened the tab Reset only resets the current tab Signal Pins Tab Use the Signal Pins tab in the Part Information dialog box to assign signal names to pins such as ground and power pins For the parts shipped with PowerLogic the standard ground signal name is GND the standard power signal name is 5V You should follow this convention for your part types Part Information for Part RN2 2 x General PCB Decals Gates Signal Pins Attributes Alphanumer
22. Exports one or more selected items to an ASCII file You can then import this file to another library A prompt asks you to supply the filename List to File Produces a report about the selected items If you select a read only library the New Edit Delete Copy and Import buttons gray Search Filter Several dialog boxes contain a Filter area Use Filter to search the selected library for a specific item name or for names that match a wildcard text string Use the Library drop down list to choose library directories See the Preface for more information Modifying the Library List Order When you add a part to the design you are actually retrieving information about that part from the library Use the Library List dialog box to tell the program which libraries to search and in what order Choose File Library and choose Lib List on the Library Manager dialog box The Library List dialog box contains a list of libraries to search The libraries are searched in the order in which they are listed beginning with the first library in the list Library List x Library C padspwr lib common Lm CApadspwrMibxamd Remove Cancel C padspwr lib anlogdev C padspwr lib connect C padspwr lib intel C padspwr lib motor ic Down Help Iv Lineltems Available V a E Bead Only Iv Allow Search PowerLogic User s Guide 6 4 Library Manager Library Lists the libraries to search The libraries are searched
23. Filter Area Searches the selected library for a specific part or item name or for names that match a wildcard text string See the Preface for more information This Gate Updates only the selected gate This Part Updates only a part or all associated gates of a part All Parts of This Type Updates all matching gates and or parts in the design PowerLogic User s Guide 4 30 Query Modify Query Modify PCB Decal Assignment Use the Query Modify PCB Decal Assignment dialog box to assign alternate PCB decals to schematic parts Decal names are included in the netlist file to display the proper decal or footprint when the file is imported into the PCB design file You can choose a decal assigned as an alternate during part creation override the decal with one from the library or enter a name for an undefined decal you plan to create later in PowerPCB o 1 Choose the Query Modify icon from the toolbar 2 Select a part from the schematic by selecting a construction line or text string associated with the part The Query Modify Part dialog box appears 3 Choose the PCB Decals icon The Query Modify PCB Decal Assignment dialog box appears 4 Choose an Alternate Decal from the current part type definition in the library or choose Browse to retrieve a new decal from any library To enter a name for a decal you plan to create later in PowerPCB type the new decal name in the Assigned in Schematic text box 5 Choose O
24. Layers Increasing the Number of Electrical Layers To increase the number of electrical layers in the database 1 Choose Setup Layer Definition The Layers Setup dialog box appears 2 Choose Increase 3 You are prompted for the new number of electrical layers Type a value between the current number of electrical layers and 30 You cannot decrease the number of electrical layers The Reassign Layers dialog box appears You can reassign the electrical information on any existing electrical layer to a new layer The new electrical layers enter the database with default parameter values Reassigning Electrical Layer Data Use the Reassigning Layers dialog box to move data from one electrical layer to another in PowerPCB 1 Choose Setup Layer Definition The Setup Layers dialog box appears 2 Choose Reassign The Layer Reassignment dialog box appears By default there is no reassignment 4 Reassign Layers x tt of Electrical Layers 4 Help 2 Cancel Teen Old Layer 1 New Layer I Select the list box row corresponding to the old layer number Type the new layer number in the text box The following information moves from the old layer to the new layer e Traces and vias e Drafting objects e Layer name layer type routing direction and component plane layer parameters 5 Choose OK PowerLogic User s Guide 10 22 y Chapter 11 b d Printing and Plotting This chapter discusses t
25. Managing Special Symbols in the Library topic in this chapter for more information Creating New Special Symbols Special symbols in PowerLogic include power symbols ground symbols and off page reference symbols PowerLogic allows only one part definition in the library for special symbols For this reason the options for these types gray when you choose File New To create a new special symbol 1 2 2 4 5 A 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Choose Tools Part Editor Choose File Open The Select Type of Editing Item dialog box appears Choose the type of symbol to add Off page Power or Ground Choose OK The current symbols for the selected type appear Choose Edit Electrical or choose the Edit Electrical icon from the toolbar The Assign Alternatives dialog box for the type of special symbol appears Choose Add A new entry is created Type a name for the new symbol and enter the appropriate information Choose OK An error message appears since you haven t created the symbol yet Answer No to the prompt Choose Edit Gate or choose the Edit Gate Decal icon from the toolbar Choose Extended Selection from the pop up menu The Select Pin Decal dialog box appears Choose the new symbol name Answer OK to create the new symbol Use the Create 2D Line icon from the Drafting toolbox to create the symbol Reposition the text strings as required Choose File Complete The new symbol and existing symbols appear
26. Offset For any choice but Scale to Fit or Centered you can define the margin offsets X and Y Offsets Sets offset values You can only set offset values when Justification is a position other than Scale to Fit or Centered Note The plot location is calculated after the plot is rotated and scaled Scaling Defines the plot size to actual size ratio 2 to 1 scaling results in a plot that is twice real size PowerLogic User s Guide 11 5 Print Plot Operations Plot Job Name Plots the schematic name time and date Plot Window Plots the current view of the schematic window Preview Reflects changes you make to the Positioning options to show how the information will plot The plotted information is represented by a blue rectangle Pen Plotter Setup Use the Pen Plotter Setup dialog box to set pen colors and other global pen plot options To open this dialog box first choose Pen in the Output Device area of the Print Plot dialog box and then choose Device Setup Number of Pens ET Pen Line width 16 V Rotate Axis r Pen Eolors a nas H AAA Hep di p Plotting Size ES Bises Jal al e 2 ef fes a fer 3 MI ES 2 An Other gt y 21 0 Advanced Number of Pens Specifies the number of pens in your device 1 16 Pen Line Width Sets the pen width in mils Rotate Axis Reverses the X and Y axis Pen Colors Area Assigns colors to p
27. PowerLogic These commands help you to open save import and export schematics The topics in this chapter include Opening Files New Files Saving Files Importing and Exporting Files Creating a Netlist ECO Operations Opening Files El Use File Open to open a schematic design in PowerLogic Before displaying the File Open dialog box a prompt is displayed to save the existing design This occurs even if a file hasn t been opened Choose No to display the File Open dialog box Choosing Yes from the prompt window displays the File Save As dialog box File Open Dialog Box The File Open dialog box displays the schematic files contained in the default padspwr logicfiles directory The list of displayed files includes those created in PowerLogic 1 2 and PowerLogic 3 0 Choose a file then choose Open to load the design into PowerLogic You can choose a schematic file from a different directory using the controls at the top of this dialog box You can also open a file by choosing the File Open icon from the Toolbar or by dragging the file from Windows Explorer and dropping it into the PowerLogic window New Files Use the File New command to clear the current schematic from memory and start a new schematic 1 Choose File New from the menu 2 The prompt Save old file before resetting appears If you choose No a blank drawing sheet representing sheet 1 of the new schematic displays in the work area If you choose Yes the Fil
28. PowerLogic 3 0 eee eee eene nennen nennen E xvi Conventions RE S CN UN DER TRECE EG RR EE aaa 0g xvi Desien Gonventlofls n x 0 LN SEE REI Ea EE OE OE Eo O xvi Deacon xvii Frequently Asked Questions ssssssssesssseeeee enne nennen nenne enemies xxi Memory and Hardware sssssssssssssseeeeeeeee ener nnne nene n ener e nennen ener nennen xxi Installation OUESHOHSU ennemi ente din e dt A A dE AL xxi Compatibility with Older Design and Support Files ssssss xxi Questions on General PowerLogic Operations ssssssse eee xxii Chapter 1 The PowerLogic Interface Startno POWerLO SIC iiid d HE E GR E de E Ge 1 1 STUP OPUS 7 n GU UU UU UU UR OU UR OU UH D MH beet M ca d a d t e s 1 1 INR eene enne h enne nnne nennen nenne e nennen nennen 1 3 Menu Comriarids es nm n nS SIMI Td 1 4 A net tettetetetstettette A tet tette tette tette tette 1 4 Edi Men EEUU 1 5 View Menta 1 8 DELI aa OO E NER 1 9 o ys shen share hap a AN Soest aa Secs at acto ee stn eed eatin EEEN 1 10 Window eee ed E 1 11 Help Meni 5e d e de d has dit a d ie hs 1 12 Toolbars dnd ToolbOXeS ses RR SRI RR REUS ES REESE 1 12 eebricmu O A 1 12 LOMO E didas 1 17 Dockable and Resizable Toolbar and Toolboxes oooooccinonococicononnccconnonononnnoncnoonnoncnconono 1 17 Tool MP dp EH uae e ee e ee TE Eee rere 1 17 PowerLogic User s Guide vii Contents Work Area and Grid Settings eene nennen 1 18 Display Gti des oie ieee twi bnt repe
29. Splitting Segments Split converts a line segment into two separate segments joined by a third segment perpendicular to the original segment All line segments in a 2D line must have the same line width and style If you need to create a 2D element with more than one line width or style create two separate 2D lines and use the Combine command to join them 1 Choose the Modify 2D Line icon from the Drafting toolbox 2 Select the line to split 3 Choose Split from the pop up menu The new and divided segments follow the cursor movement You can choose one of the following from the pop up menu when splitting a segment Swap Corner Selects the other corner or line segment created by the split Del Corner Deletes the current corner Width Changes the line width of the item Solid Style and Dotted Style Changes the line style to a solid or a dashed line You cannot specify dotted lines for circles or arcs Orthogonal Moves are made in 90 degree increments Diagonal Moves are made in 45 degree increments Any Angle Moves are made at any angle 4 Indicate the end point of the new segment to complete the split PowerLogic User s Guide 8 6 Drafting Toolbox Combining 2D Line Items To merge two or more 2D line or text items into a single complex 2D line item choose the Combine icon from the Drafting toolbox This changes the default pop up menu to a specific pop up menu for combining 2D line items ep Once combined you c
30. TIE DOTS List of all tie dots in the sheet CONNECTION List of the connections in the sheet with the signal name and path NETNAMES List of all net names that are displayed in the schematic After all sheets are listed the file ends with END Creating a Netlist You can create a netlist compatible with PowerPCB Version 2 x or PowerPCB Version 3 0 e PowerPCB V2 output can optionally include Value amp Tolerance information e PowerPCB V3 output can optionally include Part Attribute information e Both formats support optional output of design rules with trace width individual sheet selection and hierarchical symbols inclusion PowerLogic User s Guide 2 5 Creating a Netlist To create a netlist 1 Open a PowerLogic design 2 Choose Tools Netlist to PCB The Netlist to PCB dialog box appears 3 Select PowerPCB V2 or PowerPCB V3 format from the Output drop down list box 4 Choose from the remaining options to include other information See the Netlist to PCB Dialog Box topic in this chapter for more information 5 Optionally choose Browse to indicate a different file name or location for the netlist The default is the design file name with an asc extension saved in the padpwr logicfiles directory Netlist to PCB Dialog Box The Netlist to PCB dialog box produces a netlist compatible with PowerPCB Version 2 x or PowerPCB Version 3 0 Dutput File Name C padspwir LogioFiies preview ase Browse Lx
31. The Unused report first lists unused parts and gates followed by a list of unused pins on each part The format for the Unused report follows UNUS UNUS part gate part gate UNUS part ref Part Stat ED ITEMS R ED GATE LIS type name gate name type name gate name ED PINS LIST type EPORT PADSPWR LOGICFIL des pin number ref des pin number istics ES filenam SCH dat tim The Part Statistics report lists information about all parts in the schematic The report includes the reference designator name and part type for each part in the schematic and for each pin on the part the pin type sheet location and signal name Use this report to locate possible errors in the schematic The format for the Part Statistics report follows PART STATUS R Ref ref ref ref Ref ref ref name pin no pin no pin no name pin no pin no PowerLogic User s Guide Part pin pin pin Part pin pin type type type type type Uype type nee nee nee nee nee EPORT PADSPWR LOGICFIL I no no no no no signal signal signal signal signal ES filenam name name name name name SCH dat tim 11 13 Creating Reports Net Statistics The Net Statistics report lists information for each net in the schematic The report
32. Tools Visual Basic Scripting menu along with Visual Basic Editor and Visual Basic Scripts Choose Stop scriptname to halt the execution of the currently running script PowerLogic User s Guide 9 17 Visual Basic Scripting Sax Basic Engine Dialog Box The Sax Basic Engine dialog box provides access to the Sax Basic Engine Visual Basic editor You can design and develop scripts that add to replace enhance or customize existing PowerLogic features To open the Visual Basic editor choose Tools Visual Basic Scripting Visual Basic Editor Scripts written in the Visual Basic editor comply with all Microsoft requirements in terms of Visual Basic syntax therefore you can play these scripts in any other Visual Basic interpreter such as Word or Excel However you cannot run all Visual Basic scripts created outside of the Sax Basic Engine within the Sax Basic Engine because the Sax Basic Engine is a subset of Visual Basic For example you cannot run the Automation samples within the Sax Basic Engine custom report wizard macro Sax Basic Engine design iO x Bu LG amp e Bm ct gt us m es s EB wir bject Generan X Proc Main e End Dialog Dim dlg 4s UserDialog dlg OutputFile 1 dig ext rep dig CustomName report rep dlg Header Wizard Report dlg IncTime 1 dig IncJob 1 dlg genHdr 1 dig ScriptName Wizard Generated Report Retry If Dialog dlg 1 Then Ok pressed take dialog va
33. Undefined 0 Down 5 Undefined 0 zi PowerLogic User s Guide 7 16 Part Information for Part Gate Decal and Alternates For each gate you must enter the CAE decal name the name of the logic symbol that is used to represent the part in the schematic Alternate decal assignments must have the same number of pins One primary and three alternate decals may be defined for each gate Gate and Pin Swap Information If at least one decal is assigned to a part you can enter or modify its gate information This includes swap enable or disable for gates within a part or between similar parts This information is used in the PCB design system when swapping is performed after placement for connection length minimization and routing optimization Pins with like numbers can swap within a gate Gates with like numbers can swap within the part or to other similar parts A one 1 in the Swap column indicates that the gate is swappable with gates of the same part type in the PCB design If a part contains more than one type of swappable gate identify the second type with the number 2 the third type with 3 etc The number 0 indicates that no swapping can occur You can assign pin type information in the Pins for Gate area for example Source or Load You can also assign a name to a pin for documentation purposes The pin name is not required Gates Multicolumn List Box Lists the gates defined for the part type Gate Lists the gate f
34. You cannot assign reference designators already in use 1 Choose Rename Part from the Query Modify Part dialog box An information window appears 2 Type the new part reference designator information 3 Choose OK Change Part Type Changes the selected part to a new part type The new part type can already exist in the schematic or in the parts library See the Change Part Type Dialog Box topic in this chapter for more information 1 Choose Change Type from the Query Modify Part dialog box The Change Part Type dialog box appears 2 Choose a new part type 3 Choose OK Note You can update the part definition in the schematic with a modified version in the library Choose the same part name and then choose All Parts This Type in the Apply Update to area Pin Count Use the Pin Count text box to control the upper limit of pin numbers available when assigning signal pins to parts without a PCB Decal If there is a PCB Decal assigned to the part this control shows the decal pin count and the edit box grays since the decal definition determines the number of pins 10 1 Choose the Query Modify icon from the toolbar 2 Select the part to modify by selecting a construction line or text string associated with the part 3 Type the new pin count Statistics Use Statistics to display gate and connection information for the selected part This information is displayed in the default text editor so you can sav
35. a part for example 7400 and apply those edits to all variations of 7400 searched for in the Prefix List To use a prefix type the prefix using a question mark as a wildcard character to indicate any character for which you want to search You can search using multiple variations in the prefix for example you can set the 7402 family prefix specification to the following 4 4HC 4HCT 4AS 4ALS 4AS 4LS Any edits you make apply to all of the parts contained within the above prefix string A shorthand description for 5400 and 7400 parts can be created using a prefix and a suffix The suffix defines an entire family of ICs to be stored under one part type This enables you to include all variations of the family with a single entry in the library The first part of the suffix is a backslash C followed by the number series that uniquely identifies the device family for example 100 for a 7400 74LS00 54L00 a 1192 for 74192 74HCT192 and so on PowerLogic User s Guide 7 12 Part Information for Part Editing Logic Families Use the Logic Families dialog box to add delete and modify logic family names and default reference designator prefixes To open the Logic Families dialog box choose Families from the Part Information dialog box The Logic Family dialog box lists all existing logic families and default reference designator prefixes To change the name or prefix of an existing Logic Family 1 Select the logic family from
36. and save it with a new name To make a copy of the CAE Decal 1 Choose Edit Part Editor 2 Choose File Open The Select Type of Editing Item dialog box appears See the Select Type of Editing Item topic in this chapter for more information 3 Choose the CAE Decal button PowerLogic User s Guide 7 26 Creating New Parts from Existing Parts Choose OK The Get Gate Decal from Library dialog box appears Set the filter and then highlight the part in the Decal list box Choose OK You enter the Part Editor and the decal appears Modify the decal as required Choose File Save As The Save Item to Library dialog box appears NP AS wo amp Type a name for the new CAE decal and choose a library directory 10 Choose OK 11 Choose File Exit Part Editor To make a copy of the part use the steps for copying a CAE decal above except choose Part Type instead of CAE Decal in Step 3 After you change the CAE decal and the electrical information save it as a new part Select Type of Editing Item Use this dialog box to choose the type of library item to create or modify Bi Select type of editing item EG Part Type Off Page types Connector Off Page C CAEDecal C Power C Pin Decal C Ground Cancel Help ui Part Type Creates or modifies an existing part See the Get Part Type from Library topic in this chapter for more information Connector Creates or modifies a connector See the Creatin
37. another user s files If you do not enter your initials the default is zz Delete Actions Before Last Save Deletes all entries in the log file between the first File Open and the last File Save command for each related design file Turning this option on helps to prevent replaying the wrong data Log Test Dialog Box Log Test x Media Directories Media Directories Displays all of the media directories A directory is created each time you use BMW Choose a directory from the list and choose OK to open and run the files in that directory Shortcut Keys For mouseless operation use keyboard shortcuts to start commands for selected items and change some system settings Following are the shortcut assignments for PowerLogic Control Key Shortcuts Ctrl B View sheet Ctrl C Copy Ctrl D Redraw Ctrl E Move selected group Ctrl F Flip selected on X axis Ctrl N New file PowerLogic User s Guide 1 25 Ctrl O Ctrl P Ctrl Q Ctrl R Ctrl S Ctrl V Ctrl W Ctrl X Ctrl Alt C Ctrl Alt E Ctrl Alt G Ctrl Alt M Ctrl Alt P Ctrl Alt S Ctrl Tab Ctrl PageDown Shift Ctrl D Shift Ctrl F Shift Ctrl P Shortcut Keys Open file Print Plot Query Modify Rotate selected Save Paste View Zoom mode Cut Display Colors Setup View Extents Preferences Toggle menu bar View Previous Status Window Cycle Alternate Gate Decals Reset delta coordinates to measure from current position Draw Group while in Move Group M
38. appear in the netlist for PowerPCB version 2 designs only PowerLogic evaluates parts that have either a different Value or Tolerance attribute as different part types Unused Pins Net Name area Ignore the Unused Pins Net Turn this option on to ignore the unused pins net in the original design essentially preserving the existing unused pins net in the design you re updating Otherwise the unused pins net is deleted Specify the net name when you turn this option on To compare a schematic to a design first export the PCB file to ASCII format Net Name Specify the name of the unused pins net in SPECCTRA The default name is NOT CONNECTED See the Unused Pins Net topic in the SPECCTRA Translator On line Help for more information The SPECCTRA Translator On line Help is included with PowerPCB Backward Annotate from PCB Use Tools Backward Annotate from PCB to update a schematic with changes that were made in the PowerPCB design database and saved in an ECO file Backward annotating the changes to the schematic results in modifications of part names and pin numbers See the Forward ECO to PCB topic in this chapter for information on forwarding changes from PowerLogic to PowerPCB PowerLogic User s Guide 2 12 ECO Operations You can backward annotate the following design information e Part changes e Gate changes e Pin changes e Net changes e Attribute changes Note Design Rule changes are not supported by ECO back
39. application opens inside of PowerLogic but runs in the background The source application s toolbar takes over PowerLogic s toolbar You can then work with the source application as you would if it was started outside of PowerLogic This is referred to as Visual Editing Click outside of the object and the PowerLogic toolbar takes over again You can continue to design in PowerLogic The source application continues to run in the background therefore you can click on the object and work in the source application at any time Insert Object Dialog Box Create New insert Object BEI Corel PHOTO PAINT 5 0 Image Cancel e CorelCHART 5 0 Chart Create tom Ete CorelDRAW 5 0 Graphic CorelDRAW 5 0 Presentation Exchat CorelE quation 1 0 Equation B CorelQUERY 5 0 Query T Display As Icon Media Clip zl Create New Result Inserts a new Bitmap Image object into your document PowerLogic User s Guide 9 3 OLE Object Linking and Embedding Insert Object Dialog Box Create from File E Insert Object MEI c oi Me Microsoft Word 60 Cancel Create from File T ACommoniy doc Browse M Link M Display As Icon Commonly doc Result Inserts a shortcut into your document which ut Ze represents the file The shortcut will be linked to the file so that changes to the file will be reflected in your document Change Icon Create New Creates a new linked or embedded obj
40. associated with the symbol reference designator part name pin number etc appears in a predefined location You can move the text to make room for other parts or connections or to make the schematic more readable You can redefine the characteristics of the selected text as you relocate the string when PowerLogic resumes the Adding Text function in Move mode You can move a pin number within a bounding area of one inch from its pin terminal You can move the off page sheet numbers line s independently of the net name Moving Connections When you move a part existing part connections follow the part movement After part repositioning you might need to move connections to improve the flow You can reposition a connection segment that is not a connection end point or you can reconnect a segment end point See the Changing a Connection topic in this chapter for information on disconnecting from a part or connection and reconnecting to another part or connection PowerLogic User s Guide 4 20 Modes of Operation Splitting a Connection To create new corners or a 90 degree turn in a connection 1 Choose the Move Mode icon from the toolbar or Set Command Mode Move Mode in the pop up menu SS 2 Select the segment 3 Choose Split Segment from the pop up menu The new and divided segments follow the cursor movement 4 Move the cursor to define the segment length You can choose Swap Corner from the pop up menu to defin
41. browse and list all attribute names from libraries specified in the Library List dialog box Browse Library Attributes x Attribute Group EA Cancel COLOR CORE LOSS CURRENT RATING Refresh DESCRIPTION s FERRITE AND SHAP FERRITE AND SHAPE MATING SPIL PART MATING SPIL PARTS PART DESC PART DESCRIPTON PART NO PART NUMBER PART NUMBER PARTY ND PRIMARY TURNS zl Attribute Name Lists the selected attribute name Group Allows you to choose an attribute group to view If you assign multiple attributes and some of those are structured attributes this drop down list box acts as a filter and allows you to choose the attribute group to view Library Attribute List Lists the attributes for the libraries in your library list This includes both part type and decal attributes Attribute values are not included in the list Refresh Resets the contents of the library attribute list box based on the Library List dialog box PowerLogic User s Guide 6 10 Y Chapter 7 Part Editor Operations This chapter discusses operations in the Part Editor You access the part editor from the Library Manager See the Library Operations chapter for more information This chapter covers the following topics The Part Editor Creating Single Gate Parts Creating Multigate Parts Part Information for Part Creating New Parts from Existing Parts Decal Wizard Terminal Toolbox Special Symbols The Part
42. button Removing Connections Outside the Boundary By default connections that extend outside the group are clipped so they stop at the rectangle used to define the group To exclude the entire connection from the group 1 Click the right mouse button 2 Turn the Cut Connections at Edge option off Adding to or Removing from a Group When creating a new group there may be objects inside the group definition you want to exclude from the group or objects outside of the group that you want to include Use the Ctrl key and the left mouse button to add or remove objects from the group To remove objects 1 Press the Ctrl key 2 Choose the objects to remove They are not highlighted when removed PowerLogic User s Guide 4 22 Group Operations To add objects 1 Press the Ctrl key 2 Choose the objects to add They are highlighted when added Note You must choose the reference designator text associated with the part when choosing a part to add or remove from the group You cannot remove connections tied to highlighted parts in the group without removing the parts Use the Cut Connector at Edge option to remove connections that extend outside the group boundary Moving a Group You can move a defined group to any location on the sheet with the Move command See the Copying a Group and Pasting a Group topics in this chapter to insert a group on a different sheet After defining a group 1 Choose Move from
43. chapter for more information Indicate the locations for the terminals Choose Cancel from the pop up menu when you finish adding terminals Choose the Set Pin Number icon from the Terminal toolbox See the Setting Pin Numbers topic in this chapter for more information Type the starting number in the information window Choose OK Select each pin or pin text in ascending sequence to assign a number You can click twice on a pin to skip a number Use the Change Pin Number icon from the Terminal toolbox to change a pin number if necessary See the Changing Pin Numbers topic in this chapter for more information Use the other options of the Terminal toolbox to modify the pin numbers and add pin names pin swapping information pin type etc Choose File Return to Part Answer Yes to the Keep cbanges to gate prompt automatically construct the decal Choose the Decal Wizard icon from the Drafting toolbox to open the Decal Wizard See the Decal Wizard topic in this chapter for more information Use the Decal Wizard to create the outline and add terminals Use the Terminal toolbox to modify the pin numbers created by the Decal Wizard and add pin names gate swapping information etc See the Terminal Toolbox topic in this chapter for more information Choose File Complete PowerLogic User s Guide 7 3 Creating Single Gate Parts Assigning Electrical Information to the Part El 1 2 N AM Choose Edit Electrical or ch
44. current function Dialog Editor Opens the dialog box editor Options Available only for class modules PowerLogic User s Guide 9 20 Visual Basic Scripting Visual Basic Scripts Dialog Box The Visual Basic Scripts dialog box provides easy access to your Visual Basic scripts In this dialog box you can load and run your most commonly used scripts You can also unload those scripts you don t use often This dialog box only runs existing scripts To open this dialog box choose Tools Visual Basic Scripting Visual Basic Scripts Visual Basic Scripts Mm ES add Part x In Menu un Alive Net List n Edit Bill of Materials Bill of Materials to Excel Custom Report Wizard Load File Modeless Attributes Modeless QM Part Modeless Visibility PADS Net List without Rules Sheet Hierarchy to Excel Help Close Description CpadspwiLogicOLE WEScip d Part BAS Run Runs the currently selected Visual Basic script Select a script from the drop down list box or from the list box and choose Run Scripts are compiled when you run them You can not run multiple scripts at the same time During script execution Run is grayed If the selected script has a compiling error it automatically opens in the Visual Basic editor for correction Edit Opens the Sax Basic Engine dialog box where you can edit the selected Visual Basic script In Menu Adds visual basic scripts to the Tools Visu
45. designator in the schematic Part Name The default location of the part type name in the schematic Free Label 1 The default location for the first attribute label See the Using Attribute Labels topic in the Working With Attributes chapter for more information on creating additional attribute labels Free Label 2 The default location for the second attribute label 4 Construct the new CAE decal for the part manually or use the Decal Wizard automatic part creation tool See the Constructing the Decal topic in this chapter for more information PowerLogic User s Guide 7 2 Creating Single Gate Parts After you create the decal for the part assign electrical information to it See the Assigning Electrical Information to the Part topic in this chapter for more information Save the part to the library See the Saving the Part to the Library topic in this chapter for more information Constructing the Decal To manually construct the decal 1 Es e 8 e le E 11 12 To 10 Choose the Drafting Toolbox icon from the toolbar See the Drafting Operations chapter for more information Choose the Create 2D Line icon from the Drafting toolbox and then construct the body of decal Choose the Terminal Toolbox icon from the toolbar See the Terminal Toolbox topic in this chapter for more information Choose the Add Terminal icon from the Terminal toolbox See the Adding Terminals topic in this
46. display properties for all attributes in the design Show Rules Opens the Net Rules dialog box where the Nets list box displays the currently selected net s See the Net Rules topic in the Design Rules and Layers chapter for more information Size Opens the Text Size dialog box where you can change the height and width of the text string Swap Pins This command appears on two pop up menus e With one pin selected using the Pins Filter on the Object Selector toolbar choose Swap Pins from the pop up menu e With no objects selected choose Modify Part Swap Pins from the pop up menu and then choose the two pins you want to swap A prompt provides you with the opportunity to keep the connections tied to the current electrical pin or to swap the electrical connections along with the pin number Vertical Justify Moves the insertion point up the text string characters for top center or bottom of character placement Visibility Opens the Part Text Visibility dialog box See the Query Modify Part Text Visibility topic in the Working With Attributes chapter for information PowerLogic User s Guide 1 32 LICENSE AGREEMENT AND LIMITED PRODUCT WARRANTY PADS Software Inc PADS and the undersigned customers The Customer hereby agree that the Software Products being licensed to the Customer and as amended from time to time are the property of and embody proprietary technology owned by or licensed to PADS Unaut
47. features within PowerLogic more accessible to everyone developer and non developer Visual Basic is a simple scripting language developed by the Microsoft Corporation in the late 1980s to provide users with a unified language in Windows 95 and Windows NT More and more Windows applications like PowerLogic include Visual Basic capabilities such as Word and Excel to allow users to customize these applications using a standard scripting language The Visual Basic Engine includes the entire development environment required to develop Visual Basic scripts including an editor a debugger an interpreter a tracer variable watch a dialog editor new open save print capabilities and an Automation object browser These capabilities ensure that every user can jump into Visual Basic scripting without any previous knowledge of programming To open the Visual Basic editor choose Tools Visual Basic Scripting Visual Basic Editor PADS Visual Basic editor is the Sax Basic Engine by Sax Software Corporation In addition to the Visual Basic editor PowerLogic has a script manager that lets you manage your existing Visual Basic scripts Using the script manager you can load your most frequently used scripts and run them independently from the editor itself To open the Visual Basic Scripts dialog box choose Tools Visual Basic Scripting Visual Basic Scripts Note While a Visual Basic script is running a third command Stop scripiname appears on the
48. for a selected item only when it comes in contact with different level of the hierarchical order To open the High speed Rules dialog box 1 Choose Setup Design Rules The Rules dialog box appears 2 3 Choose the Default Class or Net icon The appropriate dialog box appears Choose the High speed icon The High speed Rules dialog box appears A dialog box subtitle states what set of rules you are setting High speed rules for Default Class or Net r Parallelism Rules Length Gap Minimum Masimum Parallelism 1000 200 Length o 50000 Tandem roo 200 Stub Length roo m Agaressor Delay ns po fio ooo EE Gevectance oF n foco ap Fics Ge m Impedance Ohm 50 000 moo Use Het coo oo 1 1 z Parallelism Area Specifies rules for parallel and tandem checking This value determines the distance and standoff against the specific item and everything else in the design To set a narrower check use Conditional Rules to define specific Source and Against items Parallel Rules Restricts the distance that traces in different nets on the same layer can run together Tandem Rules Restricts the distance that traces in different nets on different layers can run together Define the following parallel tandem rules Length Sets the maximum parallel tandem distance Gap Sets the minimum gap between traces below which the parallel tandem rules apply Choo
49. gate and pin swap 7 17 outputting 2 4 Decal assignments query modify for PCB 4 31 Decal parameters hierarchical symbol 4 9 Decal wizard 7 34 PowerLogic User s Guide Index Default rules 10 2 10 3 clearance 10 3 high speed 10 3 routing 10 3 default txt 3 1 3 9 Delay 10 17 Delete command 1 7 Deleting all OLE objects command 1 8 bus segments 4 13 gates 7 18 groups 4 24 high speed rules 10 17 library objects 6 4 OLE objects 9 13 parts ECO file format 2 17 pin from net ECO file format 2 17 symbols 4 21 Delete mode 4 21 Delete mode icon 1 13 DeMorgan representation 4 5 Design and hierarchy modeless commands 1 22 Design conventions xvii Design grid 1 4 1 18 Design operations 4 1 overview 4 1 Design preferences 3 4 Design rules 1 9 10 1 class 10 2 10 4 clearance 10 1 10 11 conditional 10 7 10 16 default 10 2 10 3 dialog box 10 1 differential pairs 10 9 exporting to PowerPCB 9 15 10 18 hierarchy 10 2 10 3 high speed 10 1 10 15 importing from PowerPCB 9 16 10 18 outputting 2 4 net 10 2 10 6 report 10 10 routing 10 1 10 12 setting 10 1 In 4 Design toolbox 1 17 4 1 add connection 4 5 add part 4 2 displaying 1 13 modify hierarchical symbol 4 12 new hierarchical symbol 4 9 swap pins 4 13 swap reference designator 4 12 viewing 1 11 Differences report ECO 2 11 Differential pairs 10 9 Directories 1 25 Disconnect from PCB OLE
50. group select the objects 2 Choose Edit Group Copy from the menu 3 Indicate the location Filter Sets one of the selection filters or enters Group Selection mode Select Group Places PowerLogic in Group Selection Mode Select Parts Turns on the Part Filter See the Object Selector Toolbar topic in this chapter for more information Select Gates Turns on the Gates Filter See the Object Selector Toolbar topic in this chapter for more information Select Nets Turns on the Net Filter See the Object Selector Toolbar topic in this chapter for more information Select Pins Turns on the Pin Filter See the Object Selector Toolbar topic in this chapter for more information PowerLogic User s Guide 1 7 Menu Commands Insert PowerPCB Object Links to a PowerPCB file or embeds a PowerPCB object into a PowerLogic design See the OLE in PowerLogic chapter for more information Insert New Object Opens the Insert Object dialog box where you can insert a linked or embedded object in PowerLogic See the OLE in PowerLogic chapter for more information Delete All OLE Objects Allows you to remove all of the OLE objects in a design The prompt A current OLE Linked and Embedded objects will be removed from this Design Do you want to continue appears Links Opens the Links dialog box where you can edit the link of an OLE object See the Editing OLE Links topic in the OLE in PowerLogic chapter for more information
51. list box in the Assigned Keys area The macro name appears next to the key combination 3 Optionally turn In Menu on to add the macro to the menu Note You can change the shortcut key assignment of a macro following the same steps but you cannot use the same shortcut keys for more than one macro If you try to assign the same shortcut key to more than one macro a prompt indicates that the shortcut key will be reassigned You can only assign shortcut keys to the open macro file To remove any key assignment from the macro 1 Highlight the current key assignment 2 Enter the list box to display the macros 3 Choose the empty space displayed above the first macro Macro Status Dialog Box Macro file CiApadspwriLogicFilesttest mcr Assigned Keys Iv Confirm Changes w PowerLogic User s Guide 3 16 The Macro Recorder Drop down list box Lists all of the macros in the open macro file In Menu Adds macros to or removing macros from the Tools menu Files added to the menu appear next to the assigned macro name List box Lists all shortcut keys Current assignments of macros and additions to the menu In Menu are also reflected in this list Note To add a macro to the menu you must first assign a shortcut key Confirm Changes Confirms changes to existing assignments Macro Playback There are three methods available for playing back macros contained in the open
52. new attribute to library 6 9 new attributes 5 4 off page references 4 6 part 4 2 part ECO file format 2 16 pin 7 18 pin to net ECO file format 2 16 polygons 8 4 power and ground connections 4 7 terminal 7 35 7 36 text 8 1 8 2 to library 8 8 Advanced pen plotter setup 11 7 Advanced photoplotter setup 11 9 Advanced scripts 9 24 Against rule object 10 8 Allow ripup 10 14 PowerLogic User s Guide Allow shove 10 14 Alphanumeric pins tab part information dialog box 7 24 Alternate decal assignments 7 17 Alternate for ground part 7 43 Alternate for off page 7 41 Alternate for power part 7 42 Alternate symbols 4 5 Angles modeless commands 1 22 Annotation forward and backward 2 8 ANSII symbol standards 4 5 Apertures 11 8 count 11 9 Apply xx Arcs pulling 8 6 asc files importing 2 2 ASCII 2 4 exporting 2 3 file format 2 5 importing 2 2 Assign nets 10 21 Assigning signal names to pins 7 21 Attribute manager 1 10 Attributes adding new 5 4 adding new to library 6 9 adding to a schematic 5 3 adding to library 7 22 browse in library 5 1 6 10 compare for ECO 2 12 creating 5 1 5 2 creating in library 6 6 deleting from a schematic 5 3 labels creating 5 9 labels overview 5 8 In 1 managing in library 5 1 6 7 managing in schematic 5 2 modifying 5 1 5 4 query modify for parts 5 5 Attributes tab bill of materials setup dialog box 11 17 Attributes tab pa
53. not unique across all libraries display the overwrite warning prompt If you choose Yes to overwrite an existing decal with the renamed decal it replaces the library copy in its current library If you answer No to the prompt you can choose a different decal name and directory Saving a Modified Part Type with a Different Name If you modify a part type and want to keep the existing library copy use the Save Part and Gate Decals As dialog box to rename the part After modifying the electrical information 1 Choose File Save As The Save Part and Gate Decals As dialog box appears 2 Type a new name for the part type in the Name of Part text box Optionally use the Library drop down list box to specify a new library location See Library Management for Saved Parts in this chapter for more information Saving a Modified Decal with a Different Name If you modify a decal associated with a part type use the Save Part and Gate Decals As dialog box to rename the decal After modifying the decal 1 Choose File Return to Part Answer Yes to the Returning to Part level Keep changes to Gale prompt 2 Choose File Save As The Save Part and Gate Decals dialog box appears 3 Select the decal in the Name of Gate Decal multicolumn list box and choose Edit PowerLogic User s Guide 7 5 Creating Single Gate Parts 4 Type a new name for the Decal and choose OK 5 Answer Yes to the Part Type item exists Overwrite item prompt to repla
54. of the schematic the object is selected across all sheets of the design Sheets that contain objects selected using the Object Selector display in bold in the Sheet list box Additional selection filters are available on the Selection pop up menu To select a net choose the Net Filter icon then select any connection pin or net name on the net Pin Filter The Filter group contains icons that allow you to select objects based on type You can select an entire part all gates a single gate of a part a net or a pin When you select an object on one sheet of the schematic the object is selected across all sheets of the design Sheets that contain objects selected using the Object Selector display in bold in the Sheet list box Additional selection filters are available on the Selection pop up menu To select a pin choose the Pin Filter icon then select the pin To select multiple pins choose the Pin Filter icon then use the Ctrl click or drag to select methods to add pins to the selection PowerLogic User s Guide 1 15 s Object Locator List The Object Locator group provides an efficient means of locating particular objects in your design The Object Locator drop down list box displays all selected objects and the sheet on which they are located When multiple objects are selected the All in List command appears on the list This feature makes it easier for you to locate a particular object especially in a busy design Jus
55. or any renewal term of this Agreement for each of the Licensed Products covered under this Agreement if Maintenance has been accepted and payments are in good standing 9 1 1 Telephone diagnostics and assistance during PADS normal business hours excluding weekends and holidays observed by PADS 9 1 2 Repair or replacement of media that PADS determines to be defective and eligible if returned to PADS in accordance with return policy 9 1 3 Delivery of new Updates upon their release 9 2 Timing of responses PADS will use its commercially reasonable efforts to respond promptly to any reasonable service request by the Licensee but shall determine solely the timing of its Update deliverables 9 3 Additional services PADS may at its discretion and Licensee s request provide maintenance otherwise excluded under the Agreement on a per call basis during normal business hours excluding holidays observed by PADS for which services Licensee shall be charged PADS then current standard per call rates 10 EXCLUDED SERVICES The following Maintenance services shall not be provided under this Agreement but may be agreed upon at PADS discretion 10 1 Repairs to the Licensed Products necessitated by a relocation movement improper operation neglect or misuse of the Licensed Products b Licensee s failure to maintain proper site or environmental condition c any fault of Licensee s agents or employees d any attempts at repairs maintenance
56. or decals defined as connectors for the current part To edit the name of the Special Symbol double click on the entry or select the entry and choose Edit Type a new symbol name or choose the Browse button to search for a symbol from a library When you choose Browse the Browse for Special Symbols dialog box appears Pin Type Lists the pin type associated with the selected Special Symbol To edit the pin type double click on the entry or select the entry and choose Edit Choose one of the 10 pin types from the drop down list box Add Special Symbol Adds a new entry in which you can define a new Special Symbol 1 Choose Add 2 Double click in the new Special Symbol entry or select the new entry and choose Edit 3 Type a Special Symbol or choose one from a library using the Browse button The Browse button opens the Browse for Special Symbols dialog box 4 Double click on the new Pin Type entry or select the new entry and choose Edit 5 Choose a Pin Type from the Pin Type drop down list box Delete Special Symbol Deletes the selected Special Symbol from the multicolumn list box Creating New Parts from Existing Parts A fastest way to make a new part is to alter a copy of an existing part Modifying an existing CAE decal without first copying it modifies all parts that use that decal To prevent this e Verify the CAE decal assigned to the part of which you want to copy references e Modify that CAE decal
57. pop up menu or the Edit menu Note Ifthe group contains hierarchical symbols the message Group contains Hierarchy Warning there in no Undo for this operation appears Choose OK to continue the operation or Cancel to abort PowerLogic Uses Guide 824 Group Operations Copying a Group to a File Use Copy to File to save the contents of a group for use on other schematic sheets or a different design Saved groups are stored in the padspwr logicfiles directory with a grp extension After defining a group 1 Choose Copy to File from the pop up menu or the Edit menu The Group Save File dialog box appears 2 Type a name in the File Name area or use the default 3 Choose Save Pasting a Group from a File Use Paste from File to insert a group saved with the Copy to File command When the group is pasted into a sheet all of the parts are named with the next available reference designator names Use the Preserve Reference Designators on Paste option in the Design tab to control renaming of reference designators See the Preserving Reference Designators topic in this chapter for more information Note Ifthe group contains hierarchical symbols the message Group contains Hierarchy Warning there in no Undo for this operation appears Choose OK to continue the operation or Cancel to abort Nets with defined names are retained Unnamed nets are given default signal names To paste a group into a design 1 Choose
58. select the mode then select the objects on which you want to use the verb Place PowerLogic in Verb Mode by choosing one of the following commands from the Standard toolbar then select an object on which to perform the command When you move the cursor off the toolbox a small V appears on the cursor to show that PowerLogic is in Verb mode Copy Move K Delete Query Modify PowerLogic User s Guide 4 17 Modes of Operation Copy Mode Use Copy mode to replicate existing parts text and drafting objects When you copy parts PowerLogic automatically increments the reference designator and gate modifier To copy an object 1 Choose the Copy Mode icon from the toolbar or Set Command Mode Copy Mode in the pop up menu 2 Select the item to copy A duplicate of the item follows the cursor movement Optionally and depending on the available options for the selected item you can adjust the orientation and other settings from the pop up menu before placement Position the item and indicate its location to complete the copy 3 When you finish placing copies of this item choose Cancel from the pop up menu PowerLogic remains in Copy mode until you choose another mode toolbox or the Select icon from the toolbar Copying a Hierarchical Symbol When you copy a hierarchical symbol the sheets that the symbol references will also be copied and added as new sheets to the schematic PowerLogic assigns new reference designato
59. that computer aided design is a complex undertaking requiring coordination between many different hardware and software elements including elements not supplied by PADS and requiring proper use and caution on the part of operators and others 13 MISCELLANEOUS This Agreement shall be governed by the Laws of the Commonwealth of Massachusetts In the event of any dispute or claim arising out of or with respect to this Agreement the prevailing party shall also be entitled to recover its reasonable attorneys fees and costs It is understood and agreed that this Agreement contains the entire and only understanding and agreements between the parties relating to the subject matter of this Agreement promise or condition not contained in this Agreement shall not be binding on either party The terms of this agreement shall not be modified except in writing and signed by each party Copyright O 1997 1999 PADS Software Inc All rights reserved 165 Forest Street Marlborough MA 01752 U S A PowerLogic User s Guide PADS Software Inc has taken due care in preparing this documentation Due to lead times required for printing some minor functionality differences may exist Check your release notes and on line help for updated information PADS Software Inc and the program authors have no liability to the purchaser or any other entity with respect to any liability loss or damage caused directly or indirectly by this software including but no
60. the Families list box 2 Type a new name in the Family text box 3 Type a new prefix to associate with the Logic Family in the Prefix text box To add a new Logic Family 1 Choose Add The Add Logic Family dialog box appears Logic Families x Edit Cancel Delete Help 2 Type the new Logic Family name and choose OK 3 Type the prefix you want to use for the new family in the Prefix text box Use the Logic Families dialog box to add delete or modify logic family names and default reference designator prefixes Choose the Families button in the Parts Information dialog box to display this dialog box See the Part Information for Part topic in this chapter for additional information Family and Prefix Lists all existing logic families and their associated prefixes You can type a new family name or a new prefix for the family To modify the family or prefix select the item from the multicolumn list box and choose Edit You can also double click an item to edit it Add Adds a new logic family to the part Provide a name and prefix for the new family Delete Deletes the family selected in the multicolumn list box PowerLogic User s Guide 7 13 Part Information for Part PCB Decals Tab Use the PCB Decals tab on the Part Information dialog box to assign decals or footprints to library parts This information is used to load the proper parts when you import a netlist into a PCB layout application
61. the OLE PowerPCB Connection dialog box See the OLE PowerPCB Connection topic in the OLE in PowerLogic chapter for more information PowerLogic User s Guide 1 16 II Teolbars and Toolboxes Toolboxes Toolboxes are interchangeable toolbars that you can use to create and edit design items You can only open one toolbox at a time To open a toolbox use the Drafting Toolbox Design Toolbox or Bus Toolbox command under the Window menu Choosing the command again will close the toolbox You can also open a toolbox by choosing the appropriate icon on the toolbar Use these icons to open or close a toolbox 45 Drafting Used for operations on drafting objects objects not generally associated with connectivity See the Drafting Operations chapter for more information Ed Design Used for parts placement and connectivity operations See the Design Operations chapter for more information p Bus Used for creating and modifying buses See the Design Operations chapter for more information Another toolbox exists in PowerLogic but you can only access it from the Part Editor Terminal Used to add pins terminals to the decal and to assign pin names pin number pint types and pin swapping information See the Library Operations chapter for more information Dockable and Resizable Toolbar and Toolboxes You can dock or attach the toolbars and toolboxes to any border of the main window Additionally you can l
62. the schematic and design files have the same name and contain OLE objects For example if you insert OLE objects into and save a schematic named design1 sch the design1_sch ole file is also created If you insert objects into and save a PCB design named design1 pcb the design1_pcb ole file is also created Both files design and OLE are located in the same directory When you open the sch file the related ole file is also automatically opened Note Remember both the sch file and the ole file when you copy move or attach them in any way PowerLogic ole files can be opened in other applications that understand the ole file format For example if you insert a Word document into PowerLogic and then save the Word object you can later open Word and open the Word documents stored in the PowerLogic ole file To save a new PowerLogic design in a sch file and save OLE information in an ole file 1 Choose File Save As The Save As dialog box appears 2 Type a name for the design file you are saving 3 Choose the location for the file 4 Choose Save The sch and ole files are created Note You can also import the ole file into another PowerLogic file For example if you save design1 sch and it has OLE objects in it design1 sch and design1 ole are saved You can then import design1 ole into design2 sch if you want to share the OLE objects between multiple files See the OLE Import Export topic in the File Operation
63. the view that you want to capture 2 Choose View Capture from the menu The Capture View dialog box appears E Capture View IIo x Capture View Name 3 In the Capture View dialog box choose Capture 4 Type a name in the Capture a new view text box and choose OK You can create up to nine views The view names appear at the bottom of the View menu To restore the view to one previously captured select its name from the View Name list box and choose Apply When you change the view PowerLogic automatically saves the previous view Choose Previous View in the View Name list box and choose Apply to restore this view Note Capture is not available while in the Part Editor PowerLogic User s Guide 1 21 Modeless Commands Modeless Commands You can set or change some settings and functions at any time using a code letter for the command entering the new value and pressing Enter This is called a Modeless Command Modeless Commands usually apply to values that you change frequently during design Use the Modeless Command G for example to change the grid setting Type G the new setting and press Enter Below is a summary of the Modeless Commands in PowerLogic To show this help topic at any time while PowerLogic is running type and press Enter Note X Y coordinates s text m number Grid Settings G lt n gt Sets the design grid for example G50 GD lt n gt Dot grid setting for exampl
64. up menu You cannot use the Extend Bus command to shorten a bus segment To shorten a bus delete the long segment then use Extend Bus to redefine that segment Alternately you could use the Group command to shorten the bus segment Moving a Bus Segment fl To reposition a bus segment 1 Choose the Move Bus Segment icon from the Bus toolbox or Modify Bus Move Bus Segment in the pop up menu 2 Select the bus segment The segment follows the cursor movement 3 Indicate the new location Deleting a Bus Segment ax To remove a segment of the bus 1 Choose the Busses icon from the toolbar 2 Choose the Delete Bus Segment icon from the Bus toolbox or Modify Bus Delete Bus Segment in the pop up menu 3 Select the bus segment If the deletion splits the bus into two separate busses the bus name appears identifying any unnamed bus segments Each bus retains the same properties PowerLogic User s Guide 4 15 Sheets Sheets Use the Sheets dialog box to edit the sheet set of the current schematic in the work area Choose the Setup Sheets command to open this dialog box Using Sheets allows you to add and delete sheets from the set and to modify sheet names and the numeric order of the set You can create up to 1024 sheets Double click on a sheet name to view it in the work area Choose a sheet in the list box pause and then choose it again to rename the sheet Spaces are not valid characters in a sheet name You can a
65. you avoid overlaps while moving the item and it provides visibility of the text item at small zoom levels Configuration Area Saves color assignments to a file When you finish setting color assignments choose Save from the Configuration area Type the configuration name in the Save Configuration dialog box PowerLogic saves configuration files in the padspwr powerlogic directory with a ccf extension The configuration names also appear at the bottom of the Setup menu To modify an existing configuration with the current color settings choose Save The current configuration filename appears in the Save Configurations dialog box You can overwrite the settings in this file or specify a different ccf file and choose OK Palette Opens the Color dialog box where you can specify new colors or customize colors that appear in the Selected Color area Refer to the Microsoft Windows User s Guide for more information on changing the Color Palette Default Palette Restores the default color settings in the Selected Color area To change the default palette complete the modifications to the Selected Color area and choose Save Type default in the Save Configurations dialog box to override the existing default configuration and choose OK PowerLogic User s Guide 3 8 Customizing PowerLogic Customizing PowerLogic There are several files in the padspwr powerlogic directory that PowerLogic uses to define default operation You can c
66. 1 Print plot operations See Plot Priority 10 14 Pull arc 8 6 Push hierarchy 1 9 pwrlogic ini 3 18 Q Query mode icon 1 13 Query modify 4 26 8 8 bus name 4 34 drafting object 8 9 hierarchical component 4 34 net name 4 6 4 33 part 4 27 part attributes 5 5 part text visibility 5 7 PCB decal assignments 4 31 text 8 8 R Ratsnest 10 13 Reassigning layers 10 22 Record mode toolbox 3 14 Record prompt mode 3 14 3 15 Rectangles adding 8 5 Redo 1 6 1 13 Redraw 1 8 1 14 Redrawing OLE objects 9 7 Reference designators preserving in group 4 25 swapping 4 12 Renaming a net ECO file format 2 18 Renaming part 4 28 ECO file format 2 18 In 12 Reports 1 5 11 11 bill of materials 11 17 classrules 10 10 creating 11 11 net statistics 11 14 netrules 10 10 off page 11 16 output 10 11 part statistics 11 13 rules 10 10 unused gates and pins 11 13 report rep 11 11 Resizing toolboxes 1 17 Restoring views 1 21 RGL reports 9 22 Ripup allowing 10 14 Rotating text 8 3 Routing options 10 14 Routing rules 10 1 10 12 class 10 4 10 5 default 10 3 deleting 10 15 net 10 6 Rules 10 2 10 3 See Design rules Rules dialog box 10 1 Rules report 10 10 82 Samples automation 9 18 Visual Basic scripts 9 23 Save 1 4 Saving modified decal with a different name 7 5 modified part type with a different name 7 5 offpage to library 1 10 part and gate decals
67. 16 creating 2 5 include design rules in 2 7 include part attributes in 2 7 include subsheets 2 6 include value and tolerance in 2 7 sending to PowerPCB 1 10 9 16 Netlist to PCB command 1 10 Netlist to PCB dialog box 2 6 Netname 9 17 query modify 4 33 Nets assigning 10 21 joining through ECO 2 17 mid driven 10 13 minimization 10 13 renaming ECO file format 2 18 splitting 2 18 New attributes 5 1 New files 2 1 New hierarchical symbols 4 2 New libraries 6 2 New library objects 6 3 New OLE objects 9 3 9 4 next ini 3 18 next log 3 18 Next previous command 1 16 Numeric keypad 1 21 O Object browser 9 20 Object command 1 8 Object linking and embedding See OLE Object locator list 1 16 Object select mode 4 21 PowerLogic User s Guie Index Object selector toolbar 1 14 4 22 Objects embedded 9 2 linked 9 2 Off page references 4 6 Off page reports 11 16 Off page symbols sheet numbers per line 4 35 update from library 7 45 OK xx OLE 9 1 automation 9 2 background color of object 9 7 breaking object link 9 9 change source dialog box 9 9 changing an object icon 9 5 connecting to PCB 9 14 converting objects 9 10 copying objects 9 8 creating new object from file 9 4 creating new objects 9 3 cross probing 9 13 cutting objects 9 8 delete all OLE objects command 1 8 deleting objects 9 13 disconnecting from PCB 9 14 displaying objects 9 5 9 6 editi
68. 2 13 ECO Operations Changed Parts If the changed part is a multigate part all gated are updated to the new part type An error message is generated if the new part does not exist in the design or in the Library or if the gate or pin count is incompatible Deleted Parts If the deleted part is a multigate part all gates are deleted An error message is generated if the part is still connected to a net or the part does not exist Reference Designator Name If the part being renamed is a multigate part all gates are updated An error message is generated if the old reference designator does not exist Gate Level Backward Annotation You can backward annotate the following gate level information Swapped Gates PowerLogic creates an offpage symbol at each swapped gate An error message is created if the gate does not exist Pin Level Backward Annotation You can backward annotate the following pin level information Swapped Pins PowerLogic creates an offpage symbol at each swapped pin Pins Added to a Net A pin can be added only if it is not already connected to another net If the pin is a gate pin a visible terminal pin on the gate symbol an offpage symbol is created An error is created if pin is already connected or the pin is a signal pin already assigned to a net PowerLogic User s Guide 2 14 ECO Operations Pins Disconnected from a Net If the pin is a gate pin the connection is deleted if it
69. 4 8 Changing an OLE icon 9 5 Changing library parts 7 2 Changing the part type 4 28 Character limit 4 8 Check boxes xix Check part 7 46 Checking cross talk conditions 10 8 electrodynamic 10 15 parallelism 10 8 tandem 10 8 Circles adding 8 4 In 2 Circular interpolation 11 10 Class rules 10 2 10 4 adding class 10 4 class name 10 4 clearance 10 4 10 5 deleting 10 4 high speed 10 4 10 5 nets 10 5 renaming 10 5 report 10 10 routing 10 4 10 5 Clearance rules 10 1 10 11 class 10 4 10 5 default 10 3 net 10 6 rule sets 10 8 Clearance values body to body 10 12 drill to drill 10 12 edge to edge 10 12 pad to corner 10 12 SMD to corner 10 12 SMD to via 10 12 via to via 10 12 Clipboard view tab bill of materials setup dialog box 11 20 Colors background for OLE object 9 7 configurations 3 8 in Visual Basic editor 9 18 setting 3 7 to print or plot 11 4 Combine 8 2 8 7 Command button xix Command line options start up options 1 1 1 2 Comparing netlists 9 15 Comparing PowerLogic schematics with PowerPCB designs 2 8 Compress mouse mode 3 15 Conditional rules 10 7 10 16 Connect command 1 16 Connect to PCB OLE 9 14 PowerLogic User s Guie Index Connection properties 1 16 Connections adding 4 2 4 5 4 6 adding off page references 4 6 adding power and ground 4 7 adding to a bus 4 14 changing 4 8 moving 4 20 naming 4 8 outputting 2 4 power and g
70. 5 OLE objects 9 13 options 11 5 orientation 11 5 output devices 11 2 pen plotter advanced setup 11 7 pen plotter setup 11 6 photoplotter advanced setup 11 9 photoplotter setup 11 8 preview 11 4 preview selections 11 2 scaling 11 5 Plot dialog box 11 1 Plot options 11 5 In 11 Plot parameters outputting 2 4 Point of origin 1 3 Polygons adding 8 4 Pop hierarchy command 1 9 Pop up menus xix 1 27 anything selected 1 30 part or gate selected 1 27 Postage stamp 1 20 PostScript printing 11 11 to a file 11 11 Power and ground connections 4 7 PowerLogic automation features 9 17 colors setting 3 7 customizing 3 1 3 9 database minimum xvii frequently asked questions xxi interface description xix 1 3 menu commands 1 4 OLE overview 9 1 recording sessions 3 18 starting 1 1 start up options 1 1 synchronizing with PowerPCB 9 15 troubleshooting 3 18 Windows conventions xix PowerLogic interface 1 3 PowerPCB connection dialog box 9 13 Preferences 1 9 3 1 design 3 4 global 3 2 heights widths 3 6 setting 3 1 Prefix and family 7 13 part 7 12 Preserving reference designators group 4 25 Preview plot and print selections 11 2 print plot 11 4 Previous view 1 9 1 21 Previous forward sheet 1 16 PowerLogic User s Guide Index Print 11 1 11 2 OLE objects 9 13 orientation 11 5 PostScript 11 11 setup 1 5 to a file 11 11 Visual Basic scripts 9 19 Print manager 11 1
71. 9 14 Display colors 1 9 Display grid 1 18 Displaying OLE objects 9 6 Docking toolboxes 1 17 Documentation conventions xviii Documentation layers 10 19 Drafting items adding from library 8 7 8 8 adding to library 8 8 query modify 8 9 Drafting objects modeless commands 1 23 Drafting operations 8 1 Drafting toolbox 1 17 7 34 8 1 add drafting item from library 8 7 add text 8 2 add drafting item to library 8 8 combine 8 7 create 2D line 8 4 displaying 1 13 modify 2D line 8 5 viewing 1 11 Drop down list box xix Es ECO changes included items 2 9 creating on ECO file 2 9 differences report 2 11 file format 2 16 forward and backward annotation 2 8 PowerLogic User s Guie Index ECO operations 2 8 ECOGEN 9 15 EDC 10 15 Edge to edge clearance values 10 12 Edit menu 1 5 Edit operations library 6 3 Edit part hierarchical symbol 4 2 Editing 4 26 8 8 CAE decals 7 1 connectors 7 25 library objects 6 3 logic families 7 13 off page symbol sheet numbers per line 4 35 OLE links 9 8 OLE objects 9 11 part types 7 1 PCB decals 7 1 text 8 8 Editor Visual Basic 9 17 Electrical layers 10 19 10 20 adding 10 22 inner 10 19 reassigning layer data 10 22 Electrodynamic checking 10 15 Embedded objects 9 2 Exit command 1 5 Export 1 5 2 3 ASCII 2 3 design rules to PowerPCB 1 10 9 15 library 6 4 OLE 2 3 rules to PCB 10 18 Extend bus 4 13 4 15 Extents 1 9 afe
72. ASCII Output Options tddi 2 4 ASCII File Formata oiie e E E ERRES E ee eee Rd 2 5 Creating a Netlist ie A Cass aad MV VR TO vevds 2 5 Netlist to PCB Dialog BO esc e e A d a 2 6 ECONO peras taa caco estatutos d toe tabu cato a ea sott 2 8 ECO Forward and Backward Annotation emen 2 8 Forward ECO tO POB 2 8 Backward Annotate from PCB sssssssssssee eee e eene ener nennen 2 12 PowerLogic User s Guide viii Contents Part Level Backward Annotation cccooooccccononnncnoonnnnnnnonnnnnnconannnnnoon ona roconn nn rn nennen 2 13 Gate Level Backward Annotation ua rotes Grae eig tad ines 2 14 Pin Level Backward Annotation esserne nsten ieni n ieena ine t isro TNE ne nesi 2 14 Net Level Backward Annotation eene nennen 2 15 Attribute Level Backward Annotation ssssssssseeeeeee eee eene ene nennen 2 15 ECO Piles Format i ui tiet iate tl dl dela ek ib ck er ttal 2 16 Chapter 3 Design Setup Settine Preferences adas 3 1 CO DAL TAI weit E EN 3 2 Desien O NN 3 4 Heights Widths Tab essen eene rer eere nnns 3 6 SEM Colors a a t dat d data d oat cn o e 3 7 Customizing PowerLogic sss siss Siana EE e e e nnn nn en R RR RRR 3 9 default txts on eet ue ee ANAN eie eh e aene ein ee e ee eid e n UAR ARA RA UR 3 9 o 3 9 A MTTA 3 10 THE Macro Recorders AN 3 10 Macros and Dialoe BOXes i recep de ee i fi f e f eain 3 11 Ma Bess e eco bee Den Colette eto ede edt aa E 3 11 Macro Dialog BOoxi s assea
73. CLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE IS MADE OR AUTHORIZED TO BE MADE BY PADS THE FOREGOING WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS AND RIGHTS MAY VARY IN STATES OF UNITED STATES AND FOREIGN COUNTRIES THE FOREGOING MAY LIMIT OR EXCLUDE THE RIGHTS THAT THE CUSTOMER WOULD OTHERWISE BE ENTITLED TO UNDER THE LAWS OF SOME STATES OR COUNTRIES OTHER STATES OR COUNTRIES DO NOT ALLOW THE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION OF LIABILITY FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY 8 SOFTWARE MAINTENANCE PADS shall provide and Licensee may accept software maintenance services under the Software Maintenance Agreement at PADS then current maintenance fee for an initial term of one calendar year after expiration of the Software Warranty period renewable year to year until termination occurs under the said Software Maintenance Agreement 8 1 Annual Service Fee Licensee shall pay PADS an annual service fee for each of the Licensed Products covered by this Agreement at the start of any applicable term 8 2 Payments All payments under this Agreement shall be due according to specified payment terms 8 3 Renewals Payment for renewals must be received by PADS at its principal offices prior to the applicable Anniversary Date Non payment by the Anniversary Date will constitute discontinuance of Maintenance and Support on such licensed Products Licensee shall i
74. COGEN tool See the ECOGEN topic in the PowerPCB On line Help for more information Backward Annotation Backward annotation can be accomplished manually using Tools Backward Annotate from PCB or automatically using Synchronize SCH from the OLE PowerPCB Connection dialog box Design tab Synchronize SCH compares the current PowerLogic schematic to the current PowerPCB design then automatically updates the schematic using the resulting eco file This comparison uses the ECOGEN tool See the ECOGEN topic in the PowerPCB On line Help for more information Forward ECO to PCB Use Tools Forward ECO to PCB to identify changes in the schematic and create an ECO engineering change order file that you can use to update a PowerPCB design database PowerLogic compares the current schematic file against another schematic file on the disk Differences between the part type and net information in the current schematic and the file chosen for comparison are stored in the ECO file These ECO changes define the updates that will make the original database consistent with the current schematic This file is readable by any PADS PCB layout system and when read in automatically updates the PCB design database PowerLogic User s Guide 2 8 ECO Operations ECO changes can include Added parts Deleted parts Renamed parts Changed part types Added connections Deleted connections Combined nets Renamed nets To create an ECO file 1 2 3
75. Choose the icon you want to use to represent the OLE linked or embedded object To use different icons use From File and Browse to locate another file containing the icons you want to use Label Type a description of the icon you want to use This description appears under the linked or embedded object icon Displaying OLE Objects PowerLogic does not understand the format of an inserted object it only communicates with the application that created the OLE linked or embedded object to display the information If the application that created the linked or embedded OLE object is installed and registered on your system then PowerLogic calls upon that application to display the OLE object in PowerLogic as it would appear in the source application For example a Word document can appear within PowerLogic and the Word toolbars appear within PowerLogic If the source application is not installed and registered on your system then PowerLogic can only display the inserted OLE object as an icon It cannot open or display the OLE object as it would appear in the source application PowerLogic also displays the OLE object as an icon if the object is an application OLE and View Menu Commands You can use all of the View menu commands with OLE linked or embedded objects you can zoom into and zoom out of the objects Turning the Display of OLE Objects Off You can turn the display of OLE objects off using the Display OLE Objects check box on the
76. Edit Paste From File The Load Group File dialog box appears 2 Choose the group from the list 3 Choose Open The group is placed at the current cursor location If the design contains parts with the same reference designation as those in the group a report is generated See the Preserving Reference Designators topic in this chapter for more information 4 The Group is attached to the cursor Select the desired location Preserving Reference Designators When you paste a group in a design PowerLogic uses the reference designators current in the saved group file If conflicts with current parts exist PowerLogic renames the duplicate reference designators and generates an error report containing the renamed parts The report displays in the default text editor To restart numbering of the reference designators or to use available reference designator numbers turn off the Preserve Reference Designators on Paste option in the Design Tab If you turn this option off and paste a group into a new design reference designation starts at the first number For example U1 PowerLogic User s Guide 4 25 Cut Copy and Paste Cut Copy and Paste Use Edit Cut to remove a group and place a copy in a temporary grp file Connections that extend outside the group have an off page reference symbol added at the break point Use Edit Copy to remove a group and place a copy into the Windows paste buffer Connections that extend outside the grou
77. Editor Use the Part Editor to create and modify standard schematic symbols such as gates resistors capacitors connectors etc and special symbols such as ground power and off page references You also use the Part Editor to create new CAE decals pin decals and assign PCB decals the physical representation of the part in a PCB design system Choose Tools Part Editor to enter PowerLogic s Part Editor Unneeded menu commands and toolbar icons are removed or replaced with menu commands and toolbar icons specific to creating and modifying parts A PowerLogic part is comprised of three elements Part Type The electrical information for a part This includes the logic family CAE Decal assignment part name connection pins gate swapping information etc CAE Decal The CAE decal is the logic symbol that appears on the schematic for example a NAND gate PCB Decal The graphical representation of the part when it is drawn in the PCB design program It is often referred to as the footprint Assigning a PCB Decal is optional and only required if you are passing a netlist to PowerPCB or Perform PowerLogic User s Guide 7 1 Creating Single Gate Parts Changing and Updating Library Parts When you add a part to a schematic a copy of the library part is made and added to the schematic database Thereafter the schematic representation is uncoupled from the library Modifying a part in the Part Editor only effects the library entry of tha
78. Embedded Objects cere e e cde s ania V PP T I RS URL 9 2 LIKE Odesa UM 9 2 OLE AUTOMATION chee iS 9 2 VISUAL EIN aid 9 2 JAN A 9 2 PowerLogic User s Guide xiii Contents OLE Object Linking and Embedding sss 9 3 Insert Object Dialog Box Create New sssssssesssseeeeee eee eme erre 9 3 Insert Object Dialog Box Create from File 9 4 Displays OLE Obs cl lili 9 6 OLE and View Menu Comitiamds i oeste bestes Sa 9 6 Turning the Display of OLE Objects COLI eias cama qu REOR SN MS 9 6 Redrawing a Screen Containing OLE Objects eere 9 7 Changing the OLE Object Background Oolor sss 9 7 Selecting OEB ODIects vein dede queste dalt dead boda idad lene odes teint ite e dtes 9 7 Moving and Sizing OLE OS Gee A Aa 9 8 Cutting Copying and Pasting OLE Objects sssssssssssseee emen 9 8 EditinoOLE DOksua odere petere eee ee eee te lotte eee O tee e edere d e tete eee E 9 8 COE VISUAL GIO aan 9 10 Converting OLE Objects and other OLE specific Editing Commands sssss 9 10 EiGhitys 952 502 tutyts dl a alada 9 11 OPM M Mm 9 11 CoOnverbcntoti deret ce etate tete itta RC IUD ARE EOD e E OEE 9 11 Saving OLE COD end 9 12 Deleting OLE OD s 9 13 OLE and Print P ota rector aaa aaa ee e s ame cet te ped 9 13 OLE PowerPCB Connection sssse eee e e nenne nene enin eee nana nn nn rere ee trennen 9 13 OLE Receive Tata Rd 9 14 OLE SEO abi A a IE 9
79. File format for ECO 2 16 File menu 1 4 File operations creating a new 2 1 importing and exporting 2 2 opening 2 1 saving 2 2 In 5 Files ASCII 2 4 copying a group to 4 25 copying to 1 6 creating new 2 1 exporting 2 3 importing 2 2 macro 3 11 opening 2 1 saving 2 2 Filter 1 7 decals 7 15 gates 1 15 nets 1 15 parts 1 14 pins 1 15 Floating toolbars 1 17 Footprints 7 14 Format tab bill of materials setup dialog box 11 18 Forward annotation 2 8 Forward ECO to PCB 1 10 2 8 Free text 8 2 Frequently asked questions xxi 1 12 Function key shortcuts 1 26 future dat 3 10 Futurenet 3 10 G Gap 10 16 Gates add 7 18 delete 7 18 swapping 7 17 Gates filter 1 15 Gates tab part information dialog box 7 16 General tab part information dialog box 7 11 Get gate decal from library dialog box 7 32 Get part type from library dialog box 7 33 Global preferences 3 2 Grayed text xix PowerLogic User s Guide Index Grid settings and work area 1 18 Grid settings modeless commands 1 22 Group operations 4 22 adding to 4 22 copying 1 7 4 23 copying to a file 4 25 deleting 4 24 displaying during move or copy 4 24 drawing 4 24 erasing 4 24 moving 4 23 pasting from a file 4 25 preserving reference designators 4 25 removing connections 4 22 removing connections outside the boundary of 4 22 removing from 4 22 setting a new origin for 4 22 Gro
80. Global tab of the Setup Preferences dialog box You may want to turn off the display of OLE objects when PowerLogic contains many linked or embedded objects because the redraw speed can decrease Redraw speed noticeably decreases if the OLE Linking and Embedding servers or source applications which actually display the OLE items are not optimized for remote display PowerLogic User s Guide 9 6 Selecting OLE Objects Redrawing a Screen Containing OLE Objects When PowerLogic redraws PowerLogic components are redrawn first then OLE linked or embedded objects are redrawn OLE objects always redraw in the same order and always redraw after PowerLogic objects therefore they always appear on top of PowerLogic components You can also choose to update linked and embedded objects when you redraw the work area using the Redraw OLE Objects check box on the Global tab of the Setup Preferences dialog box This option is grayed when no OLE objects exist Changing the OLE Object Background Color OLE linked or embedded objects are displayed with a solid white background You may in some cases prefer to display the OLE object with a transparent background for example since a bitmap already contains a background you may prefer to use a transparent background If your object is a Word document then you may prefer a white background because black text on a transparent background results in black on black or an invisible object To change the back
81. Help Filter Library All Libraries E Items eel Decals Displays the decals that PowerLogic matched to the search filter settings Choose the decal you want to use from this list The selected decal appears in the area to the left of the list box PowerLogic User s Guide 7 33 Decal Wizard Filter Searches the selected library for a specific part or item name or for names that match a wildcard text string See the Preface for more information Part Editor Drafting Toolbox 4 The Part Editor s Drafting toolbox uses the same commands and icons as the Schematic Editor s Drafting toolbox but has an additional icon the Decal Wizard for creating new 8 8 parts See the Drafting Toolbox topic in the Drafting Operations chapter for more information Decal Wizard Ed To open the Decal Wizard and create a new part choose the Decal Wizard icon from the Drafting toolbox in the Part Editor Use the Decal Wizard dialog box to automatically create a new CAE decal The icon that opens the Decal Wizard appears at the end of the Drafting toolbox when you are in the Part Editor You must be in the Part Editor and creating or modifying gate information to use this feature In this wizard you can specify the pin decal to use and the number of pins for the left and right side of the decal It then creates a rectangle of the correct size adds the pins and creates place holders for the sequence number pin number pin typ
82. Information for Part DIP16 L mi onnesta Part Statistics Lists information about the part you are creating or editing under the following categories Pin Count Sets the number of pins in the part You must indicate the number of pins before assigning other information Decal Lists the name of the decal Gate Count Lists how many gates exist in the part Signal Pin Count Lists the number of signal pins in the part PowerLogic User s Guide 7 11 Part Information for Part Logic Family Identifies the Logic Family Choose a Logic Family from the list box When you choose a Logic Family the default reference designator prefix for this part appears next to Ref Prefix Choose Families to open the Logic Families dialog box where you can add delete and edit logic families and default reference designator prefixes Alphanumeric Pins for Part Allows the assignment of alphanumeric names to pins A B C etc or an alphanumeric prefix CA1 A2 A3 etc You can select the Alphanumeric Pins tab to assign names See the Alphanumeric Pins Tab topic in this chapter for additional information Connector This check box is automatically on when you create or modify connectors This check box grays if you open a part other than a connector See the Connector Tab topic in this chapter for more information Prefix List Sets the prefix for the part using the Prefix List text box Searching by part prefix allows you to edit
83. K to exit the dialog box All assigned decals must have the same number of pins Query Modify PCB Decal Assignment Lx Assigned in Schematic Alternates in Library DIP14 lt lt Assign DIP14 SO14NB No specific PCB Decal DIP14 Browse Apply update to This Part C All Parts This Type coca tem Assigned in Schematic Displays the name of the currently selected decal as it is assigned to the schematic from the current library To enter a name for a decal you plan to create later in PowerPCB type the new decal name in the Assigned in Schematic text box Assign Button Assigns the decal selected from the Alternates in Library field to the part Alternates in Library Provides a list of PCB decals from the current library for the part type of the selected part Use Browse to search for other PCB decals PowerLogic User s Guide 4 31 Query Modify No Specific PCB Decal When on the default decal assigned to the part type is used when the netlist is imported to PowerPCB no decal assignment appears in the netlist Preview Area Displays the currently selected decal Browse Button Opens the Get Decal from Library dialog box Get Decal from Library Dialog Box When you choose the Browse button from the PCB Decal Assignment dialog box the Get Decal from Library dialog box appears Get Decal from Library Lx DIP14 Decals common DIP4 1 4 Filter Library Al
84. Logic creates a netlist this file is read If a net name appears in this list it overrules any other trace width definition for the net in the schematic or in the library PowerLogic User s Guide 3 9 The Macro Recorder future dat This file is useful if you intend to output your schematic in the Futurenet netlist format You can define the Futurenet attribute number cross reference for each part attribute in the circuit Attribute numbers 1 through 10 are preassigned in Futurenet You can assign others The file format is PADS attributename Futurenet Attribute no The PADS attributename parameter must appear exactly as it appears in the library for example Partname is not the same as Part Name The Futurenet Attribute no is an integer between 1 and 100 The following is a sample future dat file VALUE 4 TOLERANCE 6 STRESS 7 PCB DECAL 80 PART Description 81 Part number 82 Part Desc 81 84 Mfg 1 85 Mfg 2 86 Spice model 87 Spice qualifier 88 Spice Pin order 89 Spice Parl 90 The Macro Recorder A macro is any combination of commands keystrokes and mouse clicks that you record to replay as a single action You can record virtually any set of procedural steps in PowerLogic for replay thereby simplifying redundant activities In this way macros are another method of customizing PowerLogic Note Macros are created and stored in files called macro files that have a mcr
85. Operations chapter for more information on the Query Modify Part dialog box ie 1 Choose the Query Modify icon from the toolbar 2 Select a part to modify the text visibility for by selecting the part s outline The Query Modify Part dialog box appears ee 3 Choose the Visibility icon The Part Text Visibility dialog box appears Modify the visibility settings 5 Choose OK m Item Visibility Attributes M Reference Designator PART NUMBER d dux PART DESC v Pin Numbers M Pin Names MFG 2 PCB DECAL Attribute Name Display viGeometry height e iot No Change C All n Apply Update to This Gate C This Part C All Parts This Type Cancel Help Item Visibility Sets visibility for decal related text Turn on the check boxes to display these items in the schematic Attributes Sets visibility for attributes assigned to the selected part Turn on the check boxes to display these items in the schematic PowerLogic User s Guide 5 7 Using Attribute Labels Attribute Name Display Specifies whether to display just the attribute s value or display the attribute name and it s value for example PCB DECAL SO14 All Off Makes all attribute names invisible displays only the value No Change Keeps the current attribute name visibility settings All On Displays all attribute names and their values Apply Update To Controls how parts are updated T
86. Part dialog box Repeat steps 7 through 10 for the other gates Choose OK Choose a Logic Family Prefix List and other electrical information Choose OK The Part Editor displays the assigned CAE Decal outlines Note that no pin information appears Assign pin information to the CAE decal See the Assigning Pin Information to the CAE Decal topic in this chapter for more information Save the part to the library See the Saving the Part to the Library topic in this chapter for more information PowerLogic User s Guide 7 7 Creating Multigate Parts Assigning Pin Information to the CAE Decal D 1 Choose Edit Gate or choose the Edit Gate Decal icon from the toolbar The Select Gate Decal dialog box appears See the Select Gate Decal topic in this chapter for more information 2 Choose a gate from the Gate drop down list box or select a gate from the work area The decal appears in the CAE Decal Editor 3 Choose the Terminal Toolbox icon from the toolbar See the Terminal Toolbox topic in this chapter for more information CLKB gt fit 4 Choose the Set Pin number icon from the Terminal toolbox See the Setting Pin Numbers topic in this chapter for more information Type the starting number in the information window 6 Choose OK m He 7 Select each pin or pin text in ascending sequence to assign a number You can click twice on a pin to skip a number Use the Change Pin Number icon from the Terminal too
87. PowerLogic User s Guide Version 3 0 PADS Software Inc 165 Forest Street Marlborough MA 01752 U S A y sa Chapter 1 b d The PowerLogic Interface The following topics guide you through the basics of starting and using the PowerLogic interface Topics include Starting PowerLogic Using the Interface Menu Commands Toolbars and Toolboxes Work Area and Grid Settings Controlling the View Modeless Commands Shortcut Keys Pop Up Menus Starting PowerLogic To start PowerLogic double click on the PowerLogic icon in the PowerLogic window You can also choose Start Programs PADS PowerLogic PowerLogic Start up Options Additional start up options are available called command line switches Command line switches allow you to enable different options to open a file start macros and record your PowerLogic session You can start the following command line options when you start PowerLogic Note Options are not case sensitive unless otherwise specified e BMW Creates media from the previous session each time you start PowerLogic bmw is the Media Wizard Using this command switch creates a directory and places necessary files in it to simplify the process of reproducing a PowerLogic problematic session This is also a modeless command Using the modeless command you can also create media of the current session To use the BMW command line switch type BMW or BMWxx where xx is your initials in the command line
88. PowerLogic be available on UNIX There is no current plan to make PowerLogic available for UNIX operating systems Installation Questions Is PowerLogic difficult to install No PowerLogic uses InstallShield which guides you though each step of the installation To install PowerLogic run setup exe and follow the prompts Will my existing Logic libraries and design files be overwritten No PowerLogic is installed into a different directory You can move your old files to this new area as needed Compatibility with Older Design and Support Files Are schematics created in Logic compatible with PowerLogic Yes You can open schematics created in Logic Version 4 0 in PowerLogic without first running a conversion program PowerLogic also runs a database integrity check on the opened schematic file Are macros from Logic compatible with PowerLogic No Logic s macro and menu commands are different from those in PowerLogic PowerLogic User s Guide xxi Frequently Asked Questions Questions on General PowerLogic Operations How does PowerLogic differ from Logic PowerLogic is a true Windows95 and NT application designed for maximum ease of use and compatibility with PowerPCB What level of compatibility does PowerLogic have with PowerPCB PowerLogic and PowerPCB use a similar graphics user interface for easy transition between the two programs They share the same parts library and library manager interface When you read a
89. PowerLogic net list into PowerPCB the correct parts are automatically placed in the design file You can also share design rules cross probe parts and connections and backward annotate design changes to PowerLogic What new functionality does PowerLogic 3 0 contain Refer to the PowerLogic 3 0 Release Highlights document for a complete list of new functionality and features Is there any easier way of renaming schematic components Yes Create an engineering change order ECO file in PowerPCB then use PowerLogic s Backward Annotate from PCB command to update the schematic Does PowerLogic have a DXF translator No PowerLogic Version doesn t have a conversion program to create or read DXF files How do I update a part on a schematic with a newer version in the parts library Enable Query Modify mode select the part and then choose Change Type Why is there a small green or red dot in the upper corner of screen This is a system status indicator to let you know when PowerLogic is available for command input and when the system is busy PowerLogic uses the middle button of a three button mouse to zoom in and zoom out How do I do this with a two button mouse Choose the Zoom icon from the toolbar then use the left mouse button to zoom in or out Choose the icon again to cancel zoom mode PowerLogic User s Guide xxii Y Chapter 2 File Operations This chapter discusses the common file operations that you will use in
90. Preview Selections Device Setup ftopsv4 PowerLogic User s Guide 11 1 Print Plot Operations Summary Displays the sheet selection settings Customize Plot Area Tailors the print characteristics of the schematic for example which sheets to print which items to print how to orient the plot etc Double click on the Sheets or Options icon to open the Select Items or Plot Options dialog box See the Select Items topic in this chapter for more information Output Device Area Specifies the device type for the set up or preview functions Choose the Print Pen or Photo icon before choosing either Preview Selections or Device Setup Preview Selections Displays the selected print settings in the Selections Preview dialog box The preview display corresponds to the selected output device Device Setup Invokes a set up dialog box for the selected output device Run Sends the print plot request to the designated printer plotter or file File Prefix Specifies the plot filename prefix for either a pen plot or photoplot print to file function PowerLogic User s Guide 11 2 Print Plot Operations Select Items Use the Select Items dialog box to specify which sheets and schematic items to print plot To open this dialog box choose Sheets in the Customize Plot area of the Print Plot dialog box r Sheet Selections 1 Available Selected Sheet No lt 2 a Cancel
91. You can assign up to 16 PCB decals to a part one as the default decal and the others as alternates Part Information for Part DIP16 x General PCB Decals Gates Signal Pins Attributes Alphanumeric Pins Connector Library ESet C SpadspwrMibscommon S Lem Filter Bin Count fi fi 6 Apply BGA16 Unassigned Decals Assigned Decals Assign New BOBBIN RM10 Asson New BOBBIN RM104 Assign gt gt lt lt Unassign IND13 zl DK Cancel Help x cea He Assigning a PCB Decal is one way of determining the number of pins in a part The Pin Count text box on the PCB Decals tab grays when you assign a PCB decal unless you create a connector See the Part Information for Part topic in this chapter for additional information on the Pin Count option To assign decals 1 Select one or more decal names 2 Choose Assign Note As a shortcut double click on a decal name to assign it to the part You can assign up to 16 decals All assigned decals must have the same number of pins Library Lists all libraries Choose the library from which you want to assign decals The available decals from the selected library appear in the Unassigned Decals list box The list changes according to the library you select PowerLogic User s Guide 7 14 Part Information for Part Filter Limits the items that appear in the Unassigned Decals list box Type the prefix you want to filter
92. You can close the Library Manager dialog box or use it for another operation Special Symbol Naming Conventions The special symbols in PowerLogic s library use specific names or a unique naming prefix Use the chart below to locate a special symbol in the library Off page Reference Symbols REFIN Off page reference for left side REFOUT Off page reference for right side Power Symbols 5 volt and 12 volt symbols arrow pointing up 5 volt and 12 volt symbols arrow pointing down BUBBLE 5 volt symbol with a circle Y 5 volt symbol with a Y shape Ground Symbols GND Standard ground AGND Analog ground CHGND Chassis ground Updating Off page Symbols from the Library Use Update Off page from Library to update off page ground or power symbols in the current schematic with the version in the library Modifying an off page reference symbol only affects the library entry of that part not the current version the schematic 1 Choose the symbols to update 2 Choose OK Updating Pins from Library Use Update Pins from Library to update the terminal pins in the schematic with the version in the library 1 Choose the symbols to update Choose Select All to update all terminal pins 2 Choose OK PowerLogic User s Guide 7 45 Special Symbols Save Off page Symbols to Library Use Save Off page to Library to update the off page ground or power symbols in the library with the current version s in the schematic Cho
93. a portion of text enclose that section with the character For example typing MAIN CLK places a bar over CLK Note The character factors into the 47 character limit for the net name Changing a Connection Use Move mode to change a connection from one end point to another without deleting the rest of the connection x 1 Choose the Move Mode icon from the toolbar or Set Command Mode Move Mode in the pop up menu 2 Select the connection at any point on the segment entering or exiting the part or where it enters another connection The connection follows the cursor movement You can choose Angle from the pop up menu to specify diagonal segments in the connection 3 Indicate corners as needed or choose Add Corner from the pop up menu You can choose Del Corner from the pop up menu to back up to the previous corner if necessary 4 A connection cannot end in open space Locate the cursor and double click to end the connection or choose Complete from the pop up menu To end a connection with a power ground or off page reference symbol choose the appropriate symbol from the pop up menu during the last step of this procedure Hierarchical Design PowerLogic supports top down and bottom up design It is possible to create a schematic then define the hierarchical symbol for the schematic or to define a hierarchical symbol and then the underlying logic You can also assign or unassign in the Query Hierarchical Component dial
94. acing EX A 200 po Input Pins e Hierarchical Sheet m OutputPins Box Width Min Box Hgt Pin Decat Pin Count Sheet Name 3o f eo E PN z fe E Picture Displays the symbol outline before the symbol appears in the Part Editor Decal Parameters Pin Length Sets the distance from the terminal connection point and the decal outline Type a value or use the arrows to indicate the pin length Note This option does not adjust the length of the pin decal Pin Spacing Sets the distance between pins Type a value or use the arrows to specify the distance Box Width Sets the width of the decal outline Pin decals are moved left or right to accommodate the box width Type a value or use the arrows to specify the width Min Box Hgt Sets the minimum height of the decal outline If you enter a value larger than needed to accommodate the number of input or output pins space is added to the bottom of the decal PowerLogic User s Guide 4 9 Design Toolbox Pin Decal Indicates the type of pin decal for input and output pins A drop down list box displays the available choices Pin Count Specifies the number of input and output pins for a hierarchical symbol of a new sheet during top down design Hierarchical Sheet Lists the sheets in the set and a new sheet option for top down design Sheet Name Specifies a hierarchical symbol name within a maximum o
95. ailable Layers Selected Layers Top Bottom i Vias TI zv Available Vias Via Selected Vias Definition STANDARDVIA Edd Length Minimization Area Defines how to reproduce the ratsnest which is made of lines defining the pin to pin connections as parts are moved Choose a Length Minimization setting None Total Horizontal Vertical Serial Source Parallel Source Mid driven PowerLogic User s Guide No automatic regeneration Minimizes total length of all nets Minimizes horizontal length of all nets Minimizes vertical length of all nets Places multiple source pins in series Used with ECL nets Places multiple source pins in parallel Used with ECL nets Minimizes the distance between all pins in a net and organizes the connections giving a specific net order Mid driven tries to make the net as short as possible Terminators are placed at each end of the net and the loads are evenly distributed on each branch There must be exactly two terminators or the net is ordered as a simple optimized daisy chain Sources are placed in the middle of the net and if there is more than one source the sources are chained together before the rest of the net is processed This command is usually used for High Speed requirements It is also used with ECL nets 10 13 Setting Design Rules Routing Options Area Sets routing options Copper Sharing Two pin pairs can share copper Also kn
96. ailable color e For PostScript output select a gray scale entry Preview Displays the selected sheets and items in the Selections Preview dialog box Use the Selections Preview dialog box to graphically verify the print plot settings To open this dialog box either choose Preview in the Select Items dialog box or choose Preview Selections in the Print Plot dialog box Click the left mouse button in the Preview window to zoom in at the cursor location Click the right mouse button to zoom out Selections Preview x E Ki Jl r7 Zoom Selected Sheets Sheet Extents Sheet 1 z PowerLogic User s Guide 11 4 Print Plot Operations Sheet Displays only the sheet Extents Displays the sheet and the paper dimensions Selected Sheets Contains a list of sheets Choose which sheet to display from the drop down list box Plot Options Use the Plot Options dialog box to define the options associated with an individual plot To open this dialog box choose Options in the Customize Plot area of the Print Plot dialog box 7 Options 7 r Positioning ll Orientation Justification Cancel o i Help Preview X Offset Y Offset fo 0 ll Scaling f Io pio Doe MM PlotJobname V Plot Window Orientation Sets the orientation angle Justification Positions the plot Choose from Centered Bottom Left Bottom Right Top Left Top Right or
97. al Basic Scripting menu allowing you to run often used scripts directly from the menu without having to open the Visual Basic Scripts dialog box Load File Loads Visual Basic scripts into the list box You can load up to 32 767 scripts Scripts are not compiled when they are loaded they are compiled when you run them This list of scripts you load into this dialog box is saved in the VBScripts ini file so these scripts load every time you open the Visual Basic Scripts dialog box PowerLogic User s Guide 9 21 Visual Basic Scripting Unload File Unloads the selected Visual Basic script from the dialog box Reduce Expand You can use this dialog box in a reduced mode When you click on the X button next to the Script drop down list box the lower half of the dialog box disappears leaving only the top left corner of the dialog box for interaction Choose the X button again to expand the dialog box When in reduced mode choose a script from the drop down list box and press Enter or double click on a script in the drop down list box Script List Lists the loaded Visual Basic scripts Both the Script list box and the Script drop down list box are synchronized Script Drop Down List Lists the loaded Visual Basic scripts Both the Script list box and the Script drop down list box are synchronized The drop down list box is most useful when you work with this dialog box reduced Visual Basic Sample Scripts The following thre
98. ame for the power or ground symbol 4 Locate the cursor and double click to end the connection or choose Complete from the pop up menu You can create and store a number of ground symbols in the library each with its own net name To select the appropriate ground symbol choose Alternate from the pop up menu Three symbols are available with the standard library You can modify these or add additional symbols PowerLogic assigns the net name associated with the ground symbol to the connection for example GND Chassisground or Analog ground For each alternate power symbol there is a different signal name 5V 24V etc To select the appropriate signal name choose Alternate while placing the symbol PowerLogic displays the net name associated with the power or ground symbol in the status window Use the Status Window to view the alternates and locate the net name that you want to tie the connection to PowerLogic User s Guide 4 7 Design Toolbox Naming a Connection When you add a connection PowerLogic automatically assigns a name with the format nnnn where nnnn is a random number You can specify a different net name to replace the assigned name To modify the net name for a connection i9 1 Choose the Query Modify icon from the toolbar 2 Select a terminating connection segment 3 Type a new net name in the text box To place a bar over the net name precede the text with the character To place a bar over only
99. an manipulate move rotate copy etc the group as a single item This is useful for creating title blocks or other similar features 1 Choose the Combine icon from the Drafting toolbox 2 Choose Combine from the pop up menu and select a line item 3 Continue to select the items to combine Selected line items change to the highlight color and selected text items disappear 4 Choose Complete from the pop up menu When you select any item in a complex group for move copy etc all items are selected for the operation To delete or uncombine items from the group choose Uncombine from the pop up menu and select the line or text item to remove After you select the item s from the complex group choose Complete When combining 2D lines and free text always select the 2D line first then select and combine the text with the selected 2D line If you try to select a text item before first selecting a 2D line the message No drawing item to add text to appears Adding Drafting Items from a Library T To load a 2D line item from a library to the current schematic choose the Add From Library icon from the Drafting toolbox The Get Drafting Item from Library dialog box appears where you can choose a drafting item from the available libraries 1 Choose the Add From Library icon from the Drafting toolbox 2 Choose an item from the drop down list box in the Get Drafting Item from Library dialog box If the list does not contain the it
100. and hold the left mouse button 3 Move the cursor to move the object 4 Release the mouse button once the object is in the correct location To size an OLE object 1 Select the object 2 Click and hold the left mouse button on one of the sizing handles 3 Move the cursor the object changes size according to the cursor movements 4 Release the mouse button when the object is sized correctly Cutting Copying and Pasting OLE Objects Editing an OLE linked or embedded object is similar to editing PowerLogic objects You can cut copy and paste OLE objects using the Cut Copy and Paste commands from the Edit menu You must select the OLE object before you can edit the object You can copy objects from one sheet to another Note You cannot cut copy or paste OLE objects when in the Part Editor To copy cut or paste an OLE object 1 Select the OLE object to cut copy or paste 2 Choose Cut Copy or Paste from the Edit menu Editing OLE Links You can edit the link of a linked OLE object Editing the link allows you to update the link open the original object source change the original object source or break the link with the object source making an embedded OLE object You can also choose to update the object automatically or using a manual command To edit the link of an OLE object 1 Choose Edit Links The Links dialog box appears 2 Select the link you want to edit from the list 3 Choose the options
101. ange the pin sequence number The other options in the Terminal toolbox gray when you create a CAE Decal 5 Choose File Complete Part Information for Part Y Use the Part Information dialog box to add or modify electrical information for a part z Electrical information includes the number of pins in the part the logic family the PCB decal assignment the CAE decal assignment signal pins gate swapping information etc You must identify the electrical or part type information before assigning a CAE Decal to the part To use the Part Information dialog box 1 Choose the Edit Electrical icon from the toolbar in the Part Editor when creating or modifying a Part Type The Part Information dialog box appears 2 Choose a tab on the dialog box to set information related to the tab name The available tabs are General PCB Decals Gates Signal Pins Attributes Alphanumeric Pins and Connector PowerLogic User s Guide 7 10 Part Information for Part 3 When you choose the tab the options for that tab appear Set the options you want to change 4 Choose other tabs to set other options as necessary When you finish setting options choose OK The changes are saved and the Part Information dialog box closes Choose Cancel to close the Part Information dialog box without saving any of the changes General Tab Use the General tab in the Part Information dialog box to view part statistics and set family information Part
102. anges according to the library you select Filter Limits the items that appear in the Unassigned Decals list box Type the prefix you want to filter decals by followed by an asterisk for example type DIP to view all DIP decals Type to view all decals Choose Apply to see the results of your search in the Unassigned Decals list box PowerLogic User s Guide 7 19 Part Information for Part Pin Count Contains the number of pins in the decal Preview Area Displays the decal that you select in the Unassigned Decals list box Unassigned Decals Lists all decals from the selected library that you can assign to the part Assigned Decals Lists all decals assigned to the part You can assign up to four decals Assigned decals must have the same number of pins The first decal is the default decal Use the Up and Down buttons to reorder the assigned decals Assign New Assigns a decal name of a nonexistent decal in the library This feature is very beneficial for schematic designers You can specify a decal that doesn t exist in your library but may exist in the PCB designers library When you choose Assign New the Assign New PCB Decal dialog box appears Type a name and choose OK The name is added to the end of the Assigned Decals list To unassign the new decal name choose Unassign Assign Assigns decals To assign decals to the part 1 Select one or more decal names from the Unassigned Decals list box 2 Choose
103. aoeaaeta shdaghadgasdadasdiddd add adu ai 3 12 ASCENSO 3 14 ais TI ODE ETE DEDA D eT I Tc P Dt LP CUTS arrears 3 16 Macro Playback dadas tata Rob AE Ets 3 17 Recording a PowerLogic Session eene enne eene 3 18 Chapter 4 Design Operations Starting a New Design ssssssssssseneee eene nennen enne etre enne enne eene enne enne ens 4 1 Desi OD eee e te dte d 4 1 Additig Priscus oM eso a A E E 4 2 Adding Connections uiuere eee 4 5 Igi aeo nleclBbIsibub o NE 4 8 Creating a Hierarchical Symbol 54 recie magia 4 9 Greatine a Topsdowt Hierarchy esses eiii ite teste uie fes Cives rectae testen d e dte ron pts 4 10 Creating a Bottom Up Hierarchy sssssssssssseseee eee ee eene 4 11 PowerLogic User s Guide ix Contents Modifying a Hierarchical Symbol eene 4 12 Swapping Reference Designators sssssssssssee eene mene ener 4 12 SAP PIS NAAA 4 13 Bus IPOD daa parda adidas 4 13 NE 4 14 Splitting a BUS ra batatalatalalaratabatalatatatubalatatatatatatatalatalatatatatatalatatabalalatarataratatalaatala alada 4 15 Extending a BUS Je Anda dad dd aci A A AE E A AA Rd A A AM A A A RT A E es 4 15 Moving a Bus Segment e n Ce D ert NIE NC D EE Ea 4 15 Deleting a Bus Sesma qud Ue dede dupl itedute eb att dne editar drag 4 15 vic PM 4 16 MGdSS OF OD TABBOT Eo ved dev de eh Re et ee de aR ee eiie 4 17 Group Select Modems ete o a Ref b efe e efe eio ete 4 17 Ro nM a en Reet col boar er er erp PED 4 17 Object Select aaa aut CC eC 4 21 G
104. appears in the Part Editor window Because the symbol is a hierarchical one it has no pin numbers The pin name associated with the hierarchical symbol pins identifies the net name of the connection that is tied to the pin All pins on a hierarchical symbol must have a pin name You cannot complete the hierarchical symbol until you assign a name to each pin 8 Name pins in the Part Editor and choose File Complete This closes the Part Editor and the new symbol follows the cursor movement 9 Move the symbol and indicate its location You can navigate this hierarchy with the View Push and View Pop commands Creating a Bottom Up Hierarchy In bottom up design you create a hierarchical symbol for an existing sheet that represents the underlying logic PowerLogic adds an input or output pin in the symbol for each off page reference on the schematic sheet PowerLogic places off page references with a pin type of Source on the left side of the hierarchical symbol and off page references with a pin type of Load on the right side Note Pin types for off page references are defined in the library under electrical 1 Choose the File Open command to load the schematic job file 2 Switch to the sheet that you want to add the hierarchical symbol to or add a new schematic sheet to the sheet set with the Setup Sheets command 3 Choose the Design Toolbox icon from the toolbar See the Design Toolbox topic in this chapter for more info
105. archical components through the Sheet list box in the toolbar unless the parent sheet is displayed They are also excluded from the Sheet command in the Setup menu Use the Query Hierarchical Component dialog box to assign the next available sheet number to a hierarchical component making it accessible from the Sheet list box even when a sheet other than the parent sheet is displayed This also allows you to use the Sheet command in the Setup menu to modify the sheet name or the numeric order o 1 Choose the Query Modify icon from the toolbar 2 Select the hierarchical component The Query Modify Hierarchical Component dialog box appears Modify the settings for sheet numbering and visibility Choose OK lf Query Hierarchical Component x Cuu MESH Visibity v Associated Shest w P Visibity jv 1 Numbered Un Numbered C PowerLogic User s Guide 44 Query Modify Name Renames the hierarchical component Visibility next to Name Displays the name on top of the hierarchical component in the schematic Visibility above Unnumbered Displays the sheet number in the schematic Numbered Assigns the hierarchical component the next available sheet number The assigned sheet number appears in the field above this option Unnumbered Removes a sheet number assignment from a hierarchical component Editing Off Page Symbol Sheet Numbers Per Line The displayed s
106. asc eco cam or edp to the directory The naming format is directory name pcb The original file extension is used The represents an incremented number for multiple files When this process completes the message Media Wizard completed successfully appears You can run the Log Test to run the resulting BMW macro To run the BLT modeless command 1 Type BLT and press Enter The Log Test dialog box appears 2 Choose a log test to run and choose OK This copies the directory name ini file into the powerlogic ini file and clears the PowerLogic work area The directory name log file appears in the Macro dialog box 3 Use the Macro dialog box to play back the log file Media Wizard Dialog Box MV Media Wizard Mm ES C Create Media from Current Session Create Media from Previous Session zz User Initials v Delete Actions Before Last Save Cancel Help Create Media from Current Session Creates media or prepares the related files from the current PowerLogic session This selection determines which next log file is used PowerLogic User s Guide 1 24 Shortcut Keys Create Media from Previous Session Creates media or prepares the related files from the previous PowerLogic session This selection determines which next log file is used User Initials Type your initials in this field to personalize the name of the files Using your initials ensures that you don t confuse your media files with
107. ations in the Design chapter for more information Cut Conns at Edge Includes or excludes connections that extend beyond the group outline Delete Deletes the selected parts gates or group See Group Operations in the Design chapter for more information on deleting groups Edit Part Opens the PowerLogic Part Editor Available when a single part or multiple gates from a single part are selected Not available when multiple parts or multiple gates from more than one part are selected Group Copy Copies the group to a new location See Group Operations in the Design chapter for more information Horiz Justify Moves the insertion point across the text string for left right or center justification PowerLogic User s Guide 1 28 Pop Up Menus Modify Bus When you choose the Modify Bus command from the pop up menu a cascading menu with the following commands appears Split Bus Bisects a selected segment with a new perpendicular segment Extend Bus Continues the bus definition from either end point Move Bus Segment Repositions the selected bus segment Delete Bus Segment Removes the selected bus segment See the Bus Toolbox topic in the Design Operations chapter for more information on these commands Modify Line Item When you choose the Modify Line Item command from the pop up menu a cascading menu with the following options appears Modify Line Item Modifies line items by pulling an a
108. ave a mcr extension The Macro command allows you to make collections of design specific macros by creating different macro files You can create design specific macros because a set of macros for design A may be irrelevant to design B Macro files are stored in the padpwr logicfiles directory To access a macro you created you must first Open the macro file To create a new macro file choose New from the Macro dialog box Macros are saved to the open macro file immediately after you record them Gwhen you choose the Stop icon See the Creating a New Macro topic in this chapter for information on creating new macros The last macro file opened is the default file and automatically opens when you start PowerLogic PowerLogic tracks which macro file was last opened in the MACROS section of the pwrlogic ini file When you open a macro file through the Macro dialog box existing macros are listed in a text window You can then select individual macros to run via the Run command You can add macros to and start macros from the menu using shortcut keys See the Assigning Shortcut Keys topic in this chapter for more information PowerLogic User s Guide 3 11 The Macro Recorder Macro File Format Macro files are stored in ASCII format so you can Edit them When you edit a macro it loads into the default text editor If you edit a macro the ASCII file changes and you must reopen it in PowerLogic for those changes to take effect A comman
109. bel name or free label for any attribute assigned to the part The name used is Free Label N where N is the number of the label As you add attributes they are placed at either the location that matches the attribute name if specified or the first available free label location PowerLogic User s Guide 5 8 Using Attribute Labels Creating Attribute Labels To create attribute labels while editing or creating a CAE Decal 1 Choose the Drafting toolbox icon from the main toolbar 2 Choose the Add Attribute Label icon The Add Attribute Label dialog box appears 3 Define the attribute label using one of the following methods Type a name in the Attribute Name drop down list box for the label that corresponds to an attribute Choose a name from the Attribute Name drop down list box When you choose an attribute name it is removed from the drop down list box Choose Free Label to use a free label When you choose Free Label the number increments to the next available number Choose the Browse Lib Attr to open the Browse Library Attributes dialog box Choose an attribute name from the list and then choose OK 4 Optionally set the text height width or justification 5 Choose OK Note Use the Display Colors dialog box to turn attribute label display on if necessary Add Attribute Label Dialog Box Use this dialog box to add a new attribute label to a CAE Decal See the Creating Attribute Labels topic in this
110. ber Move Places PowerLogic in Move mode Not available when a single part or multiple gates are selected When a group is selected this pop up menu command moves the group to a new location See Group Operations in the Design chapter for more information Query Modify Places PowerLogic in Query Modify mode Not available when multiple parts or multiple gates from more than one part are selected Rotate 90 Changes the orientation of the text in 90 degree increments Select All Selects all objects on all sheets using the current filter For example if the Parts Filter is turned on choose Select All to select all of the parts in the entire schematic design Select Anything Turns on the Gates Nets and Pins Filters Turns off the Part Filter Select Gates Selects the gates on the currently selected net deselects the net Select Gates Turns on the Object Selector Gates Filter See the Object Selector Toolbar topic in this chapter Select Group Turns off all Object Selector Filters and places PowerLogic in Group select mode See the Object Selector Toolbar topic in this chapter PowerLogic User s Guide 1 30 Pop Up Menus Select Net Selects the net to which the pin is connected Select Nets Turns on the Object Selector Net Filter See the Object Selector Toolbar topic in this chapter When a part or gate is selected this pop up menu command selects the net to which the currently selecte
111. bject in 9 11 Source rule object 10 7 Special symbols 7 29 creating 7 40 creating from existing 7 44 managing in the library 7 46 naming conventions 7 45 Splitting busses 4 13 4 15 connections 4 21 nets 2 18 ECO file format 2 18 segments 4 21 8 6 Standard toolbar 1 12 Starting PowerLogic 1 1 Start up options 1 1 1 2 Statistics net 11 14 part 11 13 Status bar 1 4 viewing 1 11 Status window 1 19 viewing 1 11 Step and repeat 4 18 Stub length 10 17 Suffix part 7 12 Swap ID 7 19 Swapping gates 7 9 7 16 ECO file format 2 18 PowerLogic User s Guide Index pins 4 2 4 13 7 36 ECO file format 2 18 reference designators 4 2 4 12 Switches command line 1 1 Symbols alternate 4 5 ANSII standards 4 5 creating hierarchical 4 9 creating from deleting hierarchical 4 21 IEEE standards 4 5 modifying hierarchical 4 12 Synchronizing PowerLogic and PowerPCB 9 15 System status indicator 1 3 eT Tandem checks 10 8 Tandem rules 10 16 Terminal number sequence 7 18 Terminal toolbox 1 17 7 35 Terminals adding 7 36 Text adding 8 2 editing 8 8 height and width 8 3 justification 8 3 moving 4 20 outputting 2 4 part text visibility dialog box 4 29 query modify 8 8 query modify part text visibility 5 7 rotation 8 3 Text box xix Thermal relief connection pads 10 21 Thickness of layers 10 20 Tie dot 4 6 Toolbar xix 1 1 1 3 1 12 docking 1 17 float
112. boxes for the Signal Name and Width Choose OK Creating New Special Symbols from Existing Symbols Special symbols in PowerLogic include power symbols ground symbols and off page reference symbols PowerLogic allows only one part definition in the library for off page reference symbols so this option grays when you choose File New from the menu You can modify the existing symbols and or add new symbols See the Creating New Special Symbols topic in this chapter for information on creating and assigning a new special symbol Use the Library Manager to make a copy of an existing special symbol 1 2 a 4 F 6 gt Choose File Library Choose the CAE icon from the Library Manager dialog box Set the filter for the symbol to search for for example for power symbols See the Special Symbol Naming Conventions topic for more information Double click on the symbol in the Decal area Choose Copy The Save Item to Library dialog box appears Type a name and director location for the new special symbol Choose OK To modify the new special symbol while in the Library Manager 1 2 3 4 Set the filter for the symbol if you saved it with a different prefix Select the symbol in the CAE Decals area Choose Edit Minimize the Library Manager dialog box or move it to one side PowerLogic User sGuide AA Special Symbols 5 Modify the graphics and rearrange the text strings as required 6 Choose File Save
113. by another attribute place the cursor in the column header area you want to sort by and click the left mouse button To sort the same column in reverse order click the left mouse button on the column header again To change column width place the cursor on the column line in the heading area When the arrow cursor changes shape click and drag the left mouse button in either direction to modify the width Changing column width on the Clipboard View tab does not change the width values on the Attributes tab Bill of Materials Setup x Attributes Format Clipboard View Item Qty Reference Part Name Manufacturer Ce AA 2 1 Y1 24 576MHZ 3 1 41 2BPINCONN 4 1 u1 87C256 5 1 U2 870256 6 1 AM100415 gt Select All Gopy Inleude table header Select All Selects all rows in the BOM report list Copy Copies selected rows in the BOM to the Clipboard You can then paste the Clipboard contents to another application such as Microsoft Word Tabs separate the report list fields into columns Include Table Header Includes the column header information Item Qty etc in the report PowerLogic User s Guide 11 20 Index 2 2D lines combine items 8 7 creating 8 4 modifying 8 5 outputting 2 4 2D line item 8 8 A About command 1 12 Adding attributes to libraries 7 22 bus 4 13 4 14 connection 4 2 4 5 connector pins 4 5 from library 8 2 8 7 gate 7 18 item 1 27
114. c User s Guide x Contents Chapter 5 Working With Attributes AD a id 5 1 Creating New Attributes in a Schematic eene enne enne 5 2 Manage Schematic Attributes Dialog Box ssssssssse eene 5 2 Add New Attributes Dialog BOX ssssssssseeeeen eene nennen nennen nnns 5 4 Managing Attributes in a Schematic ssssssssssssssseeeee eene eere 5 4 Query Modify Part Attributes ooooonoocccnnonocccoconnnnnononononononnnononnonnnnrononn nono nne nennen enne nnns 5 5 Query Modity Part Text Visibility ct de HH Hs 5 7 Using Attribute Labels irana eee eee eee eei eite ee e ee eee eei eate 5 8 Creating Attribute Labels abad 5 9 Add Attribute Label Dialog BOR inniinn i n eee SNR AA ARAN ARMA A RAR ARMA Re nus 5 9 Chapter 6 Library Operations e A ne E II eee ee eee dte mici utate aestu 6 1 Seleciime a A RE MU D UA MR 6 2 Library Data Type satt totu ttu Notti utn cu LU cut ot LU SU UE ut Lt uua SL Ted 6 2 General Purpose Library Operations ssssssssssee eee eee ree 6 2 Belit OPENS ASA OA ett 6 3 Search Filter mennaan A nebaren 6 4 Modifying the Library O a 6 4 Managing Attributes in the TADEADU i seen ten hende ed en RR RR ER PRU AER EE aed 6 6 Creating Attributes in TERTII PNE te tet caleba tuted ta 6 6 Manage Library Attributes Dialog Bor te tein en eted utate na 6 7 Add New Attribute to Library Dialog BO susto eee do E a ao 6 9 Browse Library Attributes Dialog Box sss eee eene 6 10 Chapter 7 Part Edit
115. can import the following ASCII asc PADS proprietary text ASCID format The ASCII files you can import includes those created from PowerLogic and PADS Logic 4 0 OLE ole PowerLogic allows you to embed files from other applications as OLE objects in your schematic using Edit Insert New Object Once you have an OLE object in your design you can export the object as a singular item to an ole file using File Export You can then import the ole file into other PowerLogic schematics To import a file 1 Choose File Import A prompt appears asking to save the existing design This occurs even if a file wasn t opened 2 Choose No to import a file Choose Yes to save the existing design before importing a file The File Import dialog box appears 3 Choose a file then choose Open to import the information into PowerLogic PowerLogic User s Guide 2 2 Importing and Exporting Files Exporting Files Use File Export to selectively extract design information from the open schematic file and save it in an ASCII format compatible with PowerLogic 1 2 and PowerLogic 3 0 You can also use Export to create default start up conditions for PowerLogic See the Customizing PowerLogic topic in the Design Setup chapter for more information You can export files into the PADS ASCII format with a txt extension To save all or some of the open design in ASCII format 1 Choose File Export from the menu to display the File Export dialog bo
116. ce the current library part with the one containing the modified decal Note See the Saving a Modified Part Type with a Different Name topic in this chapter for information on saving a part type with a different name Save Part and Gate Decals As Dialog Box The Save Part and Gate Decals As dialog box saves a new or modified part type to the library You can also rename a modified decal to prevent other parts that use the same decal from being effected Save Part and Gate Decals As x Name of Part Library 7400 D SpadspwrMib ti Ni Names of Gate Decals Gate CAE Decal 1 CAE Decal 2 NAND2 NANDDM NAND2 NANDDM NAND2 NANDDM NAND2 NANDDM Name of Part Defines the part type name in the library Library The library to which directory information is saved Name of Gate Decals Displays the name of decal and any alternate decals associated with the part type Select a decal name and choose Edit to rename the decal Edit Makes the highlighted field in the multicolumn list box editable You can also double click a text field to edit it PowerLogic User s Guide 7 6 Creating Multigate Parts Listed below is the basic procedure for creating a multigate part in PowerLogic Multigate parts are parts that use more than one symbol or gate to represent a complete part in the PCB design system for example a 7400 There are many steps used to create a new part but there are dialog boxes and information
117. chapter for more information Add Attribute Label Lx Attribute Name Browse Lib Atr Height Width fico fio Rotation fo y r Justification Horizontal Vertical C Fight C Up Center IC Center C Left a Down Cancel Help PowerLogic User s Guide Using Attribute Labels Browse Lib Attr Opens the Browse Library Attributes dialog box that lists all attribute names in all libraries Choose an attribute to add from this list See the Browse Library Attributes Dialog Box topic in the Library Operations chapter for more information Attribute Name Type an attribute name or choose a name from the drop down list Note Attribute names appear only if you are editing an existing decal and have used the Gates icon from the Part Editor to enter the CAE decal Newly created decals do not display attributes in this drop down Choose and assign a free label As you assign free labels the free label number increments for the next time you assign a free label to the same decal Height Width Changes the text height or line width Type new values Rotation Changes the orientation of the attribute label in 90 degree increments Justification Choose the insertion point for the attribute label Horizontal Moves the insertion point across the text string for left right or center justification Vertical Moves the insertion point up the text string characters for top center or bo
118. check for duplicate naming conventions Precede the text with a backslash to add a bar over text characters 1 Choose the Change Pin Name icon from the Terminal toolbox 2 Select the pin requiring a new name 3 Type the new name in the information window 4 Choose OK Use the Set Pin Name icon from the Terminal toolbox to assign names to several pins in an ascending sequence Setting Pin Types yu Use Set Pin Type from the Terminal toolbox to change the type of pin the terminal gt represents for example load source etc 1 Choose the Set Pin Type icon from the Terminal toolbox The Pin Type information window appears 2 Choose a pin type from the drop down list box 3 Select the pins to which to apply the pin type information The text string associated with the pin reflects the new pin type The characters that represent the pin type are listed below PowerLogic User s Guide 7 38 Terminal Toolbox 4 Choose a new pin type if necessary choose additional pins Characters used to represent pin types B Bidirectional Pin Open Collector Pin Ground Pin Load Pin Or tieable Source Pin C o0 Power Pin Source Pin Tristate Pin Undefined N CHa Terminator Pin For ECL rules Setting Pin Swaps a Use Set Pin Swap from the Terminal toolbox to define a swap class for a terminal mao Swapping information is used in the PCB design system for length minimization and routing optimization The swap class is as
119. connects to a tie dot or offpage symbol If the connection goes to another gate pin the connection is broken and an offpage symbol is added This command generates an error message if the pin is not connected to the net in question Net Level Backward Annotation You can backward annotate the following net level information Joined Nets The first net is renamed to be the same name as the second net Nets Created by Splitting an Existing Net A Delete Pin from Net operation is performed to remove them from the existing net followed by an Add Pin to Net operation to add the pin to the new net Renamed Nets All subnets of the old net on all sheets are renamed If any of the subnets contain Power or Ground symbols without netnames netnames are added to these symbols An error message is created if the new net already exists Attribute Level Backward Annotation You can backward annotate the following attribute level information New Attributes A new attribute in a part updates all parts of the same type If the attribute name does not exist it is added with the assigned value An error is created if the part does not exist Note Unsupported attribute types such as net or net class are ignored PowerLogic User s Guide 2 15 ECO Operations Deleted Attributes Deleting an attribute for a part type deletes the attribute on all parts of that type in the design An error message is generated if the part or at
120. cted across all sheets of the design Sheets that contain objects selected using the Object Selector display in bold in the Sheet list box Additional selection filters are available on the Selection pop up menu PowerLogic User s Guide 1 14 Toolbars and Toolboxes To select an entire part in a schematic choose the Part Filter icon and then select any gate on the part Note The Part Filter and the Gates Filter cannot be invoked at the same time Gates Filter The Filter group contains icons that allow you to select objects based on type You can select an entire part all gates a single gate of a part a net or a pin When you select an object on one sheet of the schematic the object is selected across all sheets of the design Sheets that contain objects selected using the Object Selector display in bold in the Sheet list box Additional selection filters are available on the Selection pop up menu To select any single gate on a part choose the Gates Filter icon and then select the gate To select multiple gates choose the Gates Filter icon and then use the Ctrl click or drag to select methods to add gates to the selection Note The Part Filter and the Gates Filter cannot be invoked at the same time Net Filter The Filter group contains icons that allow you to select objects based on type You can select an entire part all gates a single gate of a part a net or a pin When you select an object on one sheet
121. cument Object Type Convert to Microsoft Word 6 0 Document emm Activate as M Display As Icon Result w linked object must be converted at the source It will Commonly doc be displayed as an icon Change Icon Current Type Lists what the current type of the inserted object is Convert To Converts the selected OLE linked or embedded object to the application format selected in the Object Type box Use Convert To to change the file format of the object so that you can open it in the applications you use PowerLogic User s Guide 9 11 Saving OLE Objects Activate As Opens the selected OLE linked or embedded object as the Object Type selection After you activate and edit the object it returns to the current type Object Type The type of object to which you can convert the currently selected linked or embedded OLE object The currently selected OLE object can then open for editing in the source application Saving OLE Objects Linked and embedded objects are automatically saved when you save a PowerLogic design OLE objects are saved in a separate file with an ole extension By default the ole file is given the same name as the sch file it is associated with however _sch is added at the end of the filename to indicate that the ole file goes with a schematic instead of a PCB design _pcb is added to the name of the schematic containing OLE objects This allows you to easily manage project directories where
122. cursor at the desired view center and click the right mouse button e To define a specific view area click and hold the left mouse button move the mouse to define the view rectangle and release se Sheet or press the Drawing Format icon on the toolbar to redraw the urrent view ec se Redraw or press the Redraw icon on the toolbar to redraw the current view se Extents to fit all objects in the database on the screen er EE se the scroll bars to cause the view to pan Using the Middle Mouse Button Use the middle mouse button to perform panning and zooming operations To pan click the middle mouse button The view is centered at the cursor To zoom in click and hold the middle mouse button Drag the cursor diagonally up To adjust the bounding box move the mouse When you release the middle mouse button the area within the bounding box displays To zoom out click and hold the middle mouse button Drag the cursor diagonally down This draws an inner box representing the current view Moving the cursor adjusts the outer box which represents the new view The relative size of the outer box to the inner box determines how far the view zooms out Release the middle mouse button to complete the zoom out operation To view the entire design click and hold the middle mouse button drag the cursor horizontally and release Status Window The status window is a floating window that contains The postage stamp a
123. d See the Step and Repeat topic in the Design Operations chapter for more information To modify a free text item 10 1 Choose the Query Modify Mode icon from the toolbar 2 Select the text string to modify Text appears at its true width if the Real Width value in the Global tab is equal to or less than the text line width PowerLogic User s Guide 8 2 Drafting Toolbox IE Ada Free Text x Text x a mm Height Width 250 24 Rotation 0 Justification r Honzontal P I Right C Center p Set E Left o gum Cancel b Text Specifies the text string that composes the text line item X and Y Locates the text string at the precise X Y coordinate location you type If this is blank when you choose OK the text attaches to the cursor until you indicate the location Height and Width Overrides the default text height and width for this specific string with the values you specify Height specifies the character height type a value between 10 and 1000 Width specifies the line width of the character font type a value between 1 and 50 To change the default height and width for free text items refer to the Setting Preferences topic in the Design Setup chapter Rotation Rotates the text string by 90 degrees Justification Area Locates the text at the cursor or X Y coordinate location in the Horizontal and Vertical planes as follows Horizontal To the Right at the Center o
124. d Bus icon from the Bus toolbox or Add Item Add Bus from the pop up menu Indicate the starting point The bus follows the cursor movement 4 Indicate bus corners as needed or choose Add Corner from the pop up menu You can choose Del Corner from the pop up menu to back up to the previous corner if necessary 5 Double click to end the bus in open space or choose Complete from the pop up menu 6 Type the bus name in the text box or choose an existing name from the drop down list box and then choose OK See the Naming the Bus topic in this chapter for more information The name follows the cursor movement Optionally you can choose Rotate from the pop up menu before you place the text Indicate the name location Naming the Bus The bus name consists of two parts the base name and the bit range of the bus The format is BASElnn mml where nn is the lowest bit number and mm is the highest bit number for example PADS 00 15 The sheet number also displays with the bus name if the Show Off Page Reference option is on in the Design tab of the Preferences dialog box The total bus name including the base name brackets and colon cannot exceed 47 characters The bit numbers must be in the 00 to 99 range and cannot contain alphabetic characters PowerLogic defines a bus that appears on the same sheet or any other sheet with an identical name as the same bus Adding Connections to a Bus When connecting to a bus the connectio
125. d Repeat from the pop up menu See the Step and Repeat topic in the Design Operations chapter for more information 4 Choose Cancel from the pop up menu when you finish placing terminals PowerLogic User s Guide 7 36 Terminal Toolbox Changing Pin Decals Ed Use Change Pin Decal from the Terminal toolbox to select a different pin decal for an o existing terminal 1 Choose the Change Pin Decal icon from the Terminal toolbox The Pin Decal Browse dialog box appears 2 Choose a new pin decal from the list 3 Choose OK Select the terminals to change Setting Pin Numbers Use Set Pin Number from the Terminal toolbox to assign pin numbers to several pins The pin number is incremented each time you select a pin 1 Choose the Set Pin Number icon from the Terminal toolbox 2 Type the starting number in the information window 3 Choose OK 4 Select each pin to assign a number to in ascending sequence To skip a number select the same pin until the correct pin number appears then continue selecting other pins 5 Choose Cancel from the pop up menu when you finish setting numbers If you turned the Alpha Pins check box on in the Part Information dialog box you can type an alphanumeric character in the information window to assign letters to the pins Use the Change Pin Number icon from the Terminal toolbox to change individual pin numbers Changing Pin Numbers m Use Change Pin Number from the Terminal toolb
126. d Vias list box 2 Choose Remove to move them back to the Available Vias list box Via use for the net class etc is restricted to the via types in the Selected Vias list box If the Available Vias list box is empty there are no via restrictions Choose Via Definition to create rename or delete a via in the Setup Via dialog box PowerLogic User s Guide 10 14 Setting Design Rules Setup Via Dialog Box Loa EESE Cancel Delete Name pewa o Note If you define new via types in your schematic you must also define the via types in PowerPCB using padstack setup before reading the netlist into PowerPCB Add Adds a new via type to the schematic You must name the new via type Rename Renames an existing via type in the schematic Delete Removes a via type from the schematic You cannot remove standard vias Name Names a new via type Type the name for a new via type then choose Add High speed Rules El Use the High speed Rules dialog box to define rules for the following parameters Parallel Tandem Impedance Capacitance Routed length Stub length Shielding Matched length When imported into PowerPCB the EDC Electrodynamic Checking routine checks to see if rules are met correctly after routing except shielding and matched length PowerLogic User s Guide 10 15 Setting Design Rules You can use the Conditional Rules dialog box to save a high speed configuration as a set to apply
127. d called Reopen exists to open the last macro file Macro Dialog Box The Macro dialog box provides access to all macro functionality This includes creating new macro files opening editing existing macro files modifying existing macros and accessing the macro record functions New macros are by default named MACRO where is a numeric sequence such as macrol macro2 macro3 etc To provide a specific macro name delete the default and type a new name for the macro You can use any combination of letters and or numbers without spaces in a macro name The Macro Name list box in the Macro dialog box displays names up to 18 characters long See the Creating a New Macro topic in this chapter for more information am Delete Becord Close New Creates a new macro file The Create Macro File dialog box appears providing filename directory drive and extension settings Note After creating a new macro file use the Open command to access the file Open Opens an existing macro file A File Open dialog box appears displaying the default directory and files with the default mcr extension Reopen Opens a file you previously edited PowerLogic User s Guide 3 12 The Macro Recorder Status Opens the Macro Status dialog box where you can assign or change shortcut keys and where you can add macros to or delete macros from the menu See the Assigning Shortcut Keys topic in this chapter
128. d number of times To enter the value type the number of times you want to repeat the macro in the text box Choose Run to play back the macro Delete Removes the highlighted macro from the macro file PowerLogic User s Guide 3 13 The Macro Recorder Record Creates a new macro in the open macro file See the Creating a New Macro topic in this chapter for more information Creating a New Macro To create a new macro select Tools Macros to open the Macro dialog box Before recording a new macro you must Open an existing macro file or create a New macro file New macros are given a default name of MACRO where is a numeric sequence such as macrol or macro2 You can name each macro To help identify the functions of macros the Recorder provides an area to describe each created macro After establishing the macro file start the Recorder as follows 1 Choose Record The Record dialog box appears Macro Name Macro2 m Record mode a E r Description Aao Cancel Help 2 Type a macro name that consists of letters and or numbers without spaces The Macro Name list box can display names up to 18 characters long 3 Type a description for the macro This describes the macro s function when you highlight the macro name in the Macro dialog box 4 Choose any of the Record mode options Mouse Compression mode Compresses mouse movements See the Compress Mouse Mode topic in this chapter
129. d part or gate is connected Select Part Selects the entire part to which the currently selected gate or pin belongs Select Parts This command performs two different functions depending on what type of object is selected e Selects only the parts out of all of the currently selected objects e Turns on the Object Selector Parts Filter See the Object Selector Toolbar topic in this chapter Select Pins Turns on the Object Selector Pins Filter See the Object Selector Toolbar topic in this chapter Set Origin Changes the insertion point of the group Set Verb Mode You can only set the verb mode when no objects are selected When you choose the Set Verb Mode command a cascading menu with the following commands appears Select Mode Places PowerLogic in Group Select mode Copy Mode Places PowerLogic in Copy mode Move Mode Places PowerLogic in Move mode Delete Mode Places PowerLogic in Delete mode Query Mode Places PowerLogic in Query mode See the Modes of Operation topic in the Design Operations chapter for more information on these commands PowerLogic User s Guide 1 31 Pop Up Menus Show Attr Name Displays the name of the attribute as well as the value as NAME VALUE Use this option to set unique display of attributes in a design A check appears next to the option when turned on See the Query Modify Part Text Visibility topic in the Working With Attributes chapter for information on setting
130. d places them in the Attributes in Schematic list box Removed attributes are not renamed Add Attr Opens the Add New Attribute dialog box where you create a new attribute The attribute is added to all parts in the open design See the Add New Attributes Dialog Box topic in this chapter for more information Delete Attrs Deletes selected attributes from all parts in the design PowerLogic User s Guide 5 3 Managing Attributes in a Schematic Add New Attributes Dialog Box Choose Add Attr on the Manage Schematic Attributes dialog box to open this dialog box Use this dialog box to specify the attribute name and value you want to add to the open design To create a new attribute 1 Type a new attribute name in the Attribute Name text box 2 Type a value for the attribute in the Attribute Value text box 3 Choose OK If the attribute name already exists in some parts in the design the message Items exist with this attribute name do you wish to overwrite old value with tbe new name value Appears 4 Choose Yes to add the new name and value to all parts Choose No to not update the existing attribute Choose Cancel to return to the Add New Attribute dialog box where you can re enter a new name and value Add New Attribute xi Korbe Nate Browse Lib Attr Attribute Value Cancel Help Attribute Name Type the new attribute name in the text box Attribute Value Type the new attribute value in the text bo
131. decals by followed by an asterisk For example type DIP to view all DIP decals Type to view all decals Choose Apply to see the results of your search in the Unassigned Decal list box Pin Count Contains the number of pins in the decal Preview Area Displays the decal that you select in the Unassigned Decals list box Unassigned Decals Lists all decals from the selected library that you can assign to the part Assigned Decals Lists all decals assigned to the part You can assign up to four decals Assigned decals must have the same number of pins The first decal is the default decal Use the Up and Down buttons to reorder the assigned decals Assign New Assigns the decal name of a nonexistent decal in the library This feature is very beneficial for schematic designers You can specify a decal that doesn t exist in your library but may exist in the PCB designers library When you choose Assign New the Assign New PCB Decal dialog box appears Type a name and choose OK The name is added to the end of the Assigned Decals list To unassign the new decal name choose Unassign Assign Assigns decals To assign decals to the part 1 Select one or more decal names from the Unassigned Decals list box 2 Choose Assign The decal moves to the Assigned Decals list box the decal is assigned to the part Note As a shortcut double click on a decal name to assign it to the part You can assign up to four decals A
132. der the New Design column as lt none gt Parts that exist only in the new design are listed under the Old Design column as lt none gt Parts that have identical reference designators and part types in both designs are not listed Net differences This section lists names of the nets that do not exist under two columns New Design and Old Design It lists the names of the nets that do not exist in one design or the other It also lists the nets that match but that have different names including nets in the old design that have been split into multiple nets in the new design A net split operation appears as pin differences Nets are listed alphabetically under the Old Design column except where multiple nets are combined where they are listed in succession Nets that do not exist in the old design are listed at the end of this section Unmatched net pins in old design This section lists any connected pins in the old design that are missing or connected to other nets in the old design These are the pins that are deleted from nets during the ECO process This list provides net names in the old design followed by unmatched pins in the net If the net does not exist in the new design all pins in the net are listed Unmatched net pins in new design This section lists any connected pins in the new design that are missing or connected to other nets in the old design These are the pins that are added to nets during the ECO process This list pr
133. e or c Choose a symbol decal d Choose OK Select the text box under Pin Type Choose Edit Choose a pin type from the drop down list box This is normally set to Power Select and edit the text boxes for the Signal Name and Width Choose OK Assign Alternatives for Ground Part Use the Assign Alternatives for Ground Part dialog box to assign or create additional ground symbols To open this dialog box 1 2 3 4 5 Choose Tools Part Editor Choose File Open The Select Type of Editing Item dialog box appears Choose Ground Choose OK The current symbols appear Choose Edit Electrical or choose the Edit Electrical icon from the toolbar Assign Alternatives for Ground Part x Special Symbol Pin Type Signal Name Ground GND Ground AGND Ground CHGND PowerLogic User s Guide 7 43 Special Symbols To add a new ground symbol 1 2 ND MR Y Choose Add This creates a new entry for the symbol Type a name for the new symbol Note the existing naming conventions used If the symbol already exists a In the Special Symbol column choose the icon to the right of the newly created text box The Browse for Special Symbol dialog box appears b Set the filter for an existing symbol for example GND c Choose a symbol decal d Choose OK Select the text box under Pin Type Choose Edit Choose a pin type from the drop down list box This is normally set to Ground Select and edit the text
134. e and swap information Use the Terminal toolbox to modify the basic information created by the decal wizard See the Terminal Toolbox topic in this chapter for more information You can add additional terminals change the pin decal or change the pin sequence number The other options in the Terminal toolbox gray when you create a CAE Decal fE Decal Wizard E Picture Input Pins Pin Decal Pin Count PIN 7 fa m Pin Decal Pin Count PeLK z f UICE OK Cancel Help Input Pins Area Selects the pin decals for the left or input side of the part Type the number of pins in the Pin Count text box Output Pins Area Selects the pin decals for the right or output side of the part Type the number of pins in the Pin Count text box PowerLogic User s Guide 7 34 Terminal Toolbox Terminal Toolbox CLXB ES Use the Terminal toolbox to add pin terminals to the decal and to assign pin names pin numbers pin types and pin swapping information Pin numbers correspond to component pads or pins in the PCB decal when the part is used in a PCB design database Note You must be in the Part Editor to view the Terminal Toolbox icon we bz lA 4410 20 Et 4 Add Terminal Adds a connection pin to the part A terminal consists of a pin decal and a series of text strings that define the terminal s number swap data etc See the Adding Terminals topic in th
135. e GD100 Design and Hierarchy HI Invokes Hierarchical Push HO Invokes Hierarchical Pop Q Invokes Quick Measure R lt width gt Set minimum Real display width for paths SH lt sheei gt Select sheet name or number W lt width gt Set current line width Search Commands S lt string gt Search for named item pin part or net for example SU1 S lt n gt lt n gt Search absolute at n n for example S1000 1000 SR n n Search relative X and Y for example SR 200 100 SRX lt n gt Search relative X for example SRX300 SRY lt n gt Search relative Y for example SRY400 SX lt n gt Absolute move to lt n gt current Y for example SX300 SY lt n gt Absolute move to lt n gt current X for example SY400 Angles AA Any angle AD Diagonal angle AO Orthogonal angle PowerLogic User s Guide 1 22 Drafting Objects HC HH HP HR Modeless Commands Circle shape draw mode Path shape draw mode Polygon shape draw mode Rectangle shape draw mode Mouse Click Substitutes M Spacebar Various BMW BLT F lt name gt I BMW and BLT Activates pop up for current mode right mouse button Activates a left mouse button click to add corners select items complete etc at the current cursor location Shows this help topic Opens the Media Wizard dialog box BMW creates a macro with associated files based on your last PowerLogic session or your current session BMW records a session usi
136. e Save As dialog box appears if the current schematic is untitled PowerLogic User s Guide 2 1 Saving Files You can also create a new file by choosing New PowerLogic Design from the pop up menu in Windows Explorer To create a new file this way 1 In Windows Explorer go to the directory where you want to create the file 2 Choose New PowerLogic Design from the pop up menu This action creates a new design file in the current directory 3 Type a name for the file and press Enter Make sure the file has a sch extension This creates a zero byte file When you open this file in PowerLogic PowerLogic recognizes the zero byte file and performs a File New using default txt Saving Files m Use File Save or File Save As to write design information to a file The File Save As dialog box displays the schematic files contained in the default padspwr logicfiles directory The list of displayed files includes those created in PowerLogic and PADS Logic V4 0 The name of the currently open design is displayed in the File Name text box at the bottom of the dialog box Choose Save to save the file If the file name exists a prompt is displayed to overwrite the existing file The file name default is displayed for new designs You can also save a file by choosing the File Save icon from the Toolbar Importing and Exporting Files Importing Files The Import command inserts data from various formats into the current schematic PowerLogic
137. e a name and library location for the new pin decal 10 Choose OK When you create a new Pin Decal PowerLogic automatically creates the necessary text strings for the associated pin information You only need to specify the 2D lines that represent the terminal pin then reposition the text strings PowerLogic User s Guide 7 30 Creating New Parts from Existing Parts To create a new pin decal 1 Choose Tools Part Editor to enter the Part Editor 2 Choose File New The Select Type of Editing Item dialog box appears See the Select Type of Editing Item topic in this chapter for more information Choose Pin Decal Choose OK Four text entries appear in the work area FE Placeholder for the pin number PNAME Placeholder for the pin name NETNAME Placeholder for the net name 0 TYP U SWP 0 Placeholders for the sequence number pin type and swap class Choose the Create 2D Line icon from the Drafting toolbox to create the pin decal Reposition the text strings Choose File Save The Save Item to Library dialog box appears Type a name and library location for the new pin decal NP n OON Mm Choose OK Managing Pin Decals Use the Pin Decal List Management dialog box to control which decals are displayed in the Pin Decal List The pin decal list contains the decals that can be used as terminal graphics when creating gate or part decals Choose Setup Pin List Manager to open this dialog box Note This dialog box
138. e attributes that get assigned to every part in the library every part in the open design a part type or to only one part in the design To add an attribute to all parts in a library create the attribute in the Manage Library Attributes dialog box See the Creating Attributes in the Library topic in the Library Operations chapter for more information To add an attribute to rename an attribute in or delete an attribute from the library alter the attribute in the Manage Library Attributes Dialog Box See the Manage Library Attributes Dialog Box topic in the Library Operations chapter for more information To add an attribute to every part in the open design create the attribute in the Managing Schematic Attributes dialog box See the Creating Attributes in a Schematic topic in this chapter for more information Use the Browse Library Attributes dialog box to browse and list all attribute names from libraries specified in the Library List dialog box See the Browse Library Attributes Dialog Box topic in the Library Operations chapter for more information To add an attribute to a specific part create the attribute using the Attributes tab while editing the part See the Attributes Tab topic in the Part Editor Operations chapter for more information To add an attribute to a part on the schematic without updating the part type use the Query Modify Part Attributes dialog box See the Query Modify Part Attributes topic
139. e library with which to work You can select an individual library or all libraries Item Types Specifies the attributes to list in the Attributes in Library list box Edit New Name Allows you to edit the selected New Name cell You can also double click on the New Name cell to edit it This button grays until you rename an attribute You must select a New Name cell to activate this button PowerLogic User s Guide 6 7 Managing Attributes in the Library Attributes in Library Lists the attributes in the selected library Attributes Selected for Rename Lists the attribute you want to rename and its new name Old Name Specifies the existing attribute name New Name Specifies the new name of the attribute Add Adds selected attributes in the Attributes in Library list box to the Attributes Selected for Rename multicolumn list box Once attributes are in the Attributes Selected for Rename multicolumn list box you can specify a new name for the attribute Remove Removes selected attribute names from the Attributes Selected for Rename multicolumn list box and places them in the Attributes in Library list box Removed attributes are not renamed Remove All Removes all attribute names from the Attributes Selected for Rename multicolumn list box and places them in the Attributes in Library list box Removed attributes are not renamed Add Attr Opens the Add New Attribute to Library dialog box where you create a new attribu
140. e lists provide descriptions of the Visual Basic scripts provided by PADS In the first list samples 00 through 09 provide an overview of Visual Basic for users who don t have experience with Visual Basic scripts Samples 10 11 provide small PowerLogic features that add enhance or customize a PowerLogic feature These files are located in the padspwr logicole vbscripts folder The second list describes Visual Basic scripts which are equivalent to existing RGL reports These files are located in the padspwr logicole vbscripts rgl samples folder The third list describes advanced Visual Basic scripts These files are located in the padspwr logicole vbscripts folder All sample scripts are commented PowerLogic User s Guide 9 22 Visual Basic Sample Scripts 00 What is a VB Script BAS 01 Using a Message Box BAS 02 Using a Variable BAS 0 3 Using a VB Function BAS 0 4 Using a powerLogic Function BAS 0 MI Using If and Then Statements BAS 0 6 Using a Custom Dialog1 BAS 0 M Using a Custom Dialog2 BAS 0 00 Using a Custom Dialog3 BAS 0 9 Using it All Together BAS 10 List Of Comps and Nets BAS 11 Select by Pin Count BAS Visual Basic Scripting Empty script demonstrating what a Visual Basic script is and how to define it Demonstrates how to display an OK dialog box Demonstrates a Visual Basic variable how to assign a value and how to get its value Demonstrates how to use a sta
141. e nets to combine The new combined net uses the name OLDNET1 A connection is added between the nets using two random pins in the selected nets The trace width of the added connection is the same as that of a connection in the first net OLDNETO Delete a part The command is DELPART The format for the line is refdes parttype where refdes is the part reference name to delete and parttype is the part type name The part type name is not required All pins of the part to be deleted must already have been disconnected from the connection nets in the design or an error will be reported Delete a pin from net The command starts DELPIN This is followed by a list of pins to delete from each net in the form refdes pinnumber signame where refdes is the part reference name pinnumber is the pin number to disconnect and signame is the net of which the pin is currently part Change a component s part type The command is CHGPART The format for the change part line is refdes oldparttype newparttype where refdes is the reference name of the part to change oldparttype is the old part type and newparttype is the new part type PowerLogic User s Guide 2 17 ECO Operations Splitting a net into two new nets The command starts SPLITNET SPLIT NET INTO TWO NEW NETS two lines follow listing the new signal names and the pins SIGNAL oldsigname refl pinl ref2 pin2 SIGNAL
142. e number of sequential different backup files to create Create between 1 and 9 different and sequential backup files PowerLogic increments and numbers the files as logic00 sch logic01 sch etc Backup File Opens the Backup File dialog box where you can choose a location and filename for the backup file The default backup filename is logic00 sch which PowerLogic saves to the padspwr logicfiles directory If you change the backup filename PowerLogic automatically adds the numeric suffix Design Tab The Design tab defines the parameters for schematic editing Preferences x Global Design Heights widths m Design Grid Sheet Size Size 9 M Snap to Grid E 7 Sheet Numbers Separators JE IM Y Show Off Page Sheet Numbers Numbers per Line fo r Parameters Tie Dot Diameter po Bus Angle Offset so IV Preserve Reference Designators on Paste Design Grid Size Sets the snap grid size The snap grid is the minimum distance for cursor movement Type a value between 2 and 1000 that is a multiple of 2 for example 2 4 50 or 100 Snap to Grid Specifies that an item object snaps to the grid during editing PowerLogic User s Guide 3 4 Setting Preferences Sheet Size Sets the sheet size When you change the sheet size it affects all sheets of the schematic Choose a size from either US standard sheet sizes A through F or international standard drawing sizes A4 through AO She
143. e the contents to a file PowerLogic User s Guide 4 28 Query Modify Gate Decal Use the Gate decal drop down list box to change the gate decal of the selected gate or part to one of the predefined alternate decals Part Text Visibility Controls the display of text associated with the selected part Use the Visibility button to control the visibility of one part or all parts of the same type See the Query Modify Part Text Visibility topic in the Working With Attributes chapter for more information Part Attributes Assigns or modifies part attributes which is information about the part such as manufacturer and cost Use the Attributes button to modify this information See the Query Modify Part Attributes topic in the Working With Attributes chapter for more information PCB Decals Assignment Assigns alternate PCB decals to schematic parts See the Query Modify PCB Decals Assignment topic in this chapter for more information Part Signal Pins The Signal Pins button assigns any unused pins as additional signal pins When you create and store a part type in the library the standard power and ground pins for part types are defined Signal pins assigned during part creation cannot be modified through this dialog box Use the Assigning Signal Pin Names to Parts dialog box in the library manager to modify signal pins assigned during part construction o 1 Choose the Query Modify icon from the toolbar 2 Select a
144. e the cursor to indicate the center of the zoom area and press the left button To zoom out locate the cursor and press the right button You can specify the zoom area Press and hold the left button and drag diagonally upward to zoom in diagonally downward to zoom out Sheet Adjusts the display to fit the sheet outline in the work area Information that is external to the sheet outline such as dimensions and notes does not display Redraw Refreshes the work area display without modifying the current zoom factor or coordinate position Object Selector Toolbar The Object Selector toolbar is visible by default at the bottom of the PowerLogic main window and is available only in Schematic Editor mode Open or close the toolbar using the Object Selector command under the Window menu The Object Selector toolbar contains the following groups of tools Filter Locator View Automation Group Group Navigator Connection Group Group e eS amp e z s mees tle el Aj 3K All in List A U7 SHEET1 U1 SHEET1 U3 SHEET1 Group Select Mode Places PowerLogic in Group Select mode See Group Operations in the Design chapter for more information Part Filter The Filter group contains icons that allow you to select objects based on type You can select an entire part all gates a single gate of a part a net or a pin When you select an object on one sheet of the schematic the object is sele
145. e the end point in the opposite direction 5 Indicate the end point of the new segment to complete the split Delete Mode x Use Delete mode to completely remove parts connections unconnected busses text drafting objects and hierarchical symbols from the design If you delete a part with connections PowerLogic also deletes the connections 1 Choose the Delete Mode icon from the toolbar or Set Verb Mode Delete Mode in the pop up menu 2 Select the object to delete PowerLogic remains in delete mode until you choose another mode toolbox or the Select icon from the toolbar Deleting a Hierarchical Symbol When you select a hierarchical symbol in delete mode the message OK to delete sheets associated with tbe hierarchy Warning there is no Undo for this operation appears If you choose Yes another prompt Delete associated sheet Y N appears If you choose Yes PowerLogic deletes the hierarchical symbol and any associated sheets throughout the hierarchy If you choose No and it is a hierarchical symbol without a sheet number PowerLogic assigns it the next unused sheet number and it becomes a normal numbered sheet Object Select Mode In Object Select mode you select the object then select a verb with which to perform an action Select an object using the Object Selector toolbar or pop up menu then choose a verb from the Standard toolbar or the pop up menu The type and quantity of objects selected determines which V
146. eave these items floating or unattached to a border within the work area and move them around as needed for viewing purposes You can size toolbars as well For specific information on docking moving or resizing toolboxes and toolbars refer to the Microsoft Windows Tutorial on line Search for toolbars ToolTips ToolTips appear below icons and provide a command name or description for the icons in the toolbar and toolbox To view a ToolTip place and leave the cursor on an icon ToolTips are inactive during system processing File Edit View Setup Tools Window Help 3 ii n 9 JNENO 49 4 8 5 PowerLogic User s Guide 1 17 Work Area and Grid Settings Work Area and Grid Settings The maximum work area is a square 54 inches by 54 inches The current grid settings show on the message line at the bottom of the work area between the current default line width and the current cursor X and Y location When you move an object or use a drafting command the grid readout is replaced by a Delta X and Y reading calculated from the cursor selection point when the command starts Negative numbers indicate left and downward Display Grid PowerLogic uses a dot grid as a drafting aid You can set this field of white dots called the display grid to match your design grid or set it at larger multiples of the design grid Use the Global tab in the Preferences dialog box to set the display grid or use the GD modeless command If you do
147. ecording mouse movements increases the file size but documents coordinate information if required for a special application Mouse movements are not recorded E Mouse movements are recorded Record Prompt Mode The Record Prompt Mode icon sets whether to record prompt windows Prompt windows confirm actions When Record Prompt mode is off you must enter responses manually during playback of the macro Prompts are recorded in the macro Prompts are not recorded in the macro Coordinate Mode The Coordinate Mode icon sets recorded mouse coordinates for relative coordinates distance from last pick point or absolute coordinates all distances from 0 0 coordinate location Records coordinates relative to last selection point Records coordinates from absolute 0 0 location PowerLogic User s Guide 3 15 The Macro Recorder Assigning Shortcut Keys It is possible to start a macro without opening the Macro dialog box by assigning a combination of keystrokes called shortcut keys to each macro Use modifier keys Ctrl and Shift and function keys F1 through F12 to create the key combination The Macro Status dialog box assigns or changes shortcut keys and adds macros to or deletes macros from the Tools menu Open the Macro Status dialog box by choosing Status in the Macro dialog box To assign shortcut keys 1 Choose a key assignment from the list box in the Assigned Keys area 2 Choose a macro from the drop down
148. ect using the appropriate application The application starts within PowerLogic For example if you want to insert a Word document Word appears to open within PowerLogic Word menus and toolbars replace the PowerLogic menus and toolbars inside the PowerLogic window When you choose Create New you must also choose the type of object to create Note You can only create new OLE objects using applications that are installed and registered on your system and are OLE servers Most OLE servers are Microsoft products such as Word or Excel Create from File Creates an OLE linked or embedded object based on an existing file When you choose Create from File choose the file from which to create the OLE object and choose whether to link the OLE object to the file Object Type Choose the type of OLE object you want to insert The Object Type choices are based on which products are currently installed on your system File The file to insert Only a copy of the file is inserted the original remains unchanged Choose whether to Link the OLE object to the file linked OLE objects are automatically updated when you modify the original file If you do not choose to link the OLE object it is embedded and does not automatically update PowerLogic User s Guide 9 4 OLE Object Linking and Embedding Browse Use the Browse button to search for a different file Link Links the inserted OLE object to the original file When you modify t
149. ected to it PowerLogic User s Guide 10 19 Setting Layers Electrical Layers Area Lets you to increase the number of electrical layers and reassign data from one layer to another Choose the Increase or Reassign button Thickness Opens the Layer Thickness dialog box where you can define layer and substrate thickness and dielectric information The Electrodynamic Checking module EDC uses this information Layer Thickness Dialog Box Use the Layer Thickness dialog box to define layer and substrate thickness and dielectric information The Electrodynamic Checking module EDC uses this information To open this dialog box 1 Choose Setup Layers 2 Choose the Thickness button The electrical layers plus the substrate prepreg layers between the electrical layers appear in the list box Layer Thickness x A Layer List ok Substrate Preprea Substrate Substrate Prepreg Cancel Bottom Thickness Dielectric Layer Type Routing Copper Thickness fi Layer List Lists the layers for which you can define substrate prepreg or copper laminate thickness Layer Type The Layer Type for the selected copper laminate layer is displayed here Copper Thickness Sets the Copper Thickness on the selected copper laminate layer This option grays when a substrate layer is selected PowerLogic User s Guide 10 20 Setting Layers Substrate Prepreg Area These opt
150. edded OLE object For a Video Clip Object you can choose to Play Edit or Open the object Note The commands that appear for each object depend on the object type therefore a Word object will not have the same options that a video clip has PowerLogic User s Guide 9 10 Converting OLE Objects and other OLE specific Editing Commands OLE objects have some common commands One of those commands is Convert You can convert an OLE object to another object You can also convert the OLE object from displaying as an icon to displaying the actual object for example the Word document instead of an icon Note The object s source application determines to what the object can be converted Edit Choose Edit to edit the linked or embedded OLE object in PowerLogic You can edit the object using all of the source application s commands and tools When you are finished editing choose File Close You return to PowerLogic and the OLE object is updated Open Choose Open to open the linked or embedded OLE object in the source application You can then edit the object within the source application When you finish editing choose File Exit You return to PowerLogic and the OLE object is updated Convert Choose Convert to convert a linked or embedded OLE object to another type of object for example convert a Word document to a Word picture The Convert dialog box appears MA Convert MEI Current Type Microsoft Word 6 0 Do
151. ee the remaining steps in the Adding Connections to a Bus topic in this chapter When you end a connection at another connection PowerLogic places a tie dot at the junction The resulting net name is the name of the added connection not the existing connection unless you assign a name to the existing connection To assign a fixed net name to a connection you must first add the connection and then select a segment that is directly attached to a part type pin Then you can invoke Query mode and enter the new net name in the Query Modify Net Name dialog box Optionally you can add multiple copies of the connection after the initial connection location is indicated See the Step and Repeat topic in this chapter for more information Adding Off page References To connect two pins on separate sheets of the schematic or at opposite ends of the same sheet without a graphical connection use an off page reference with identical net names To add an off page reference 1 Specify the connection as described in the previous section 2 Choose Offpage from the pop up menu The symbol attaches to the connection and follows the cursor movement The default decal with the right pin is a source pin the alternate decal with the left pin is a load pin This pin type orientation plays a role when you create a hierarchical symbol of the sheet All off page sources are on the left of the hierarchical symbol outline and all loads are on the right Y
152. elete nets from the class choose the nets in the Selected list box and choose Remove Default Returns the class rules to the default rules PowerLogic User s Guide 10 5 Setting Design Rules Net Rules al Use the Net Rules dialog box to define rules that apply to a single net or multiple nets Choose Setup Design Rules The Rules dialog box appears 2 Choose the Net icon The Net Rules dialog box appears 3 Select the nets you want to define Clearance Routing and High Speed rules for and choose the appropriate icon D Rules x ze NI Clearance Routing HiSpeed Report Default je Show Nets with Rules qune Nets Lists nets by name and parenthetically notes any rules that apply to the net Select nets and choose the appropriate rule icon to apply rules Net Rules Icons Defines Clearance Routing or High speed rules for nets Choose the appropriate icon Clearance Opens the Clearance Rules dialog box where you set Clearance rules for a net See the Clearance Rules topic in this chapter for more information Routing Opens the Routing Rules dialog box where you set Routing rules for a net See the Routing Rules topic in this chapter for more information High speed Opens the High speed Rules dialog box where you set High speed rules for a net See the High speed Rules topic in this chapter for more information When you select a net name an icon appears below each rule type to indica
153. em you need use the filter to search the available libraries Use the wildcard convention with or without leading characters to expand or narrow the filter Choose Apply to activate the filter Choose OK The item follows the cursor movement Optionally you can rotate or mirror the item before you indicate its location Choose the Rotate Mirror X or Mirror Y command from the pop up menu as often as needed to set the correct orientation of the item 5 Indicate the item location PowerLogic searches only active libraries with the Lines option set to check the 2D element PowerLogic User s Guide 8 7 Query Modify Adding Drafting Items to a Library To save a 2D line item or a complex 2D line item in the schematic to a lines library choose the Save to Library icon from the Drafting toolbox 1 Choose the Save to Library icon from the Drafting toolbox 2 Select the item 3 Type the item name and specify the library location in the Save to Library dialog box 4 Choose OK Query Modify 9 Choose the Query Modify icon to place PowerLogic in Query Modify mode Use this mode to get information on and modify objects in PowerLogic When you select an object in Query Modify mode a dialog box or information window appears Query Modify Text Use the Query Modify Text dialog box to modify free text or change its size orientation or justification ie 1 Choose the Query Modify icon from the toolbar 2 Select the text t
154. enini n i E ALAS ER en n HA NA i RM p TIR AES 11 1 Select LEMS rig edu teet dues taies tote P edi ete E De 11 3 RIOROPUOAS eerie itte EH as e deeds oso E dor ines 11 5 Pen loteria 11 6 Pen Plotter Advanced Setup ssssssssssssssssseee ee eem 11 7 Photo Plotter Setup sssssssssssseee eee rne naar nr naar nr n ner eer nennen 11 8 Photo Plotter Advanced Setup eee eee ree 11 9 PostScript Printing to a File 11 11 Creating Repotts nesdagagdaadaqudaquam e meneem eene HOHER RS 11 11 DUNN ie eie lela a ed eee ae Gi de eis 11 13 Patt SCaUstICs ce ect at aate ee e e 11 13 NO d oed doncc ceu pudet no act e dpt n ca PO LC LER IN 11 14 J bLimilsssicisici ia teet ette ette eie tette tete tue ete ette 11 14 Go PR 11 16 Bl Mater 11 17 A MTM cC In 1 PowerLogic User s Guide xv y p 3 AA b d Preface Welcome to PowerLogic 3 0 PADS PowerLogic is the next generation of schematic capture from PADS Software Inc PADS developed the graphical user interface according to Microsoft Windows standards From the flat one level menu structure to the use of standard shortcut keys and a context sensitive On line Help system PowerLogic s design maximizes ease of use Conventions The following is a list of design and documentation conventions to help familiarize you with PowerLogic and the documentation Design Conventions For commands that operate on a selected object you must place PowerLogic in Verb mode before selectin
155. ens To assign color to a pen first choose a color in the Selected Color area and then choose the color box above each pen number that you want to change PowerLogic User s Guide 11 6 Print Plot Operations Selected Color Area Specifies a color assignment for pens Plotting Size Area Sets the plot size Choose Other to define a custom plot size type the X and Y dimensions Device Lists the available pen plotter devices in a drop down list box Advanced Opens the Pen Plotter Advanced Setup dialog box where you can specify advanced pen plotter settings If your device type is not listed choose Advanced to define its characteristics and add it to the device list Pen Plotter Advanced Setup Use the Pen Plotter Advanced Setup dialog box to add a new pen plotter to the list of available plotters To open this dialog box choose Advanced from the Pen Plotter Setup dialog box You can also edit the data for an existing plotter but only if it is a custom setup You cannot modify the PADS supplied advanced plotter settings The new plotter must support either the HPGL or HGML interface language Other plotter languages or formats are not yet supported Pen Plotter Advanced Setup x Plotter Device Name Device Type OK HP 7580 HPGL Cancel Plotter Units Multiplier Divisor Help 254 250 IV Origin at Center Plotter Device Name Specifies the model number of the plotter that you wan
156. ent Rule Set to Clearance or High speed 5 Choose Create 6 Select the rule set in the Existing Rules Sets area and define the appropriate values for the rule set r Define Conditional Objects e Rule Object Against Rule Object Close CA 36 C Layer Help Classes Classes Nets Nets Apply to Layer All layers S p Existing Rule Sets Current Rule Set Clearance Object to Object Delete aT High Speed Length Source Rule Object Area Establishes all objects or a selected class or net as the subject of the rule PowerLogic User s Guide 10 7 Setting Design Rules Note The lower the source object s place in the hierarchical order the broader the selection of items that you can select from in the Against list box This helps you create rule sets in one direction and avoid conflicting hierarchical items Against Rule Object Area Identifies all objects or a selected class or net the rule set is checked against Apply to Layer Area Uses a layer as an against object or applies an item to item rule on a specific layer Existing Rule Sets Area Lists defined rule sets for specific Clearance or High speed definition of the selected rule set Clearance Rule Set Area Sets Clearance rules for the rule set Once you specify a Clearance rule set you can enter the minimum clearance gap you want the source and against i
157. ented by a single schematic symbol When you add the part to the schematic unique reference designator assignment starts with the next available reference designator number The Adding Parts topic in this chapter lists the step by step procedure Adding Multigate Parts Multigate parts are parts that consist of more than one symbol or gate to represent a complete part for example a 7400 which contains 4 gates See the Adding Parts topic in this chapter for the step by step procedure for adding multigate parts When you add a new multigate part the gate with the lowest set of pin numbers is used along with the next available reference designator and an alphanumeric suffix or gate modifier The reference designator and suffix are separated by the dash C character For example a 7400 added to a new schematic would use the gate with pins 1 through 3 and would be assigned as part U1 A When you add additional gates of the same part the next available gate and gate modifier is used for example the gate with pins 4 through 6 is added and assigned as U1 B PowerLogic continually manages the packaging of gates in a schematic If you delete rename or change the part type of a gate PowerLogic keeps track of these changes and fills in the gaps when a new gate is added PowerLogic Uses Guide A Design Toolbox Using Alphanumeric Prefixes You can use any combination of letters and numbers in PowerLogic to define a reference designator pre
158. ently See the Visual Basic Scripting topic in the OLE in PowerLogic chapter for more information Macros Opens the Macro dialog box Window Menu Menu Bar Turns the menu bar display on and off Ctrl Alt M also toggles the menu display Toolbars Turns the toolbar display on and off Status Bar Turns the message line display at the bottom of the screen on and off Drafting Toolbox Turns the Drafting toolbox display on or off Design Toolbox Turns the Design toolbox display on or off Bus Toolbox Turns the Bus toolbox display on or off Status Turns the Status Window display on and off PowerLogic User s Guide 1 11 Toolbars and Toolboxes Help Menu Contents Displays the On line Help Contents page Search Starts the keyword search utility for PowerLogic s On line Help How To Use Displays instructions for using Help Modeless Commands Opens the On line Help Modeless Commands topic Frequently Asked Questions Opens the On line Help Frequently Asked Questions topic About Displays PowerLogic version and user information Toolbars and Toolboxes Toolbars PowerLogic has two available toolbars the Standard toolbar and the Object Selector toolbar The Standard toolbar is the row of icons under the menu bar This toolbar changes when you invoke or exit the Part Editor The Object Selector toolbar appears at the bottom of the PowerLogic main window just above the Sta
159. er options To open the dialog box choose Advanced in the Photo Plotter Setup dialog box Number of Digits Coordinates Leading Trailing Absolute g m C Incremental Cancel Zero Suppress p Circular Interpolation E Help C None Leading C Trailing E None C Quadrant C Full r Plotting Size Inches J aj ef cf offe Other gt gt 940 Ae a aof others TY Senes Repeated Coords PowerLogic User s Guide 11 9 Print Plot Operations Units Area Defines the measurement value English For mils Metric For millimeters Number of Digits Area Defines the output file coordinate precision You can specify the number of digits before Leading and after Trailing the decimal point Coordinates Area Defines the output file coordinate type Absolute Specifies absolute coordinates Incremental Specifies relative coordinates Zero Suppress Area Defines the output file coordinate format None Retains both leading and trailing zeros Leading Suppresses leading zeros Trailing Suppresses trailing zeros Circular Interpolation Area Defines how to draw arcs and circles None Choose None if your photoplotter does not support circular interpolation to draw arcs and circles as small straight line segments Quadrant Choose Quadrant if your photoplotter does not support full 360 degree circular interpolation Full Choose Full if your photopl
160. erations See the Displaying Groups During Move or Copy topic in this chapter for more information Displaying Groups During Move or Copy When moving or copying a group in addition to displaying the group outline PowerLogic continually redraws and displays the outline of each part and connection in the group Use Erase Group and Draw Group to control how group information is displayed Erase Group Use Erase Group to display only the group s outline This increases performance when moving or copying larger group In addition not having all connection lines attached to the cursor makes target areas easier to locate To display only the group outline While moving a group choose Erase Group from the pop up menu The outline of the group attaches to the cursor at the group s origin Draw Group Use Draw Group to return to normal display dynamically attach and display all connections and part outlines in the group during move or copy operations While moving a group choose Draw Group from the pop up menu Note Display settings established with Erase Group and Draw Group remain in affect until you change them Deleting a Group When deleting a group the portions of connections in the group that are outside the boundary of the group are retained with an automatically assigned off page symbol Unnamed connections will be named uniquely with a net name of the form xxxx After defining a group choose Delete from the
161. erb modes are available e When a single Gate is selected all Verb modes are available e When more than one Gate or Part is selected Delete mode only is available e When more than one Gate of a Multigate Part is selected Copy and Move modes are not available e When a Net s or Pin s or a combination of different objects like Parts and Pins is selected no Verb modes are available PowerLogic User s Guide 4 21 Group Operations Group Operations A group is a collection of parts connections drafting objects and free text Once a group is created it can be moved copied deleted or saved to file for use in another design Before creating a group you must place PowerLogic in Group Select mode using one of three methods e Choose the Group icon from the Object Selector toolbar e Choose Edit Filter Select Group e With no objects selected choose Select Group from the pop up menu To define a new group x 1 Enter Group Select mode 2 Use the left mouse button to drag a rectangle around the objects that define the group The included objects are highlighted Before using or saving a group you can enhance it as described in the following sections Setting a New Origin for the Group To set a new origin or insertion point for the group 1 Click the right mouse button to display the pop up menu 2 Choose Set Origin A bullseye attaches to the cursor 3 Move the cursor and select a new origin with the left mouse
162. es only modify the values for the current schematic not the part type in the library To change the part type in the library you must modify it using the Part Editor Preferences x Global Design Heights widths Text Text Area Lists the different text height and width settings for all occurrences of net names pin numbers pin names reference designators part type names attributes and free text items As you add or modify text strings for these items new entries are added to the Type column You can change a height or width setting in the Text multicolumn list box and update all text strings that use those values Height The character height Type a value in the range 10 1000 Width Specifies the line width of the character font Type a value in the range 1 50 The text height definition defines the total distance from the top of capital letters to the bottom of lowercase letters such as y The font allocates 25 of the text height to the lower portion of the letter therefore an uppercase character with a value of 100 mils is actually 75 mils high Lines Area Sets the line width for connections busses and the lines within logic symbols and 2D items Type a value between 1 and 250 for connections and busses You can set multiple widths for decals and 2D items Type a value between 1 and 250 for decals and 2D items PowerLogic User s Guide 3 6 Setting Colors Setting Colors To open the Setup Color
163. et Numbers Separators Sets the open and close characters that enclose sheet numbers Type characters such as uotes and curly or straight brackets q y 8 Show Off Page Sheet Numbers Displays sheet reference numbers adjacent to off page reference symbols and bus names Numbers per Line Sets how many sheet numbers display per line when Show Off Page Sheet Numbers is on The sheet numbers display on a line below the net name Type a value between 0 and 99 Depending on the value you specify you can stack or line up the sheet number references Tie Dot Diameter Sets the diameter of tie dots Type a value between 0 and 100 Bus Angle Offset Defines the starting point distance from the bus for the bus tap The bus tap joins connections to the bus Type a value between 0 and 250 Preserve Reference Designators on Paste Uses a group s current reference designator assignments when possible See the Preserving Reference Designators topic in the Design Operations chapter for more information Turn this option off to assign reference designators in the pasted group the first or next available number PowerLogic User s Guide 3 5 Setting Preferences Heights Widths Tab The Heights Widths tab specifies the height and or width of text characters and lines When you change text or line size PowerLogic modifies all entries objects in the schematic with the new values Changes you make to symbol text and decal line siz
164. etup dialog box to define electrical layers and associate component and documentation layers Choose Setup Layer Definition to open the dialog box The first lines are reserved for electrical layers Electrical layers are all layers between and including the top and bottom layers You can add and edit traces and vias on these layers To add the inner electrical layers use the Increase button in the Electrical Layers area Layers below the bottom layer on the list are nonelectrical or documentation layers Layers Setup x Lev Type Dir Name 2 CM V Bottom 3 GN Layer 3 4 GN Layer 4 Cancel 5 GN Layer_5 6 GN Layer_6 7 GN Layer 7 Help 8 GN Layer8 zi Name Top Electrical Layer Type Component C Routing Plane Type Routing Direction No Plane Horizontal C CAM Plane C Vertical C Mixed Plane C Any Electrical Layers 1 Count 2 Increase Reassign Thickness List Area Displays the layer name type and routing direction for each assigned layer of the design in a list box Name Specifies a layer name that defines its function Type a descriptive layer name in the text box Electrical Layer Type The Top and Bottom layers can be component routing plane or split mixed plane layers Inner layers can be routing plane or split mixed plane When a layer is selected as a plane or split mixed plane layer use the Assign Nets icon to assign which nets to conn
165. ew Hierarchy Add Connection Add Bus Add Text Add Line Item PowerLogic User s Guide Adds a new hierarchical symbol to the schematic Similar to choosing the New Hierarchical Symbol icon from the Design toolbox See the Design Operations chapter for more information Adds a connection to the schematic Similar to choosing the Add Connection icon from the Design toolbox See the Design Operations chapter for more information Adds a bus to the schematic Similar to choosing the Add Bus icon from the Bus toolbox See the Design Operations chapter for more information Adds a free text item to the schematic Similar to choosing the Add Text icon from the Drafting toolbox See the Drafting Operations chapter for more information Adds a 2D line item such as a polygon circle rectangle or path Also specifies the drafting angle for and adds arcs to polygons or paths Similar to choosing the Create 2D Line icon from the Drafting toolbox See the Drafting Operations chapter for more information 1 27 Pop Up Menus Attribute Opens the Query Modify Part Attributes dialog box See the Query Modify Part topic in the Design Operations chapter for information Cancel Closes the pop up menu without choosing a command Copy Places PowerLogic in Copy mode Not available when a single part or multiple gates are selected Copy to File Saves the group to a file for use in another design See Group Oper
166. f 37 characters You can use the first 32 characters for the textual portion of the name the remaining five are reserved for the numeric portion Creating a Top down Hierarchy In top down design you create a hierarchical symbol sheet without an underlying logic definition Pin names tie together signals between hierarchical levels PowerLogic ties together all instances of a common signal name regardless of where they are found in the design into a single connection net You establish connectivity across the hierarchy by using the same signal name in the underlying logic If you use a top down approach for hierarchy you must ensure that the off page signals in the underlying schematic are consistent with the pin names in the hierarchical symbol 1 Choose the Design Toolbox icon from the toolbar See the Design Toolbox topic in this chapter for more information 2 amp l 2 Choose the New Hierarchical Symbol icon from the Design toolbox The Hierarchical Symbol Wizard dialog box appears Choose New Sheet in the Sheet Number drop down list box Type the symbol name in the Sheet Name text box 5 Choose the Pin Decal for both input and output pins from the appropriate drop down list box 6 Specify the Pin Count for both input and output pins Once you specify the pin details you can optionally choose Preview to display the symbol outline PowerLogic User s Guide 4 10 Design Toolbox 7 Choose OK The hierarchical symbol
167. f the PowerLogic work area OLE Receive Selections Enables PowerLogic to automatically locate the item corresponding to the PowerPCB selection When this check box is off items are not listed in the Received Selection list box OLE Connect Disconnect This button changes depending on whether you are currently connected to PowerPCB Connect Behaves exactly like choosing Tools OLE PowerPCB Connection See the OLE PowerPCB Connection topic for more information Disconnect Disconnects from PowerPCB The Disconnect from PowerPCB message appears before disconnecting Choose OK to disconnect OLE Send Tab The Send tab manages the selections to send to PowerPCB erPCB Connection Receive Send Design Document Preferences Sent Selection Selection Filter E Component Bin Net Disconnect Close Help PowerLogic User s Guide 9 14 OLE PowerPCB Connection OLE Sent Selection Contains a list of items selected in PowerLogic Items are listed in the order in which they are selected OLE Selection Filter Contains the Component Pin and Net check boxes Turn a check box on to allow selection of these items in PowerLogic and send selections of these items to PowerPCB OLE Design Tab The OLE Design tab provides automatic methods of performing many cross probing actions OLE PowerPCB Connection Receive Send Design Document Preferences Compare PCB Rules To PCB Send Netlist
168. fix You specify this prefix in the General tab of the Part information dialog box when you create a part If you specify a reference designator prefix that contains alphanumeric characters PowerLogic maintains this prefix for multigate parts A prefix of U1A for a part containing four gates when added to a design would use reference designator assignments U1A A U1A B U1A C and U1A D Adding Connector Pins Connector pins are special symbols within PowerLogic libraries You add them like multigate parts whereby the pin number increments each time you add a connector symbol PowerLogic does not increment the reference designator until you use all the connector pins After adding one or more pins of a connector and establishing a reference designator use Copy mode to add additional pins This causes PowerLogic to use the same reference designator for new pins Using Alternate Symbols Some parts can appear in the schematic with more than one representation One example of this is the Nand gate with its DeMorgan representation A second example is the use of IEEE and ANSII symbol standards Within PowerLogic s library you can define one primary and three alternate symbols for a part While placing parts in the schematic use the Alternate command to select the version you want to use in the schematic You can also use power symbols ground symbols and off page reference symbols as alternate symbols When you add a new part or copy an ex
169. for more information Edit Loads the macro file in the text editor that you chose during PowerLogic installation to view or manually edit the macro file If you chose Notepad as the default text editor longer macro files may not load because of size constraints in Notepad Accessing large files via the Edit function requires that you install an ASCII text editor with a suitable file size capacity modify the GENERAL section of the pwrlogic ini file and specify a new text editor executable name Include the drive and directory if the new editor is not in your Windows directory Note Editing the macro file or pwrlogic ini is an advanced operation generally you should not edit macro files because you can access all macro operations through the Macro dialog box Macro Name Displays the new macro name Macro Name also displays any macros created for the open macro file If a description of the macro was entered during creation it appears directly below the Macro Name list box when the macro is highlighted Any assigned shortcut keys appear next to this list box Run Starts an existing macro First highlight the macro from the Macro Name list box You can repeat a macro a specified number of times by entering the number in the Repeat Count text box located to the right of the Run button See the Macro Playback topic in this chapter for more information on starting macros Repeat Count Starts the highlighted macro a specifie
170. for more information Record Prompt mode Records prompt windows that are encountered in a macro See the Record Prompt Mode topic in this chapter for more information Coordinate mode Records mouse coordinates See the Coordinate Mode topic in this chapter for more information 5 Choose OK to record the macro The Record Mode toolbox appears PAREZ PowerLogic User s Guide 3 14 The Macro Recorder 6 Perform the sequence of steps you want to record You can choose the Pause icon from the Record Mode toolbox to create a pause during playback When the macro pauses during playback a dialog box with a standard message appears You can edit the macro file if you want to change the message la 7 Choose the Stop icon from the Record Mode toolbox to stop recording The macro is automatically saved to your open macro file You return to the Macro dialog box 8 Define a shortcut key See the Assigning Shortcut Keys topic in this chapter for more information 9 Turn Add to Menu on if you want to add the macro name to the Tools menu See the Assigning Shortcut Keys topic in this chapter for more information Note Before you can add a macro to the menu you must first assign a shortcut key Compress Mouse Mode The Compress Mouse Mode icon sets whether mouse movements are recorded or compressed Compression is recommended under most circumstances because it significantly reduces the size of your macro file R
171. fting object Query Modify Drafting Object Use the Query Modify Drafting dialog box to modify the line width style and orientation of selected drafting objects Note Use the Drafting toolbox to modify the shape of 2D lines o 1 Choose the Query Modify icon from the toolbar 2 Select the drafting object to modify 3 Modify the drafting object then choose OK Width Tv Filled Style Solid Dotted C Mirror by E Rotation o zd MirorbyY O OK Cancel Help Width The current line width of the selected drafting object Type the new line width of the drafting object Use Height Width tab in the Preferences dialog box to change the default line width PowerLogic User s Guide 8 9 Query Modify Filled Creates a filled shape from a selected polygon This option is grayed if you used Pull Arc to modify the polygon This option is grayed and for all other drafting shapes Style Displays the current line style of the selected drafting object Choose an option button for a different line style Choose from Solid or Dotted Rotation Displays the current rotation value of the selected drafting object Rotation can be 0 or 90 degrees Type a new value or use the arrows to change the degree of rotation Mirror by X Y Mirrors the selected drafting object in the X horizontal or Y vertical direction The point used when selecting the object is the also the point of rotation PowerL
172. g a New Connector topic in this chapter for more information CAE Decal Creates or modifies new CAE decal See the Get Gate Decal from Library topic in this chapter for more information Pin Decal Creates or modifies a pin decal the information and appearance of a terminal pin A number of different pin decals are provided PowerLogic User s Guide 7 27 Creating New Parts from Existing Parts Off Page Modifies off page reference symbols PowerLogic allows only one part definition in the library for off page reference symbols This option grays when you choose File New Modify existing symbols and or add new symbols See the Special Symbols topic in this chapter for more information Power Modifies existing off page reference symbols PowerLogic allows only one part definition in the library for power symbols This option grays when you choose File New Modify existing symbols and or add new symbols See the Special Symbols topic in this chapter for more information Ground Modifies an existing off page reference symbol PowerLogic allows only one part definition in the library for ground symbols so this option grays when you choose File New from the menu You can modify the existing symbols and or add new symbols See the Special Symbols topic in this chapter for more information Creating a New Connector Connectors differ from other parts because a connector is typically represented as a number of individual pin
173. g an object Group operations are the only commands that let you choose the objects first PowerLogic is in Verb mode whenever you choose one of the toolbar icons For example to move a part choose the Move Mode icon and then select the object to move Units of measure are in mils unless stated otherwise The minimum PowerLogic database unit is 2 mils The maximum size of a schematic is 54 by 54 inches PowerLogic User s Guide xvii Conventions Documentation Conventions Typographical Guidelines Bold Italic Courier Indicates characters that you must type exactly as they appear Indicates messages from PowerLogic variables that you must specify new terms and book titles Indicates output from PowerLogic or the contents of a file Mouse and Keyboard Actions Double click Select Indicate Choose Drag Type Enter Press PowerLogic User s Guide To position the cursor on an item and rapidly press and release the left mouse button twice To highlight or target a design or text object for the next command execution Position the cursor on a design or text object and click the left mouse button Selecting alone does not start a command or action refer to Verb mode To specify a point of a design object during its creation or modification Position the cursor at the appropriate location and click the left mouse button Move the cursor and repeat as necessary To pick a menu command icon or dia
174. g paths tie dots off page flags Rules Clearance routing and others specified in Design Rules Output Format The Output Format area contains option buttons for specifying output in PowerLogic 1 2 and PowerLogic 3 0 Filename Displays the current path and ASCII filename PowerLogic User s Guide 2 4 Creating a Netlist ASCII File Format The ASCII format files for PowerLogic and PADS Logic V4 0 are organized into sections beginning with a keyword enclosed with an asterisk The first section starts with SCH and gives the system set up parameters for the circuit The second section starting with CAM lists the default settings for the plot and printing outputs Following this all of the data for each sheet is grouped together in the SHT section This data starts with CAE listing the window zoom setting and cursor location for the sheet Other sections are TXT Free text items in the sheet LINES 2D line items including library entry CAEDECAL Description of the CAE symbol decals for all parts in the sheet PARTTYPE Description of the part types that appear in the sheet PART List of all parts including their attributes that appear in the sheet Gates and connector pins are each listed separately BUSSES Description of busses in the sheet including the bus name and location OFFPAGE REFS List of all off page flags in the sheet This includes power and ground symbols and bus connections
175. ge to edge clearances between two object types To define the minimum spacing between any two objects type the value in the appropriate text box To define the same spacing value for all text boxes in one matrix column press the button above the column Type a value and choose OK To define the same spacing value for all text boxes in one matrix row press the button in the left column Type a value and choose OK To define the same spacing value for all text boxes in the matrix press the All button Type a value and choose OK Delete Removes a set of Clearance rules from your rules hierarchy You cannot delete the Default Clearance rules Routing Rules Use the Routing Rules dialog box to define how to interactively and automatically ra connect nets To open the Routing Rules dialog box 1 Choose Setup Design Rules The Rules dialog box appears 2 Choose the Default Class or Net icon The appropriate dialog box appears PowerLogic User s Guide 10 12 Setting Design Rules 3 Choose the Routing icon The Routing Rules dialog box appears A dialog box subtitle states the set of rules for which you are setting Routing rules Default Class or Net r Length Minimization Routing Options j OK C None I Copper Sharing C Total Length Iv Auto Route 2 Horizontal IV Allow Ripup C Vertical AU C Serial Source TM UOS Parallel Source Neo a el C Middiven mew P s im r Layer Biasing 1 Av
176. ground color of an OLE object 1 Select the OLE object 2 Choose White Background from the pop up menu to change the background color A check next to the command indicates that the object will use a white background Selecting OLE Objects Select and manage OLE linked or embedded objects just like you manage non text Word items Click on the OLE object to select it Some limitations exist for selecting OLE objects e You cannot select more than one OLE object at a time e You cannot use area select to select OLE objects e Commands apply to selected OLE objects only even if you also select PowerLogic objects OLE objects have selection priority over PowerLogic components Note To select PowerLogic items under an OLE object move the OLE object When you select an OLE object e A pop up menu is available that lists all commands that you can apply to the OLE object Click the right mouse button when the object is selected to open the pop up menu e The object is selected just as a non text object in Word is selected using a rectangular area with sizing handles to indicate that it is selected OLE objects do not use the PowerLogic method of highlighting to indicate selection state PowerLogic User s Guide 9 7 Moving and Sizing OLE Objects Moving and Sizing OLE Objects Move and resize OLE linked or embedded objects just as you resize non text objects in Word To move an OLE object 1 Select the object 2 Click
177. he current library directory is updated to contain the new attribute Close Exits the Library Manager PowerLogic User s Guide 6 2 Library Manager Edit Operations Use the controls in the Edit section to view and modify objects in the library 1 Choose the appropriate button to select which types of objects to access decals part types lines or CAE decals The Part Types list box contains the names of all objects of that type in the current library 2 Use the Filter to limit the items that appear in the list box See the Search Filter topic in this chapter for more information 3 Use one of the command buttons described below for the selected objects Note When you select an object its picture appears above the Part Types list box Parts are drawn using the first assigned decal New Creates a new object You must provide a name for the object For Decals the currently assigned PCB decal appears The New and Edit buttons gray You can only copy or delete the decal Use the Library Manager in the PCB design program to modify the PCB decal For Parts the Part Information dialog box appears See the Part Information for Part topic in the Part Editor Operations chapter for more information For Lines any 2D drafting items appear for example drawing formats title blocks etc The New and Edit buttons gray You can only copy or delete the drafting items To add new drafting items to the library create and comb
178. he Rules dialog box Layer Definition Opens the Layers Setup dialog box Display Colors Opens the Display Colors dialog box PowerLogic User s Guide 1 9 Menu Commands Tools Menu Part Editor Starts the Part Editor disabling the PowerLogic Schematic Editor Attribute Manager Displays the Manage Schematic Attributes dialog box where you can list the attribute names in your schematic and to add an attribute to rename an attribute in or delete an attribute from the schematic See the Library Operations chapter for more information Update OffPage from Library Opens the Update Off Page from Library dialog box Update Pins from Library Opens the Update Pins from Library dialog box Save OffPage to Library Opens the Save Off Page to Library dialog box Netlist to PCB Opens the Netlist dialog box Forward ECO to PCB Opens the Forward ECO to PCB dialog box Backward Annotate from PCB Opens the Backward Annotate from PCB dialog box Export Rules to PCB Opens the Export Rules to PCB ASCII File dialog box Import Rules from PCB Opens the Import Rules from PCB ASCII File dialog box PowerLogic User s Guide 1 10 Menu Commands OLE PowerPCB Connection Opens the Connect to PowerPCB dialog box Visual Basic Scripting Opens the Visual Basic Editor and Visual Basic Scripts dialog boxes where you can develop Visual Basic scripts or load your most frequently used scripts and run them independ
179. he different outputs you can create from your schematic in PowerLogic You can print plot and create reports of your schematic This chapter includes information on setting up your printing or plotting device previewing the output and creating the output Most topics in this chapter are related to both printing and plotting except where noted The topics in this chpater include Print Plot Operations Creating Reports Print Plot Operations Use the Print Plot command on the File menu to setup and print your schematic To print or plot 1 Choose File Print Plot The Plot dialog box appears Use the Print Plot dialog box to produce laser printouts line plots and photoplot outputs 2 Select the sheets and the items to plot by choosing the Sheets icon See the Select Items topic in this chapter for more information Choose Preview Selections to preview the layer and items selections you made Define plot options by choosing the Options icon See the Plot Options topic in this chapter for more information 5 Setup the output device you want to use by choosing the icon for the device and choosing Device Setup Choose from Printer Pen Plotter or Photoplotter D Lx Summary Numbered sheets 13 etd Close Items Connections Buses Lines Text Parts RefDes PartT ype PartT ext PinNums NetNames HierComps Customize Plot Dutput Device 23 s Sheets Options Print Pen Photo File Prefix
180. he existing naming conventions used If the symbol already exists a In the Special Symbol column choose the icon to the right of the newly created text box The Browse for Special Symbol dialog box appears b Setthe filter for an existing symbol for example REF c Choose a symbol decal d Choose OK Select the text box under Pin Type Choose Edit Choose a pin type from the drop down list box For left side off page references choose Source for right side off page references choose Load Choose OK Assign Alternatives for Power Part Use the Assign Alternatives for Power Part dialog box to assign or create additional power symbols To open this dialog box 1 A 3 4 5 Choose Tools Part Editor Choose File Open The Select Type of Editing Item dialog box appears Choose Power Choose OK The current symbols appear Choose Edit Electrical or choose the Edit Electrical icon from the toolbar Assign Alternatives for Power Part x Picture Special Symbol PowerLogic User s Guide 7 42 Special Symbols To add a new power symbol 1 2 SD Vo o Choose Add This creates a new entry for the symbol Type a name for the new symbol Note existing naming conventions If the symbol already exists a In the Special Symbol column choose the icon to the right of the newly created text box The Browse for Special Symbol dialog box appears b Set the filter for an existing symbol for exampl
181. he net to be split into two separate nets Net Name Displays the net name You can also type a new net name The new net name is placed at the end of the connection Use Move mode to adjust the placement of the net name text Statistics Displays connection information for the selected net in the default text editor This Instance Applies the new net name to the selected connection Note Selecting This Instance splits the net into two separate nets PowerLogic User s Guide 4 33 Query Modify All Instances Applies the new net name to all instances of this connection Query Modify Bus Name Use Query Modify mode to change the name of a bus o 1 Choose the Query Modify icon from the toolbar 2 Select a bus name or bus segment 3 Enter a new prefix name for the bus or choose a name from the drop down list box 4 Choose OK If specified the new bit range nn mm must be equal to or greater than the old bit range The signals attached to the bus will keep their old bit number but take the new name Note Renaming a bus name will split the selected bus and its associated net names from other busses with the same name Use the S modeless command to locate other bus names if they need to be updated See the Modeless Commands topic in the PowerLogic s Graphical User Interface chapter for more information Query Hierarchical Component When created and added to an existing sheet you cannot access hier
182. he original file linked OLE objects automatically update If you do not choose to link files OLE objects are embedded and do not reflect any updates you make to the original file Display As Icon Displays the inserted OLE object as an icon Leave this option off to display an entire object For example to display an actual Word document instead of a Word icon If the object s source application is not registered on your system then objects can only be displayed as icons Result Displays the results of the selected options Change Icon Changes the icon that represents the OLE object using the Change Icon dialog box MVA Change Icon L2 1x o or i Current ga Cancel C Default pm Browse C From File C CORELS0 PROGRAMS COREL Fl is gt Corel PHOTO PAINT 5 0 Image Label Corel PHOTO PAINT 5 0 Image Current Uses the current icon assignment for the application as the OLE object icon Default Uses the default icon assignment for the application as the OLE object icon PowerLogic User s Guide 9 5 Displaying OLE Objects From File Displays the name of the file that contains the icons that appear in the Icon List below Use Browse to choose a file that contains the icons you want to use to represent the OLE linked or embedded object Once you locate the file choose the icon to use from the list below The icon you choose appears to the right of the From File area Icon List
183. heet number appearing next to an off page reference allows by default 5 sheet numbers to be listed in a single text string separated by commas Use Query Modify mode to edit the number of off page symbol sheet numbers per line For example if set to one and there are two sheets containing the same net the sheets will be listed in two lines i9 1 Choose the Query Modify icon from the toolbar 2 Select the off page reference text string This displays an information dialog box 3 Change the settings for sheet numbers per line 4 Choose OK See the Design Tab topic in the Design Setup and Editing chapter for information on setting the default sheets per line and controlling the display of sheet numbers on off page reference symbols PowerLogic User s Guide 4 35 Query Modify PowerLogic User s Guide 4 36 p sa Chapter 5 Y Working With Attributes This chapter discusses using attributes in PowerLogic including the different points at which you can create attributes and using attribute labels The topics in this chapter include Attributes Attributes Creating New Attributes in a Schematic Managing Attributes in a Schematic Using Attribute Labels Attributes allow you to associate information with a schematic symbol Attributes are made of two parts an attribute name and its corresponding value For example you can create an attribute named Part Description and assign it a value of Hex Inverter You can creat
184. his Agreement except with the prior written consent of PADS or v export or re export the licensed Products or related documentation without all appropriate United States and foreign government licenses and approvals 7 LIMITED WARRANTY 7 1 Software If PADS confirms a defect reported by Licensee in the unaltered Software PADS shall use commercially reasonable efforts to provide a remedy PADS does not warrant that the operation of any of the Licensed Products will be uninterrupted or error free nor does it guarantee that its remedial efforts will correct a found defect 7 2 Media and Peripherals PADS warrants to the original licensees of each of its software Products that the media on which the program is recorded shall be free from defects in materials or manufacture under normal use for the standard period of 30 days from delivery Products found to have a defect in their media will be replaced by PADS at no charge to the customer if returned to either the dealer from which such program was obtained or to PADS at its principal office PADS Software Inc 165 Forest Street Marlborough MA 01752 U S A Returns must be postage prepaid and be accompanied by proof of the date of delivery If the defect results from accident abuse or mishandling however PADS will have no responsibility to replace the media EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PROVIDED ABOVE ALL PRODUCTS AND RELATED DOCUMENTATION ARE PROVIDE BY PADS AS IS AND NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND IN
185. his Gate Updates the selected gate This Part Updates a part or all associated gates of a part All Parts of this Type Updates all matching gates and or parts in the design Using Attribute Labels Attribute labels are placeholders for attributes within a CAE Decal When you add an attribute to a part it is placed in this reserved location PowerLogic lets you create an unlimited number of attribute labels See the Attributes topic in this chapter for more information on using attributes in PowerLogic Use attribute labels to customize attribute locations in the design You can create and place attribute labels so that when a part is added to a design assigned attributes are less likely to exist where a connection or other design information exists You can also specify a unique justification or orientation for the label Note If you add an attribute and do not have an available attribute label the attribute is added just below the insertion point of the part Additional attributes are added below the last one Attribute labels do not display in the Schematic Editor or the Part Editor You must be viewing a decal to view an attribute label Use Setup Colors to control the display of attribute labels when creating or edit a decal You can create an attribute label with a specific name one that matches the actual attribute s name This makes placement of specific attribute information easier You can also use a generic attribute la
186. horized uses and copying of the Licensed Products are prohibited by law including United States and foreign copyright law The price paid by the Customer for the Licensed Products constitutes a license fee that entitles the Customer to use the Licensed Products as set forth below 1 LICENSE COVERAGE PADS hereby grants the Customer a non exclusive right to use the Software Products provided by PADS at the Designated Location whether on a single computer or on a network within the constraints of the original network license configuration The Customer may physically transfer the licensed Products from one computer to another at the same Designated Location The addition of any networked computers beyond that specified without notice and payment to PADS shall breach this agreement The rights granted to the Customer do not include the right to copy Licensed Products except to create a backup copy and do not include any right to access use or modify the source code of the licensed Products for any purpose 2 TITLE AND OWNERSHIP All intellectual property and proprietary rights for the licensed Products and related documentation shall at all times remain the sole and exclusive property of PADS and or the relevant third parties 3 TRANSFERABILITY The rights granted to the Customer under this Agreement are non transferable without the prior written consent of PADS Any attempted assignment or other transfer shall be null and void and PADS rese
187. ibrary Manager dialog box Report Opens the Reports dialog box Print Setup Accesses the Windows Print Setup dialog box Print Plot Opens the Print Plot dialog box Exit Exits PowerLogic If data exists a warning window appears to confirm the action Loaded File List Lists the last loaded files up to four at the bottom of the File menu Edit Menu Undo Rescinds the last editing action such as move delete swap add connection create 2D line and others PowerLogic User s Guide 15 Menu Commands Redo Repeats the last editing action made prior to an undo action Cut Removes a group from the design and places the group into a temporary grp file PowerLogic adds an off page reference symbol at the break point for connections that extend outside the group Copy Copies a group into a temporary grp file PowerLogic adds an off page reference symbol at the break point for connections that extend outside the group Paste Places the contents of the temporary grp file where you indicate Also you can close the design and open a different design to paste into You can repeatedly paste the contents of the temporary grp file until you overwrite the buffer with another cut or copy action Copy As Bitmap Lets you define a rectangular area to copy graphics information to the Windows Clipboard as a bitmap image Once copied you can for example switch to Microsoft Word and use the Edit Paste command to
188. ic in this chapter for more information if Change Changes the sequence for pins in the part The Sequence pin sequence number is used to set a Number corresponding number for the pins in alternate CAE decals See the Changing Sequence Numbers topic in this chapter for more information Adding Terminals Use Add Terminal from the Terminal toolbox to add a connection pin to the part A terminal consists of a pin decal and a series of text strings that define the terminal s number swap data etc To add a new terminal 1 Choose the Add Terminal icon from the Terminal toolbox The Pin Decal Browse dialog box appears Pin Decal Browse x Picture The Pins area lists all terminal pins The selected pin appears in the Picture area 2 Choose a decal then choose OK The pin decal attaches to the cursor 3 Move the cursor and click the left mouse button to anchor the pin Before placing the terminal you can use the pop up menu to modify the orientation of the terminal and modify terminal information including the pin number pin name pin type and swap class After you place a terminal a new identical terminal attaches to the cursor for placement Pin numbers or pin names automatically increment to the next number and name for the new terminal Pin type and swap class values copy to the new terminal Optionally you can add multiple copies of the terminal after the initial terminal location is indicated Choose Step an
189. ic Pins Connector Unused Pins 3 si Add gt gt lt lt Remove Signal Name To assign a signal name to a previously unassigned pin 1 Select the pin in the Unused Pins list box 2 Choose Add The pin moves to the Pin Signal Name list box 3 Type the signal name in the Signal Name text box To modify a signal name 1 Select the pin in the Pin Signal Name list box 2 Type a new signal name or Width in the appropriate text box Unused Pins Lists all pins that are neither assigned to gates nor have signal name assignments PowerLogic User s Guide 7 21 Part Information for Part Signal Pins Multicolumn List Box Lists information about the signal pins assigned to the part Pin Lists the signal pins assigned to the part Signal Name Lists the signal name for the pins When editing the Signal Name you can assign signal names to newly added pins or change the signal name for an existing pin assignment Width Lists the signal width The default signal width for pins is based on the rules that you specify in the Design Rules dialog box however for backward compatibility with PADS Perform and PADS Work you can assign a default signal width to pins and store it in the library Double click on the entry to edit or select the entry and choose Edit You can then type the new value in the text box Add Adds a pin to the part Select the pin to add from the Unused Pin list box and choose Add
190. ic ini file to a temporary name such as pwrini sav Rename next ini to powerlogic ini Start PowerLogic Choose Tools Macros choose Open and change the file type to log pM aps eR peut ies Locate the log file you want to run and choose Run When you finish analyzing a recorded session remember to restore the original pwrlogic ini the one you renamed in Step 1 Submitting a log File to PADS Whenever you submit a problem to PADS Technical Support it is useful to submit a copy of the next log and next ini files that reproduce the problem Also include the design file so Technical Support can accurately reproduce the anomaly PowerLogic User s Guide 3 18 Y Chapter 4 Design Operations This chapter discusses general design operations from adding and editing parts creating and modifying hierarchical symbols and adding connections to setting up sheets This chapter also discusses the many different editing modes available to you in PowerLogic The topics in this chapter include Starting a New Design Design Toolbox Bus Toolbox Sheets Modes of Operation Group Operations Cut Copy and Paste Query Modify Starting a New Design When you start PowerLogic or choose File New from the menu a drawing format is automatically added to the work area See the Design Tab topic in the Design Setup chapter for information on changing the default drawing format Also use Preferences to set the default working grid disp
191. ic pin name Initially PowerPCB assigns the pin number as the pin name You cannot edit the pin number Name Lists the name associated with the decal pin number To edit the name double click on the Name entry or select the entry and choose Edit Type a new name in the text box Connector Tab This tab is only enabled when you open an existing connector or are creating a new connector Use this tab to define the alternate Logic decals to display in a schematic Decals are referred to as Special Symbols You can associate a logical Pin Type with each alternate so that you can have a graphical indication of the connector pin function in the schematic Most users like to use a different symbol or decal to distinguish between input Source and output Load pins You may define multiple symbols for each of the ten different pin types Part Information for Part SW G9P x General PCB Decals Gates Sianal Fins Attributes iohannes Pins Connector Reset Picture Special Symbol Pin Type Edit CONIN Source CONOUT Load Add ICONINT se Source Lem CONOUT1 Load Delete CON IO Terminator DK Cancel Save As Help PowerLogic User s Guide 7 25 Creating New Parts from Existing Parts Connector Multicolumn List Box Use this multicolumn list box to define Special Symbols or connector decals for different pin types in the part Special Symbol Lists the Special Symbols
192. ide 10 1 Setting Design Rules Default Opens the Default Rules dialog box where you set Default rules See the Default Rules topic in this chapter for more information Class Opens the Class Rules dialog box where you set Class rules See the Class Rules topic in this chapter for more information Net Opens the Net Rules dialog box where you set Net rules See the Net Rules topic in this chapter for more information Conditional Rules Opens the Conditional Rules dialog box where you set Conditional rules See the Conditional Rules topic in this chapter for more information Differential Pairs Opens the Differential Pairs dialog box where you set rules for Differential Pairs See the Differential Pairs topic in this chapter for more information Report Opens the Rules Report dialog box where you can create reports of your different rule settings See the Rules Report topic in this chapter for more information Units Indicates the unit of measure for passing rules to PowerPCB mils metric or inches Rules Hierarchy In the rules hierarchy certain rules have precedence over other rules in the hierarchical rules order For example a net rule overrides a class rule and a class rule overrides a default rule Default Rules which apply to an object if there are no other individually defined rules Class Rules for a collection of nets called a class which need identical rules Net Rules for a specific
193. ign decals for the connector See the Assign Alternatives for Connector topic in this chapter for more information Choose OK Choose the Attribute icon from the Part Information dialog box to assign attribute information Choose File Save As Type a name and library directory location Choose OK Choose File Exit Part Editor Assign Alternatives for Connector Use the Assign Alternatives for Connectors dialog box to assign pin decals for a connector To add a new CAE decal to a connector gt 1 2 yo OND Nono 11 Choose the Pin Decals icon from the Part Information dialog box Choose Add Type a name for the decal in newly created text box in the Special Symbol column or choose the icon to the right of the new text box The Browse for Special Symbol dialog box appears Set the filter to search for decals beginning with CON for example CON Choose a decal Choose OK Select the text box under Pin Type Choose Edit Choose a pin type from the drop down list box Choose OK Repeat steps 2 through 9 for any other decals Specify a connector for the left and right side for example use CONIN and CONOUT Choose OK Browse for Special Symbols Use the Browse for Special Symbol dialog box to access the special symbols provided with the PowerLogic library Special symbols create off page reference symbols power symbols ground symbols and connectors See the Special Symbols topic in this chapter for m
194. in the order in which they are listed beginning with the first library in the list Add Adds a new library to the search list When you choose Add the Add Library dialog box appears Choose a library to open The library is added to the Library list immediately below the currently selected library If a library is not selected the new library is added to the bottom of the search list Remove Deletes the selected library from the Library list Up Moves the selected library up one position in the search order The libraries are searched in the order in which they are listed beginning with the first library in the list Down Moves the selected library down one position in the search order The libraries are searched in the order in which they are listed beginning with the first library in the list Line Items Available Allows use of line items Turn on this library option if the library contains Lines graphical data Shared Shares the library across a networked environment allowing more than one user to simultaneously access the library Turn on this library option if you want to share the library PowerLogic User s Guide 6 5 Managing Attributes in the Library Read Only Sets the library as read only Turn on this library option if you do not have permission to write to the library file Note The Read Only check box is always checked and grayed if the library files are set as Read Only in the Microsoft Window
195. in this chapter for more information PowerLogic User s Guide 5 1 Creating New Attributes in a Schematic After creating attributes use the visibility controls to display them in the schematic See the Query Modify Part Text Visibility topic in this chapter for more information You can create placeholders in CAE Decals so attributes are placed in predefined locations See the Using Attribute Labels topic in this chapter for more information When you add a part to a design using Add Part attributes defined in the part are added to the list of available attributes You can then use this attribute in other parts See the Managing Attributes in a Schematic topic in this chapter for more information Creating New Attributes in a Schematic To create a new attribute and automatically assign it to every part in a design 1 Choose Tools Attribute Manager The Manage Schematic Attributes dialog box appears Choose Add Attr The Add New Attribute dialog box appears Type a name for the attribute in the Attribute Name text box or Choose Browse Lib Attr to choose an attribute already defined in the library Choose an attribute name from this dialog box and then choose OK Optionally type a value for the attribute in the Attribute Value text box Choose Close to continue Manage Schematic Attributes Dialog Box Use the Manage Schematic Attributes dialog box to manage attributes at the schematic level You can create a new att
196. includes the reference designator name and pin number for all parts in the net PowerLogic flags possible errors for example nets with no inputs or no outputs nets with multiple outputs etc for further examination Use this report to locate possible errors in the schematic The format for the Net Statistics Report follows NET STATUS REPORT PADSPWR LOGICFILES filename SCH date tim net name SOURCES n LOADS m UNDEFINED x ref des pinnumber pin type sheet no ref des pinnumber pin type sheet no Error Messages The following error messages can occur Net bas only one pin a net going to an off page flag not connected elsewhere Net bas no defined source there is no pin in tbe net that bas a pin type of S Net bas no defined loads there is no pin in the net that has a pin type of L Net bas multiple sources be sure they are or tieable the net bas more than 1 pin with the pin type S Job Limits The Job Limits report indicates the maximum number of each PowerLogic data item parts nets text your system will allow as well as the current count of each of these items in the schematic This limit varies depending on the amount of virtual memory that is available The report has two parts The first is a list of items whose limits are common to the entire schematic The second is a count for each schematic sheet of the items whose limits apply for each sheet You should periodically run a Li
197. ine the items in PowerLogic then use the Save to Library icon from the Drafting toolbox See the Drafting Operations chapter for more information For CAE decals the Part Editor opens Edit Modifies an existing object For Decals the currently assigned PCB decal appears The New and Edit buttons gray You can only copy or delete the decal Use the Library Manager in the PCB design program to modify the PCB decal For Parts the Part Information dialog box appears See the Part Information for Part topic in the Part Editor Operations chapter for more information For Lines any 2D drafting items appear for example drawing formats title blocks etc The New and Edit buttons gray You can only copy or delete the drafting items To edit drafting items in the library use the Add from Library icon from the Drafting toolbox to add the object to PowerLogic Uncombine the object modify the object use Combine to combine the items and then use the Save to Library icon from the Drafting toolbox See the Drafting Operations chapter for more information For CAE decals the Part Editor opens PowerLogic User s Guide 6 3 Library Manager Delete Deletes selected objects You can select and delete multiple objects at the same time Copy Copies an existing object giving it a new name You cannot copy CAE decals Import Imports library data from a previously exported ASCIT file You must supply the filename Export
198. ing 1 17 object selector 1 14 4 22 standard 1 12 viewing 1 11 In 14 Toolboxes xix 1 12 1 17 bus 4 13 design toolbox 4 1 docking 1 17 drafting 7 34 8 1 floating 1 17 resizing 1 17 terminal 7 35 Tools menu 1 10 ToolTips 1 17 Trace width 10 11 Troubleshooting 3 18 frequently asked questions xxi 1 12 Two dimensional lines see 2D line txt file 2 3 U Undo 1 5 1 13 Units plotting 11 10 Unused gates and pins report 11 13 Unused pins net ignoring 9 17 managing 9 16 specifying the name of 9 17 Update off page from library 1 10 7 45 Update pins from library 1 10 7 45 Updating library parts 7 2 Updating linked and embedded OLE objects 9 9 9 10 V Verb mode 4 17 setting 1 31 Vias restricting use 10 14 PowerLogic User s Guie Index Views 1 19 capture 1 21 controlling 1 18 name 1 21 previous 1 21 restoring 1 21 saving 1 21 View menu 1 8 Visual Basic Editor 9 17 creating scripts 9 19 sample scripts 9 22 advanced 9 24 Sax Basic Engine 9 18 scripting 9 17 Visual Basic scripts 1 11 accessing 9 21 adding to a menu 9 21 creating 9 19 editing 9 21 loading 9 21 opening 9 19 running 9 21 samples 9 22 advanced 9 24 Visual editing OLE 9 2 9 10 W width dat 3 9 Window menu 1 11 Windows print manager 11 11 Work area 1 4 and grid settings 1 18 dimensions 1 18 XS m X Y coordinate location 11 16 uz Zero suppre
199. ing 3 13 Manage library attributes dialog box 6 7 Managing schematic attributes 5 2 Manually updating OLE links 9 10 mcr file 3 11 Media creating from previous session 1 1 Media directories 1 25 Media wizard 1 1 dialog box 1 24 Menu bar xix 1 3 viewing 1 11 Menu commands 1 1 1 4 Menus 1 3 pop up 1 27 Middle mouse button 1 19 PowerLogic User s Guide Index Mid driven nets 10 13 Minimization of nets 10 13 Modeless commands 1 1 1 12 1 22 Modes of operation 4 17 copy 4 18 delete 4 21 group select 4 17 move 4 20 object select 4 21 verb 4 17 Modifying 2D lines 8 1 8 5 attributes 5 1 5 4 busses 1 29 hierarchical symbols 4 12 library list order 6 4 line items 1 29 parts 1 29 Mouse actions defined xviii Mouse click substitutes modeless commands 1 23 Mouse compression mode 3 14 Move command 1 7 Moving bus segments 4 13 4 15 connections 4 20 groups 4 23 OLE objects 9 8 text 4 20 up hierarchical design 4 12 Move mode 4 20 Move mode icon 1 13 Multicolumn list box xix Multigate parts 4 4 creating 7 7 N Names for busses 4 14 Names for connections 4 8 Names for pins 7 18 Naming conventions for special symbols 7 45 Net assignments plane layers 10 21 Net filter 1 15 In 8 Net rules 10 2 10 6 clearance 10 6 high speed 10 6 report 10 10 routing 10 6 Net statistics report 11 14 error messages 11 14 Netlists comparison 9
200. insert the bitmap into a document To create a bitmap 1 Choose Edit Copy as Bitmap 2 Area select the objects to copy PowerLogic copies all items in the rectangle including the background dot grid color etc Open the application to place the bitmap and use the paste command to place the image Note In addition to generating a bitmap of the defined area PowerLogic copies the entire work area as a picture that you can insert with the Paste Special command in products that support this feature Copy to File Copies a group of selected objects to a file 1 In Autoselect mode group select the objects 2 Choose Edit Copy to File from the menu 3 Type a path and filename in the Group Save File dialog box Groups are saved into files with a grp extension Choose Save PowerLogic User s Guide 1 6 Menu Commands Paste from File Pastes the file contents into the current schematic 1 Choose Edit Paste from File from the menu 2 Choose the file in the Load Group File dialog box 3 Indicate the location 4 Choose Open Move Moves a group of selected objects 1 In Autoselect mode group select the objects 2 Choose Edit Move from the menu 3 Indicate the location Delete Deletes a group of selected objects 1 In Autoselect mode group select the objects 2 Choose Edit Delete from the menu 3 Confirm the deletion Group Copy Copies a group of selected objects 1 In Autoselect mode
201. ions are available when you choose a substrate layer from the Layer List This area grays when a copper laminate layer is selected Substrate or Prepreg Selects a substrate laminate pair or a prepreg sheet for the selected substrate layer Thickness Sets the Thickness of the selected substrate layer Dielectric Constant Sets the electrical characteristics for the selected substrate layer Plane Layer Net Assignments Plane layers contain large copper areas which components can access for ground and power PowerPCB produces thermal relief connection pads for nets associated with the plane layer Use the Layers Setup dialog box to define a layer as a plane layer and assign one or more net names to a plane layer You can also assign a net to more than one plane layer 1 Choose Setup Layer Definition The Layers Setup dialog box appears 2 Choose the layer you want to define as a plane layer in the Setup Layers dialog box It must be an electrical layer between top and bottom Choose Increase to add electrical layers Choose the Plane button The Assign Nets icon appears Choose the Assign Nets icon The Plane Layer Nets dialog box appears MA Plane Layer Nets x Inner Layer 2 Associated Nets Cancel Heb 5 Choose the net name s to add in the All Nets list box 6 Choose Add The net names appear in the Associated Nets list box Choose Remove to unassign net names PowerLogic User s Guide 10 21 Setting
202. is chapter for more information Change Pin Selects a different pin decal for an existing Decal terminal See the Changing Pin Decals topic in this chapter for more information id amp Set Pin Number Assigns pin numbers to several pins The pin number is incremented each time you select a pin See the Setting Pin Numbers topic in this chapter for more information Change Pin Changes the number assigned to a pin This Number command does not check for duplicate numbering See the Changing Pin Numbers topic in this chapter for more information 4 Set Pin Name Adds or changes the name for several pins Pin names are used to label the function of a pin This command does not check for duplicate naming conventions See the Setting Pin Names topic in this chapter for more information 4 Change Pin Changes the name assigned to a single pin Pin Name names label the function of a pin This command does not check for duplicate names See the Changing Pin Names topic in this chapter for more information BENE Set Pin Type Changes the type of pin the terminal represents for example load source etc See the Setting Pin Types topic in this chapter for more information PowerLogic User s Guide 7 35 Terminal Toolbox Fo Set Pin Swap Defines a swap class for a terminal Swapping gt information is used in the PCB Design system for length minimization and routing optimization See the Setting Pin Swaps top
203. is only available when you are in the Part Editor Pin Decal List Management Dialog Box Use the Pin Decal List Management dialog box to manage the list of available pin decals Pin Decal List Management xi Library C padspwrMlib common z Cancel Filter Cancel pi Apply Help PINCLKB Unassigned Decals Pin Decals Assign gt gt lt lt Unassign PowerLogic User s Guide 7 31 Creating New Parts from Existing Parts Filter Searches the chosen library or libraries for a specific item name or names that match a wildcard text string Use the Library drop down list to choose specific library directories or the All Libraries setting Type the prefix that you want to match up with library pin decal names followed by an asterisk in the Items text box for example type PIN to view all pin decals that begin with PIN Type to view all pin decals in the chosen libraries Choose Apply to search the libraries and display the search results Preview Area Displays the pin decal highlighted in the Unassigned Decals area or the Pin Decals area Unassigned Decals Lists the available pin decals in the selected library or all libraries Assign Moves a decal from the Unassigned Decals list box to the Pin Decals list Choose a decal then choose Assign Unassign Moves a decal from the Pin Decals list box to the Unassigned Decals list box Choose a decal then choose Unassign Pin Decals
204. isting part and you want the alternate representation choose Alternate from the pop up menu before placing the part To change an alternate choose Alternate from the pop up menu during Copy or Move mode Adding Connections When you add connections they must have electrically meaningful start and end points Py Start a connection on either a symbol pin or another connection End a connection on a symbol pin another connection a bus an off page reference or a ground or power symbol PowerLogic prevents you from ending a connection just anywhere in the database This eliminates time consuming post design error checking for dangling connections PowerLogic User s Guide 4 5 Design Toolbox To add a new connection 1 Choose the Add Connection icon from the Design toolbox or choose Add Item Add Connection from the pop up menu 2 Indicate the starting point of the connection The connection follows the cursor movement You can choose Angle from the pop up menu to specify diagonal segments in the connection 3 Indicate corners as needed You can choose Del Corner from the pop up menu to back up to the previous corner if necessary 4 A connection cannot end in open space Locate the cursor and double click to end the connection To end a connection with a power ground or off page reference symbol choose the appropriate symbol from the pop up menu during the last step of this procedure If you end the connection on a bus s
205. isual Basic Sample Scripts Advanced The following list describes advanced Visual Basic scripts These files are located in the padspwr logicole vbscripts folder Add Part BAS Adds a new gate to the schematic Alive Net List BAS Creates a netlist in Excel which allows you to cross probe between PowerLogic objects and the Excel cells containing the object names Bill of Materials BAS Produces a bill of materials in a user customizable format Custom Report Wizard BAS Generates a Wizard dialog box which you use to create a Visual Basic report Modeless Attributes BAS Generates a modeless dialog box which you use to manage part attributes Modeless Qm Part BAS Generates a modeless dialog box which you use to manage part and gate properties Modeless Visibility BAS Generates a modeless dialog box which you use to manage gate and attribute visibility PADS Net List Without Rules BAS Generates a netlist report in ASCII format Sheet Hierarchy to Excel BAS Creates a sheet hierarchy report in Excel which allows you to cross probe between PowerLogic objects and the Excel cells containing the object names PowerLogic User s Guide 9 24 Y Chapter 10 Design Rules and Layers This chapter discusses how to set up design rules and layers Once you set up your design rules you can export them to your layout tool or you can import rules from your layout tool The topics in this chapter include Setting Design Rules Export Ru
206. ject including all of its data is contained within the framework of and is a part of the PowerLogic schematic Linked Objects When an object is linked a copy of the object including all of its data is contained within the framework of and is a part of the PowerLogic schematic like an embedded object However the object is also linked to its source the original object that was copied Whenever you open the PowerLogic schematic that contains the linked object the object checks the source to see if it changed since you last saved the schematic If the source changed then the linked object automatically updates OLE Automation OLE Automation is a way for heterogeneous applications to communicate with each other You can also use OLE Automation to communicate with standard Microsoft Office applications such as Word and Excel Applications can only communicate if one is an OLE Automation Server PowerLogic is not an OLE Automation Server PowerPCB however is Therefore PowerLogic can successfully communicate with PowerPCB Visual Editing Visual Editing occurs when the source application for a linked or embedded OLE object opens within PowerLogic The source application s menu system appears within PowerLogic this is In place Visual Editing Sizing handles Small black squares that appear at the corners and along the sides of a rectangular area that surrounds a selected object PowerLogic User s Guide 9 2 OLE Object Linki
207. ked they are mainly high level autorouter setups 4 Differential Pairs x Definition Available Available Lists the nets that are available for pairing To pair nets choose a net in the list box and choose either the upper or lower Add button Choose another net and choose the other Add button Choose Remove to select a different net during the pair definition Note A net can only belong to one net pair The Available list box only contains nets that do not belong to a differential pair Pairs Lists the net pairs in the list box Length and Gap Specifies or modifies the minimum and maximum trace length and gap between the traces Choose Accept when your definition is complete New Begins the definition process for pairing net PowerLogic User s Guide 10 9 Setting Design Rules Remove Disbands a differential net pair and removes it from the Pairs list Report Produces a report on Differential Pairs See the Rules Report topic in this chapter for more information Rules Report E Use the Rules Report dialog box to produce a report of some or all of the rules you defined By default you produce a complete report of all rules 1 Choose Setup Design Rules The Rules dialog box appears 2 Choose the Report icon The Rules Report dialog box appears E Rules Report x Rule Types ze Clearance Routing HSL DiffPairs Help m Nets Cla
208. l Libraries Items Pin Count pa cores Help Decals Provides a list of PCB decals from the library defined in the Filter area Filter Area Searches the selected library or libraries for specific decal names that match a wildcard text string See the Preface for more information PowerLogic User s Guide 4 32 Query Modify Query Modify Net Name Use Query Modify Net Name to change the system created net name o 1 Choose the Query Modify icon from the toolbar 2 Select a connection where it enters or exits a part Selecting any other segment of the connection will not display this dialog box 3 Enter a new name for the net in the Net Name text box or choose an existing name from the drop down list box If you choose a name from the drop down list box the message Net lt netname gt already exists OK to combine nets Y N appears Choose Yes to combine the nets Choose No to enter a different net name 4 Choose OK Query Modify Net Name x NetName JELK Statistics Rename This instance C Allinstances Cancel Help The new net name is placed at the end of the connection Use Move Mode to adjust the placement of the net name text Use Statistics to display connection information in the default text editor Use the Rename area to apply the new net name to the selected connection or to all instances of this connection Note Selecting This Instance will cause t
209. lay grid text size etc To add new design information open one of the toolboxes in the toolbar e Use the Design toolbox to add and edit parts from libraries create and modify hierarchical symbols add connections and swap pins and reference designators e Use the Bus toolbox to define bus structures e Use the Drafting toolbox to create and edit non electrical information including text charts notes etc See the Drafting Operations chapter for more information Design Toolbox 2 The Design toolbox adds and edits libraries parts creates and modifies hierarchical symbols adds connections and swaps pins and reference designators Choose Window Design Toolbox or choose the Design Toolbox icon from the toolbar to open the Design toolbox x a lll PowerLogic User s Guide 4 1 Design Toolbox Add Part Adds a library part to the schematic See the Adding Parts topic in this chapter for more information Add Connection Adds a new connection See the Adding Connections topic in this chapter for more GA information E Edit Invokes the Part Editor to modify a library part Part Hierarchica or a hierarchical symbol See the Modifying a 1 Symbol Hierarchical Symbol topic in this chapter for more information El New Creates a hierarchical symbol either bottom up Hierarchical underlying logic defined or top down Symbol underlying logic undefined See the Hierarchical Design topic in this cha
210. lbox to change a pin number if necessary See the Changing Pin Numbers topic in this chapter for more information Any alternate CAE decals are assigned the same pin numbers 8 Set other pin information such as pin type and pin swapping as needed 9 Choose Complete 10 Repeat steps 1 through 9 for the other gates Select Gate Decal Use the Select Gate Decal dialog box to choose a gate to assign pin information to pin number pin type swapping information etc To open this dialog box you must first assign gates to a part through the Gates option of the Part Information dialog box See the Creating Multigate Parts topic in this chapter for the proper sequence You can also create new alternate CAE decals and assign them to the gate See the Gates Tab topic in this chapter for information on assigning existing CAE decals as alternates Select Gate Decal to Edit Gate Alternative Decals Gate c ul i Decal NOR2 Cancel Help Gate Selects a gate to edit You can also select the gate from the work area PowerLogic User s Guide 7 8 Creating Multigate Parts Decal Lists the currently assigned CAE decal You can also type the name of a new alternate decal here Alternative Decal Edits an alternate decal assigned to a gate or creates a new alternate decal You can also select the alternate from the work area To create a new alternate decal 1 Choose lt New Decal gt from the drop down list b
211. le changes Manual Update Updates the objects selected in the Links list when you choose Update Now from this dialog box Source File Lists the path and filename of the source file OLE Visual Editing Visual Editing occurs when the source application for a linked or embedded OLE object opens within PowerLogic The source application s menu system appears within PowerLogic this is In place Visual Editing You can also visually edit an OLE object by opening the source application and editing the object in the environment in which it was created You can visually edit OLE objects in two ways e Double click the OLE object to edit directly within PowerLogic The source application s menu system appears within PowerLogic e Ctrl double click the OLE object to edit in the source application The source application opens and you edit the object in the original environment Note Once the object opens within either PowerLogic or the source application you can edit its content as you normally would using all of the source application s commands and tools Converting OLE Objects and other OLE specific Editing Commands Once you insert an OLE object the name of the object appears at the bottom of the Edit menu For example if you insert a video clip Video Clip Object appears at the bottom of the Edit menu If you highlight the Video Clip Object command another menu appears listing all commands you can perform on the linked or emb
212. lengths for the specified nets Length matching rules are usually set for all nets in a class Although you can create these rule types in PowerLogic and pass them to PowerPCB PowerPCB does not create items for or specifically check against these values Delete Removes this set of High speed rules from your rules hierarchy You cannot delete the default High speed rules PowerLogic User s Guide 10 17 Export Rules to PCB Export Rules to PCB Use Tools Export Rules to PCB to write design rules to an ASCII file including layer setups and layer counts etc 1 Choose Tools Export Rules to PCB The Export Rules to PCB ASCII File dialog box appears 2 Type a new filename or choose an existing file 3 Choose Save to create the file Save in Gies rl Ej ex lez sl 2 demo Save as type Fasci Files asc Cancel Import Rules from PCB Use Tools Import Rules from PCB to read design rules from an ASCII file including layer setups and layer counts etc 1 Choose Tools Import Rules from PCB The Import Rules from PCB ASCII File dialog box appears 2 Type a new filename or choose an existing file 3 Choose Open to read the file impor Rules from PowerPCB ASCII File Look in E LogicFies y El e En 2 demo Filename f Files of type asen Files asc Cancel PowerLogic User s Guide 10 18 Setting Layers Setting Layers If you plan to netlist to PowerPCB use the Layers S
213. les appear around the object when it is selected 2 Choose File Export The File Export dialog box appears 3 Choose OLE C ole as the file type PowerLogic User s Guide 2 3 Importing and Exporting Files 4 Name the file and select a location in which to save the file 5 Choose Save The ole file is created and is available for import into other PowerLogic schematics Note You can also import OLE objects from their source application files using Edit Insert New Object ASCII Output Options Select Sections to Output When the ASCII Output dialog box appears select the items to appear in the ASCII file Each item represents a section heading of the ASCII file To select an item check the box next to it To select all sections click Select All To select nothing click Unselect All You can export the following parts and information Schematic Parameters Default system settings from the Preferences tabs Sheet Parameters Specific sheet information such as window scale centering etc Text Free text together with location level and size Lines 2D line items Plot Parameters Information related to the CAM output settings and configurations generated using the Print Plot command Decals Part decals and their contents Part Types Library part attributes such as manufacturer cost and notes Parts Parts used in the schematic and their reference designators Connections All connections on the schematic includin
214. les to PCB Import Rules from PCB Setting Layers Setting Design Rules Design Rules lets you assign general routing constraints for your design such as trace width and spacing An option in the netlist report lets you pass established design rules to PowerPCB along with the connectivity and parts information Design rules are separated into three categories Clearance rules Sets the minimum allowable airgap between various object types in the design such as trace to trace and via to trace Routing rules Assign or prohibit via types specify length minimization types and allow or prohibit routing High speed rules Sets the minimum and maximum parameters for advanced design rules such as parallelism delay capacitance and others Information for each category is entered and edited in separate dialog boxes that you can access through the Rules dialog box To set rules 1 Choose Setup Design Rules The Rules dialog box appears Use the Rules dialog box to enter item to item Clearance rules routing guidelines and values for the optional High Speed checking commands 2 Choose which rules hierarchy level you want to set or modify rules for When you specify one of the hierarchical levels described below you can access the Clearance Routing or High Speed dialog boxes 4 Rules Lx Hierarchy Units Default Class Net Conditional Differential Report Rules Pairs PowerLogic User s Gu
215. ll assigned decals must have the same number of pins PowerLogic User s Guide 7 15 Part Information for Part Unassign Removes decals from the Assigned Decals list box and returns them to the Unassigned Decals list box To delete a decal assignment 1 Select a decal name from the Assigned Decals list box 2 Choose Unassign The decal moves to the Unassigned Decals list box the decal is not assigned to the part Up and Down Changes the order of assigned decals in the Assigned Decals list box The first decal is the default decal Use Up and Down to move the decal you want to use as the default decal to the top of the Assigned Decals list box Reset Returns the options on the current tab to their original settings the settings that appeared when you first opened the tab Reset only resets the current tab Gates Tab Use the Gates tab to assign gate information to a part including the number of gates pin assignments for each gate and swap capability information for both You also use this dialog box to assign a CAE decal to a part Part Information for Part DIP16 General PCB Decals Gates Signal Pins Attributes Alphanumeric Pins Connector r Gates Gate Swap CAE Decal 1 GENADIPIE CAE Decal 2 dit ld la Delete m Pins for Gate A Unused Pins Pin Type Name Sw IN om o Eddy 2 Undefined 0 3 Undefined 0 lt lt Remove 4
216. log box option button or tab to carry out an action Position the cursor on the menu item or dialog box item and click the left mouse button To locate a design or text object or to specify a zoom area Position the cursor at the starting point or on the object press and hold the left mouse button while you move the cursor and release the mouse button To type characters Type in a text box to provide names and values To type characters and press Enter usually at a prompt Cusually not in a dialog box because pressing Enter executes and closes the dialog box To press keys on the keyboard or if specifically stated keys on the keypad xviii Conventions GUI Elements Windows Conventions Menu bar Pop up menus Command button Text box List box A command list across the top of the application window that changes depending on whether the PowerLogic Schematic Editor or Part Editor is active A command list that appears at the cursor location when you click the right mouse button Pop up menus can also contain cascading menus A labeled button that represents a command or command sequence and when chosen immediately invokes the command s A dialog box area where you type text to supply variable information A dialog box area containing a list from which based on context sensitivity you can choose a single item or multiple items Scrolling enables you to view the entire list if it is too large for the displa
217. lso use the View and Rename buttons for these functions Sheets a ES Numbered Sheets Close View up Numbered Sheets Itemizes the sheets of a design in a list box View Displays the selected sheet in the work area Up Renumbers the selected sheet with the value n 1 Down Renumbers the selected sheet with the value n 1 Rename Creates or modifies the name assigned to a sheet PowerLogic User s Guide 4 16 Modes of Operation Add Adds a new sheet to the list box and the design and displays the new sheet Delete Deletes the selected sheet from the design Modes of Operation PowerLogic has three basic modes of operation Group Select mode Object Select mode and Verb Mode In addition to these operational modes PowerLogic has Zoom mode Zoom mode overrides all other modes until you specify another mode Group Select Mode Group Select mode is the default mode of operation when you start PowerLogic You perform group operations in Group Select mode PowerLogic is in Group Select mode when the Select Arrow on the Standard toolbar is selected and when all filter controls are turned off on the Object Selector toolbar Selecting the Group Selector icon on the Object Selector toolbar can turn off the filter controls See the Group Operations topic in this chapter for more information Verb Mode Commands that operate on a selected object are considered verb commands In Verb mode you
218. lues header dla Header repname dig CustomN ame ext dlg ext genHdr dlg genHdr 1 incJob dlg incJob 1 incTime dlg incTime 1 hard ame dia NutnutFile 1 For more information on the Visual Basic editor and language see the Sax Basic Editor On line Help Editor Colors This Visual Basic editor displays source code using different colors The color is context sensitive when you place the cursor on the text and press F1 the correct help file opens to the correct help topic For example if the cursor is on a PowerLogic Automation Object purple when you press F1 the Automation Server On line Help appears The text colors represent Blue Visual Basic Keywords Black User Variables Cyan Visual Basic Functions Purple PowerLogic Automation Objects or Members Red Errors Green Comments PowerLogic User s Guide 9 18 Visual Basic Scripting Editor Menus To open the editor pop up menu right click anywhere on the Sax Basic Engine dialog box For more information on the Visual Basic editor dialog box features see the Sax Basic Editor On line Help Editor Toolbar New Creates a new Visual Basic script There are four types of scripts scripts code modules object modules and class modules See the Sax Basic Editor On line Help for more information You can create a script that calls another script For example ScriptA can call ScriptB You can also create a script that runs a series of scri
219. m the File menu The Reports dialog box appears 2 Select the check box on for each report you want to generate PowerLogic directs all reports except the netlist report padsnet asc into a single text file report rep 3 If you choose Bill of Materials Setup you can specify or modify the report characteristics 4 When you finish report selection and the Bill of Materials setup choose OK PowerLogic generates the reports and the dialog box closes Choose Cancel to close the dialog box without generating reports PowerLogic User s Guide 11 11 Creating Reports Reports A ES r Select Report Files for Output 3 Unused Unuse ARE Bill of Materials Setup Help Part Statistics IV Net Statistics _ Cancel Limits T Off Page He Unused Lists all unused pins and gates in the schematic Part Statistics Lists all parts in the schematic Net Statistics Lists all nets in the schematic and identifies any questionable nets Limits Compares the current schematic to the maximum schematic size allowed Off Page Lists all signals that appear on more than one page with sheet number and X Y location Bill of Materials Produces a bill of materials in a user customizable format PowerLogic User s Guide 11 12 Unused Creating Reports The Unused report lists all unused gates and pins in the schematic Use this report for troubleshooting and to maximize part usage
220. mits report to ensure that you are not approaching the system s limit for any item If you exceed the Maximum No of Items for any item you cannot continue adding those items to the schematic The solution is to split the design into multiple schematics run separate netlists for each schematic then merge the netlists using a text editor PowerLogic User s Guide 11 14 An example of the Limits report follows JOB LIMITS REPORT PADSPWR LOGICFILES filenam ITEM TYPE ALLOCATED Sheets 1024 1 Sht Gate Net Ref 32767 15 Parts 5120 2 Part Para Ref 102400 Part Para Names 65536 112 Nets 10240 5 Nets chars 32767 0 Other 1008 2 NEXT SHEET NUMBER ITEM TYPE ALLOCATED Text Strings 4096 Text Chars 32767 Drawings 4096 Pieces 8192 Corners 32767 Arcs 2048 Part Decals 1024 Terminals 16384 Part Types 2048 Gates 4096 Gate Pins 32767 Gate Sig Pins 4096 Pin Num Names 12288 Pin Names 32767 Gates Comps 8192 Comp pins 32767 Nets names 4096 Tie Dots 4096 Off Page Refs 4096 Busses 512 Connections 16384 Route Segments 32767 Other 20 PowerLogic User s Guide US 16 USI 45 10 24 N PN 0D O O WwW O Oo N Creating Reports date tim SCH ED 7 11 15 Creating Reports report rep Notepad File Edi Search Help JOB LIMITS REPORT preview sch Wed Har 17 09 14 11 1999 ITEM TYPE Sheets 1024 Sht Gate Net Ref 2048 Parts
221. mmon DIP14 common DIP16 common DIP18 cma common DIP20 common DIP22 common DIP22 400 zl Help Filter Library C padspwr lib common m Items pe Apply Parts Displays the parts that PowerLogic matched to the search filter settings Choose the part you want to add from this list The decal of a selected part displays in the area to the left of the list box PowerLogic User s Guide 4 3 Design Toolbox Filter area Searches the selected library for a specific part or item name or for names that match a wildcard text string See the Preface for more information Add Part Pop up Menu Rotate 90 Toggles between a rotation of 90 degrees counterclockwise and the original orientation X Mirror and Y Mirror Reverse the pins while placing a part This is often useful for improving the flow of the schematic X Mirror mirrors the part in the X direction When selected the part flips about a vertical reference line Part text is not mirrored Y Mirror mirrors the part attached to the cursor in the Y direction that is flips the part about a horizontal reference line Part text is not mirrored Next Type Selects the gate with the electrical properties that you require When you add a part with more than one gate type in the part Next Type allows you to select the next type of gate in the part Alternate Places an alternate symbol if available Adding Single Gate Parts Single gate parts are parts that are repres
222. n can start on a component pin or on another connection segment A copied connection can end on a component pin a connection segment or a bus segment PowerLogic automatically assigns new bus netnames to bus segment copies The new netname is based on the original bus segment netname plus one For example if you make a copy of bus segment D00 the copy is assigned the netname DO1 PowerLogic User s Guide 4 19 Modes of Operation Semiautomatic Step and Repeat If you manually place a copy within 0 5 of the original in both X and Y directions the next connection is placed at the same offset Then press the Space Bar to place a new copy You can continue to use this semi automated Step and Repeat process to place subsequent copies Move Mode Use Move mode to adjust the position of existing parts connections text and drafting objects To move an object 1 Choose the Move Mode icon from the toolbar or Set Command Mode Move Mode in the pop up menu 2 Select the object to move The object follows the cursor movement Optionally and depending on the available options for the selected object you can adjust the orientation and other settings from the pop up menu before placement Position the object and indicate its location to complete the move PowerLogic remains in Move mode until you choose another mode toolbox or the Select icon from the toolbar Moving Text When you add a part to the schematic all of the text
223. n must be perpendicular to the bus PowerLogic adds an angled bus tap segment at the point of connection and gives the connection the next sequential net name in the bus Confirm or type the net name in the dialog box The text follows the cursor movement Position the text and indicate its location Optionally you can swap the bus tap angle by choosing Swap Angle from the pop up menu You can add multiple copies of the connection after the initial connection location is indicated See the Step and Repeat topic in this chapter for more information PowerLogic User s Guide AA Bus Toolbox Splitting a Bus ES To create new corners or a 90 degree turn in the bus 1 Choose the Split Bus icon from the Bus toolbox or Modify Bus Split Bus in the pop up menu 2 Select the bus segment The new and divided segments follow the cursor movement 3 Move the cursor to define the segment length You can choose Swap Corner from the pop up menu to define the end point in the opposite direction 4 Indicate the end point of the new segment to complete the split Extending a Bus 4 To extend a bus segment 1 Choose the Extend Bus icon from the Bus toolbox or Modify Bus Extend Bus in the pop up menu 2 Select either end point of the bus The end segment follows the cursor movement 3 Indicate corners as needed for the extension or choose Add Corner from the pop up menu 4 Indicate the new end point or choose Complete from the pop
224. n or Open Existing PCB File message appears 2 Choose New to start a new session without loading a file or choose Open to open an existing file in a new PowerPCB session If you choose Open you need to locate the file to open 3 The OLE PowerPCB Connection dialog box appears You are connected to PowerPCB Choose the tab that represents the area you want to set Choose between Receive tab Manages received selections Send tab Manages selections to send Design tab Automates the ECO File Compare and other functions using the OLE communications and PowerPCB OLE Automation tools Document tab Allows you to open a file or create a new file in PowerPCB This tab also displays the name of the current PowerPCB file to which PowerLogic is connected Preferences tab Manages nets PowerLogic User s Guide 9 13 OLE PowerPCB Connection 4 When you choose the tab the options for that tab appear Set the options you want to change 5 Proceed with cross probing OLE Receive Tab The Receive tab manages received selections from PowerPCB OLE PowerPCB Connection Receive Send Design Document Preferences Received Selection IV Receive Selections Y1 XTAL2 Sheet 1 OLE Received Selection Contains a list of items selected in PowerPCB if the Receive Selections check box is on Items are listed in the order in which they are received When you choose an item in this list box it appears in the center o
225. nabled and you return to the PowerLogic work area When you choose Yes the Media Wizard dialog box appears PowerLogic User s Guide 1 23 Modeless Commands 4 Choose whether to Create Media from Current Session or to Create Media from Previous Session This selection selects the correct next log file 5 Type your initials in the User Initials field to personalize the files If you do not enter your initials a default is used zz is the default 6 Choose whether to Delete all actions before last save This deletes all entries in the log file between the first Open and the last Save command used for each design file in use Deleting the lines helps to prevent replaying the wrong data 7 Choose OK to continue BMW creates a directory for the files padspwr logicfiles lt month gt lt day gt lt initials gt lt sequential_letter gt The initials are the initials you enter in the dialog box and sequential_letter is a letter that BMW uses to sequence the directories BMW uses the letter A first If you created a directory earlier in the same day BMW uses the next alphabetical letter BMW next copies the next ini file and the next log file to the directory They are renamed directory_name ini and directory_name log respectively If you chose to create media from the previous session BMW copies and renames nextback ini and nextbak log Once BMW copies the files it renames and copies any files related to the log file such as pcb
226. ncur reinstatement charges in the event of a lapse and subsequent renewal 8 4 Increases The applicable Maintenance fee for each licensed program is subject to change from time to time Such increase for annual service fees would occur at the beginning of any renewal term 8 5 Termination Termination of the Maintenance Agreement will end any support obligation of PADS 8 6 Added Coverage Fees If any of the Licensed Products are added for Maintenance under this Agreement after its term has commenced PADS will pro rate the additional fee from the expiration of the System s 30 day warranty period through the remainder of the Agreement term 8 7 Upgrade and Update Fees Upgrades and Updates may require additional service fees Upon receipt of any Upgrade or Update from PADS requiring such fees Licensee shall pay an additional service fee equal to the amount by which the annual service fee for the Upgrade or Update exceeds the annual service fee for the Software prorated for the remainder of the term of the agreement 8 8 Add on products Add on products and modules for which Maintenance has not been purchased will not be automatically entitled to Maintenance and future Updates 8 9 Acceptance Customer agrees to pay Maintenance on the full configuration purchased if Maintenance is accepted 9 MAINTENANCE SERVICES 9 1 Services Provided The PADS Customer Support Department shall provide Licensee with the following services during the term
227. nd 200 Do not exceed the total report width of 200 PowerLogic reserves a space to separate columns Therefore the actual column width is one character less than the specified number If the attribute length exceeds the column width the attribute name word wraps within that column Format Tab The Format tab enables you to modify the output format of the Bill of Material report Bill of Materials Setup xi Attributes Format Clipboard View r Delimiter r Format Options None Report Title C Separator Bil Of Materials for 2 on d C Tab Combine Tolerance C Comma Iv Separate Ref Designator C Custom K Sort By iem ITEM File Format Text File y Reset Settings Save As Delete None Uses no delimiter character to distinguish BOM report columns Separator Uses a vertical bar between BOM report fields Tab Uses tabs between BOM report fields PowerLogic User s Guide 11 18 Creating Reports Comma Uses a comma between BOM report fields Custom Allows you to specify any character as a delimiter between BOM report fields Report Title Creates a custom header for the report The variable j is replaced by the filename and d is replaced by the date Combine Tolerance Combines the Value and Tolerance attributes of a part in the part name For example the 14 watt resistor would have a part type name of R1 4W or R1 4W 4 7K 5 PowerLogic evaluates
228. ndard Visual Basic function and display its result in a message box Demonstrates Visual Basic interaction with a PowerLogic Automation function Demonstrates the If Then statements Demonstrates a simple dialog box using the Visual Basic dialog editor Demonstrates a standard dialog box using the Visual Basic dialog box editor Demonstrates a complex dialog box using the Visual Basic dialog box editor Provides a real life example Lists all design files in the padspwr files directory Selecting a file from the list will open that file in PowerLogic Lists all components and nets Allows you to enter a number of pins All parts with that number of pins are selected Visual Basic Sample Scripts RGL Reports The following list describes Visual Basic scripts which are equivalent to existing RGL reports These files are located in the padspwr logicole vbscripts rgl samples folder RGL BAS Net Statistics BAS Part Statistics BAS Unused Gates BAS Unused Pins BAS Unused BAS PowerLogic User s Guide Contains a library of functions which is used by the other scripts in this group the scripts in this group must contain RGL BAS to function Lists all nets in the schematic and identifies any questionable nets Lists all parts in the schematic Lists all unused gates in the schematic Lists all unused pins in the schematic Lists all unused pins and gates in the schematic 9 23 Visual Basic Scripting V
229. net Choose the appropriate icon in the Rules dialog box to define rules for a particular level in the hierarchy PowerLogic User s Guide 10 2 Setting Design Rules Hierarchical Rules Order This section lists the order of precedence for all rules from least to most specific Default 1 represents the lowest level of the hierarchy with the least amount of precedence At the opposite end of the order is Net against Net with Levels which is the highest level of the hierarchy and has the highest possible precedence It represents the most specific rule you can assign to an object in PowerLogic Default Default with Level Class Class with Level Net Net with Level Class against Class Class against Class with Level Net against Class 10 Net against Class with Level 11 Net against Net 12 Net against Net with Level 0 Y O 0AO0DNnN c Default Rules Use the Default Rules dialog box to define rules which apply to all objects that are not included in any other rule within the hierarchy 1 Choose Setup Design Rules The Rules dialog box appears 2 Choose the Default icon The Default Rules dialog box appears JE Default Rules x zr im Clearance Routing Hi Speed Report Li Clearance Opens the Clearance Rules dialog box where you set default Clearance rules See the Clearance Rules topic in this chapter for more information Routing Opens the Routing Rules dialog box where you set default Routing
230. newsignamel ref3 pin3 ref4 pin4 where the pins following the SIGNAL statement are in the first net and those following the second line are in the second net Rename a part The command is RENPART The format for the rename line is oldrefdes newrefdes where oldrefdes is the old name and newrefdes is the new name To facilitate the renaming operation duplicate name checking is not run until after all rename information has been read This allows the above rename list to run without a conflict If any error is encountered no parts in the list are renamed Rename a net The command is RENNET RENAME NET The format for the rename net entry is oldname newname where oldname is the old net name and newname is the new net name Swap a gate The command is SWPGATE GATE1 GATE2 Swap a pin The command is SWPPINS REFDES PIN1 PIN2 PowerLogic User s Guide 2 18 Chapter 3 Design Setup Y This chapter discusses how to set up and customize PowerLogic to fit your work style As part of customizing PowerLogic you will also learn how to use macros to help you work faster The topics in this chapter include Setting Preferences Setting Colors Customizing PowerLogic The Macro Recorder Setting Preferences Using Preferences you can preset options for commands in PowerLogic set up the PowerLogic commands and override the default settings in the default txt file Se
231. ng Circles To add circles l 2 3 4 Choose the Create 2D Line icon from the Drafting toolbox Choose Circle from the pop up menu Indicate the center point of the circle A circle outline follows the cursor movement Indicate the radius length to end the addition PowerLogic User s Guide 8 4 Drafting Toolbox Adding Rectangles To add rectangles 1 2 3 4 Choose the Create 2D Line icon from the Drafting toolbox Choose Rectangle from the pop up menu Indicate one corner of the rectangle A box outline follows the cursor movement Indicate the diagonally opposite corner to end the addition Optionally you can add multiple copies of a 2D line item after the initial item location is indicated See the Step and Repeat topic in the Design Operations chapter for more information Modifying 2D Line Items y To change drafting objects choose the Modify 2D Line icon from the Drafting toolbox This changes the default pop up menu to a specific pop up menu for modifying 2D line items ip 2 From the Drafting toolbox choose the Modify 2D Line icon Select the line segment or corner to modify The object is placed in Move mode Use the pop up menu to enable other 2D line modifications If you choose a segment the following modification functions are available Pull Arc Converts a segment or corner into an arc Split Divides a segment into two segments Del Segment Deletes the line segment at the pick poi
232. ng and Embedding OLE Object Linking and Embedding PowerLogic now lets you insert other files or other applications as linked or embedded objects within a schematic You can insert Microsoft Word documents insert a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet containing a Bill of Materials and insert video or audio clips PowerLogic does not need to understand the format of the inserted object PowerLogic communicates with the application that created the file and that source application tells PowerLogic what information to display and how to display it Note You cannot insert or modify OLE linked or embedded objects in the Part Editor To insert a linked or embedded object in PowerLogic 1 Choose Edit Insert New Object The Insert Object dialog box appears 2 Choose whether to Create New or Create from File Create New inserts a new OLE object Create from File inserts an existing file as an OLE object 3 If you chose Create New choose the type of OLE object you want to create If you chose Create from File choose the file you want to insert as an OLE object 4 If you chose Create from File choose whether to link the inserted object to the original file If you choose not to link the object it is an embedded object 5 Choose whether to display the linked or embedded object as an icon 6 Choose OK to insert the linked or embedded object in PowerLogic If you insert a new object whose source application is an OLE Automation Server that
233. ng commands for 9 10 editing links 9 8 exporting 2 3 exporting OLE files 2 2 importing 2 2 importing OLE files 2 2 inserting new objects 1 8 9 3 inserting objects from file 9 4 inserting PowerPCB object 1 8 linked and embedded object automatic updates 9 10 linked and embedded object manual updates 9 10 linking and embedding methods of 9 3 linking inserted and embedded objects 9 5 links command 1 8 listing links 9 8 managing nets 9 13 In 9 Index managing received selections 9 13 Part attributes query modify 5 5 Part editor 1 10 3 6 4 11 4 12 Part editor operations 6 4 7 1 7 2 7 5 managing selections to send 9 13 moving objects 9 8 overview 9 1 paste objects 9 8 PowerPCB connection dialog box 9 13 printing and plotting objects 9 13 receiving selections 9 14 redrawing objects 9 7 saving objects 9 12 selecting objects 9 7 sizing objects 9 8 turning off object display 9 6 updating linked and embedded objects 9 9 visual editing 9 2 9 10 ole file 9 12 OLE icon changing 9 5 OLE import export 2 3 OLE PowerPCB connection 1 11 Open command 1 4 Open icon 1 13 Opening a PCB file 9 16 Visual Basic scripts 9 19 Operational modes 4 17 Option buttons xix Options start up 1 2 Orientation of print or plot 11 5 Origin 1 18 setting the group origin 4 22 setting the part origin 7 46 Output device 11 2 Output filename netlist output 2 6 Output f
234. ng the next log file to simplify the process of reproducing a problematic PowerLogic session This is also a command line option See the Starting PowerLogic section of this topic BMW is associated with another modeless command BLT See the BMW and BLT topic below for information on creating media Opens the Log Test dialog box BLT finds and runs the BMW macros to test or replay the media See the BMW and BLT topic below for information on playing back the PowerLogic session View specified file for example F demo eco Runs Database Integrity Test BMW creates media based on either the current PowerLogic session or the previous PowerLogic session using the next log file automatic record macro When you use BMW as a command line option it only creates media of the previous session use the modeless command to create media of your current session If you need to send files or other information to PADS Technical Support you can run BMW and send the resulting files BMW copies all the necessary files To use the BMW modeless command 1 Start PowerLogic 2 Type BMW and press Enter PowerLogic checks to see if the powerlogic ini file has the log feature enabled If it is not enabled the message Log file generation is not enabled properly in your powerlogic ini file Do you want it automatically enabled for this and following PowerLogic sessions appears 3 Choose Yes to enable BMW and continue If you choose No or Cancel BMW is not e
235. not want to display the display grid set it to 10 Origin and Design Grid When you start a new file the default drawing format is centered in the work area with the origin or 0 0 point in the lower left corner The origin appears as a large white dot As you move the cursor its position relative to the origin displays in the lower right corner of the screen The numbers change in the multiples of the design grid The minimum design grid increment is 2 mils The design grid intervals begin in all directions from the origin To set the design grid use the Design tab in the Preferences dialog box or use the G modeless command During design if you move a part across the board the cursor may move smoothly but the part snaps from grid point to grid point When Snap to Grid is checked in the Status Window you cannot place a part off of the current design grid To set the origin while in the Part Editor choose Setup Set Origin from the menu Indicate the position of the new origin Controlling the View You can use several methods to control which portion of the database is visible on the screen PowerLogic User s Guide 1 18 Controlling the View Using the View Commands and Scroll Bars Use commands in the View menu to control the view Use Zoom or press the Zoom icon on the toolbar to enter Zoom mode e To zoom in position the cursor at the desired view center and click the left mouse button e To zoom out position the
236. nt Width Changes the line width of the item Filled Fills a closed polygon Solid Style and Dotted Style Changes the line style to a solid or a dashed line You cannot specify dotted lines for circles or arcs Orthogonal Moves are made in 90 degree increments Diagonal Moves are made in 45 degree increments Any Angle Moves are made at any angle If you choose a corner the pop up menu uses most of the options as selected segments plus the following Del Corner Deletes the corner A line segment is created between the corner s original end points 3 Reposition the cursor and indicate a new location for the item PowerLogic User s Guide 8 5 Drafting Toolbox Pulling Arcs Pull Arc moves the selected line segment to create an arc as the cursor is moved Horizontal lines move in the vertical direction Vertical lines move in the horizontal direction Diagonal lines move in all directions unless anchored by a line at the end of the diagonal If an existing arc is selected its end points remain fixed and the arc chord follows the cursor Use the Pull Arc command to convert a drafting segment or corner into an arc The starting points of the drafting segment become the start and stop angle for the new arc 1 Choose the Modify 2D Line icon from the Drafting toolbox 2 Select the line for arc conversion 3 Choose Pull Arc from the pop up menu An arc follows the cursor movement 4 Indicate the arc to end the conversion
237. o Help button exists The Filter area occurs throughout PowerLogic dialog boxes The functionality of the Filter is similar if not identical in each occurrence Filter options include Library Ttems Apply PowerLogic User s Guide Specifies library directories to search for Specifies the prefix specific part or item name for which to search libraries Libraries are searched for names that match the wildcard text string you type Type the prefix that you want to search for followed by an asterisk for example type DIP to view all parts that begin with DIP Type to view all parts or items in the specified libraries Searches the libraries and displays the search results Xx Frequently Asked Questions Frequently Asked Questions Here are answers to frequently asked questions that many new users have about PowerLogic installation and usage Memory and Hardware What are PowerLogic s hardware and operating system requirements g Pp g Sy q PowerLogic can run under Microsoft Windows 95 and Windows 98 with at least 16 MB of memory or Windows NT with 32 MB of memory PowerLogic requires about 30 MB of disk space for either operating system Does PowerLogic require a security device to run the software No PowerLogic does not require a security device Refer to PADS Software License Agreement for additional information Is PowerLogic available on 3 5 diskettes No PowerLogic is only available on CD ROM Will
238. o in the default macro file the command line should read c padspwr powerlogic powerlogic exe mMyMacro Note When specifying a file to start do not use before the filename You can specify multiple command line switches You can also add a command line option to a shortcut icon ds 2 3 4 5 Before starting PowerLogic create a shortcut to PowerLogic Highlight the PowerLogic shortcut icon Click the right mouse button and choose Properties Choose the Shortcut tab Follow Step 5 above Choose OK to close the Properties dialog box and start PowerLogic PowerLogic User s Guide 1 2 Using the Interface Using the Interface PowerLogic uses standard Windows menus and icons to access commands C PADS LOGFIL Demo sch PowerLOGIC Of x Menu Bar File Edit View Setup Tools Window Help Toolbar Elm d EN 45 s 4 2 imet E EMEN System Status Indicator Width 10 Grid 50 Status Bar Line Width Design Grid X Y Coordinates Menu Bar Lists the PowerLogic commands in pull down menus Toolbar Contains icons for opening and saving designs sheet selection zoom mode redraws and access to the toolboxes See the Toolbars and Toolboxes topic in this chapter for additional information System Status Indicator Indicates the processing state of PowerLogic Red indicates that PowerLogic is processing and cannot receive input Green indicates an idle or available state Point of O
239. o modify 3 Modify the text string and or other options then choose OK 4 Query Modify Text x Text PADS Software Inc x Y 4850 1950 Height Width 250 24 Rotation y ustification r Horizontal p Vertical C Right C Up D C Center C Center Left Down Parent Cancel Help Text Displays the selected text string Modify the existing string or type a new text string X Y Location Displays the current X and Y location of the selected text string Type new values to move the text string to a specified location PowerLogic User s Guide 8 8 Query Modify Height Width Displays the current height and width of the selected text string Type new values to change the height or width of the text string Use Height Width tab in the Preferences dialog box to change the default height or width of free text Rotation Displays the current rotation value of the selected text string The rotation can be either 0 or 90 degrees Type a new value or use the arrows to change the degree of rotation Justification Displays the current justification of the selected text string Choose one of the option buttons to change the justification Choose between horizontal alignments Right Center or Left Choose between vertical alignments Up Center or Down Parent Displays the Query Modify Drafting dialog box to modify the drafting object when you combine the selected text string with a dra
240. ode Flip selected on Y axis Record prompt windows toggle macros Function Key Shortcuts Fl F2 FS F9 F10 Other Key Shortcuts BackSpace Esc M Spacebar Alt Spacebar Shift Spacebar Ctrl Spacebar PowerLogic User s Guide Help Add Connection Mouse move compression macros Absolute Relative coordinates toggle macros End recording macros Remove last connection corner Cancel command Right mouse click Left mouse click Add Offpage while in Add Connection mode Add Power Symbol while in Add Connection mode Add Ground Symbol while in Add Connection mode 1 26 Pop Up Menus Pop Up Menus Pop up menus provide an alternate method of choosing design drafting and object selection commands Open a pop up menu by pressing the right mouse button over the work area The commands that appear on a pop up menu depend on the object or objects selected e Part or gate selected e Net selected e Pin selected e Nets and parts selected e No objects selected e A Group of objects selected Note Object selection also effects which Verb commands are available on the Standard toolbar Pop Up Menu Commands Add Item When you choose the Add Item command from the pop up menu a cascading menu with the following commands appears Add Part Adds a part to the schematic Similar to choosing the Add Part icon from the Design toolbox See the Design Operations chapter for more information Add N
241. og box Level 0 is the top design level that contains the design contents Numbered sheets from sheet 1 to 1024 represent the design contents A PowerLogic design cannot exceed a total number of 1024 hierarchical and numbered sheets You can navigate the hierarchy with the View Push and View Pop commands PowerLogic User s Guide 4 8 Design Toolbox When a hierarchical symbol is copied all of the underlying logic represented by the symbol is also copied PowerLogic updates the reference designator names of the underlying symbols There is a one to one correspondence between hierarchy symbols and a schematic sheet The underlying logic for duplicated hierarchical symbols is stored as a unique sheet and can be edited without affecting the logic of other hierarchical symbols Creating a Hierarchical Symbol E You can create a new hierarchical symbol in either a top down or bottom up design structure The symbol creation methodology varies depending on the structure you use Choose the New Hierarchical Symbol icon from the Design toolbox to start the process The Hierarchical Symbol Wizard appears Follow the instructions for Creating a Top down Hierarchy or Creating a Bottom up Hierarchy based on the requirements of your design or your architectural preference Hierarchical Symbol Wizard x Picture Decal Parameters Pin Decal Pin Count Sheet Number PN p lt New Shee Pin Length Pin Sp
242. ogic User s Guide 8 10 Chapter 9 OLE in PowerLogic This chapter discusses PowerLogic s object linking and embedding capabilities This chapter also discusses the Automation features available using Visual Basic scripting The topics in this chapter include OLE Functions in PowerLogic OLE Terminology OLE Object Linking and Embedding Displaying OLE Objects Selecting OLE Objects Moving and Sizing OLE Objects Cutting Copying and Pasting OLE Objects Editing OLE Links OLE Visual Editing Converting OLE Objects and other OLE specific Editing Commands Saving OLE Objects Deleting OLE Objects OLE and Print Plot OLE PowerPCB Connection Visual Basic Scripting OLE Functions in PowerLogic PowerLogic s object embedding capabilities allow design engineers to embed an object into a PowerLogic design file and hold it within its framework You can also link objects to their source so linked objects automatically update each time you open the PowerLogic database OLE functions in PowerLogic include e Object Linking and Embedding e Lets you link or embed objects such as Microsoft Word documents and Microsoft Excel spreadsheets within a PowerLogic design e OLE Cross probing with PowerPCB Lets you link to PowerPCB cross probe perform netlist comparisons and update design rules using OLE PowerLogic User s Guide 9 1 OLE Terminology OLE Terminology Embedded Objects When an object is embedded a copy of the ob
243. on The Clearance Rules dialog box appears A dialog box subtitle states the set of rules for which you are setting Clearance rules Default Class or Net V Clearance Rules Default rules x Toce we Minimum Recommended Maximum E fi 2 12 12 p Same Net Clearance SMD to Via SMD to Cn fiz fiz ViatoVia Pad to Crn r Other Drill to Dril Body to Body fiz fiz i pz fr fiz Trace Width Restricts the trace width to a range of values The Recommended value is the width you want to assign to the trace when routing begins The Minimum and Maximum values are respected by routing routines which must use trace width to achieve some high speed routing functions like impedance matching PowerLogic User s Guide 10 11 Setting Design Rules Same Net Area Applies edge to edge clearance values to items which are in the same net SMD to Via Minimum spacing between a surface mount pad and escape via SMD to Corner Minimum spacing between a surface mount pad and the first trace bend point Via to Via Minimum spacing between two vias in the same net Pad to Corner Minimum spacing between a through hole pad and the first trace bend point Other Clearance Values Area Sets other clearance values Drill to Drill The minimum edge to edge spacing between two drill holes Body to Body The minimum edge to edge spacing between two component bodies Clearance Matrix Area Defines ed
244. on in the library To save a part type 1 2 3 4 Choose File Save Type a name in the Name of Part text box Choose a library location from the Library drop down list box To change the name of the associated decal a Select the decal from the CAE Decal column of the Names of Decals multicolumn list box and choose Edit b Type a new name for the decal Choose OK PowerLogic User s Guide 7 4 Creating Single Gate Parts If the part type already exists the message Part Type item exists Overwrite item Y N appears Choose Yes to overwrite the part or No to cancel the save If you modified the part using Edit Part Hierarchical Symbol to enter the Part Editor the message Update all parts of Part Type appears Choose Yes to update parts on the schematic with the revised library version or No to leave the schematic version of the part unchanged Library Management for Saved Part Types The library directory used for part types and associated decals is described below e Part type data is saved under the name and library chosen in the Save Part and Gate Decals As dialog box e Decals created when editing the part type are saved in the same library as the part type e Decals that are modified but not renamed are saved to the library from which they were opened e Renamed decals whether modified or not if unique across all libraries are saved in the same library as the part type e Renamed decals that are
245. oonoocccncoooocccconononocononononnonnnn eene eene nennen nennen 7 42 Assign Alternatives for Ground Part eee eee 7 43 Creating New Special Symbols from Existing Symbols sssssses 7 44 Special Symbol Naming Conventions ssssssssssee eee eene 7 45 Updating Off page Symbols from the Library ssssssssssssm 7 45 Updating Pins don DIEI TY aa 7 45 Save Off page Symbols to Library sss eee 7 46 Managing Special Symbols in the Library adi e b ibt ie ea moe 7 46 Sette he Oni Gir TOP Zi Plata sida eee Pe ote e dese fefe ten fes 7 46 Lie Teel oce at penc DM br DE 7 46 Chapter 8 Drafting Operations Draf ne VOCUS ON sanas mo nado ando aad ds ohn aK ds oa gu duds eedidiecteidta es 8 1 AGING TERU idee eie A a 8 2 Creatine 2D Line ems a dd i tef i ae 8 4 Modifying 2D Line Items sssesseeeseeeeee ener nenne nennen enne eene annee 8 5 Combining 2D Lim It tus eee ee eere ere ee ea dimid etes 8 7 Adding Drafting Items from a Library sssssssssseee e eere 8 7 Adding Drafting Items to a Library oooooocnnnnoncccnnoonnncnconnononononnnnnonnonnnnronon eene nennen 8 8 Query Modiby x SO 8 8 Querv Modify TEXTI okasioa om ad eaae iia 8 8 Query Modity Drafting ODjeGt tton or er tir tet henn innn oer aces 8 9 Chapter 9 OLE in PowerLogic OLE Functions in PowerLogic ssse EE EEE e en re nn nnn EEE 9 1 OLE Terminology ee eie e eie T E A EAR AU RA A ER EE ete ea o et 9 2
246. oose the Edit Electrical icon from the toolbar The Part Information dialog box appears See the Part Information for Part topic in this chapter for more information Use Pin Count to indicate the total number of pins in the part This is mandatory if there are signal pins in the part that were not added when you created the CAE decal in the steps above Optionally choose the Decals icon from the Part Information dialog box to assign the PCB decal The pin count for the assigned PCB decal must be equal to or greater than the electrical description Choose a Logic Family See the Part Information for Part topic in this chapter for more information Optionally choose Alpha Pins if the part uses alphanumeric characters Optionally choose Signal Pins to assign power and ground signal information Optionally choose Attributes to assign bill of material and part list information Choose OK The Part Editor now displays the CAE Decal Saving the Part to the Library Use the Save Part and Gate Decals As dialog box to save part types to the library You can also rename the associated decal during the save process If you change the pin count or other information in the decal this prevents other parts that use the same decal from being effected Note If you decrease the number of pins in the associated decal the Change Type option in the Query Modify Part dialog box does not update the schematic copy of the part with the modified versi
247. or Operations The sPart Editor 9c c CREER UEM O ED TREE ENTENDER GIRO EOS 7 1 Changing and Updating Library Parts sssssssss emere 7 2 Creating Single Gate Parts sssssssssssssseeeeeeee eene eee nenne nennen ener nens 7 2 Constructinp the Decal ii bin eet dete ein e te t tae t at UR ee p ee ORE aT 7 3 Assigning Electrical Information to the Part eene 7 4 Saving the Part to the Library a CREER RE AR ORTA kes 7 4 PowerLogic User s Guide xi Contents Creating Multigate Parts ooooooccnnonocccoconononononononononanonnononn nn ro cono nr nenne nenne nennen nennen enne 7 7 Assigning Pin Information to the CAE Decal ssssssssee eene 7 8 serbe 7 8 Creatine a New CAE Decal euis cites toe totes estes tam 7 9 Part Information for Part eene rene enne nnne 7 10 General TD 2 42 81 datos is td do date tadaee a acetate e a e AL fof 7 11 Editing Logic Families d seen due A 7 13 PCB Decals Tab wi esci iecit i a RR ERR RR ER EXPERS RR EY XR A 7 14 Gates Mo PP Tn 7 16 Assign Decal to Gate Dialog Box de dee desee a dada dada dudes 7 19 Sienal Bins Taba 7 21 Attributes TAB sete nane anie des 7 22 Alphanumeric Pins Tab 3d a a eade ie eid etl edid di es 7 24 Connector Tabasco dios op oU he OPE ERG IU OO DR ee qu tq CR qr e 7 25 Creating New Parts from Fxisting PAIS ons aen uns D tad be atate e t na 7 26 Select Type of Editing Item ee e ete e daten 7 27 Creating a NEW CORMECIOM s sie m oeste be Sed e b beso aient b
248. or modifications to the Licensed Products performed by other than authorized PADS service personnel e casualty natural or unnatural disasters theft loss strikes riot war the unauthorized acts of third parties f failure or interruption of any electrical power telephone or communication line or like cause or g any other cause external to the Licensed Products except ordinary use 10 2 Service at Licensee s location 11 INDEMNIFICATION LIMITATION ON LIABILITY The Customer agrees to indemnify defend and hold PADS harmless against any and all claims costs losses damages liabilities and expenses including reasonable attorneys fees and costs and reasonable amounts paid in settlement incurred by PADS that arise out of or relate to any claim suit action or proceeding threatened or commenced by the Customer or any third party in respect of death or injury damage or loss resulting from or which is alleged to result from the operation of the licensed Products or the system on which such are used except to the extent it is determined that such claims costs losses damages liabilities and expenses resulted from the willful misconduct of PADS IN NO EVENT WILL PADS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES INCLUDING LOST PROFITS FOR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT INCIDENTAL or CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCT WHETHER CLAIMED UNDER THE LICENSE AGREEMENT OR OTHERWISE 12 ACKNOWLEDGMENT The Customer acknowledges
249. or stes ae De ber e acota 7 28 Assign Alternatives for CONDE o Red ed b a tu E MORE UNE 7 29 Browse for Special Symbols diodo bea RE E AE EN 7 29 Greatine adNew Pin Declara ai re ee om set he ere eu 7 30 Managing Pin Deals niet sea d OR RR OR ORO Y dde de 7 31 Get Gate Decal from Library eee nennen 7 32 Get Part Type from Library ooooonncccnnnicnnonccinonncnonncnnnnnnnonnn cono S 7 33 Part Editor Drafting Toolbox A 7 34 De tb dett intet tit bett us 7 34 Termah ROOD RS seio dete e ettet en ettet utente tete Fus i o 7 35 a enmt Sas rhet i e eti e e ides e eU e eee ertum a 7 36 Changing Pin Decals a 7 37 SECO Pin Numbers se eee iei ete ete xt ete d Gd dete nens 7 37 Changing Pin Numbers ccc cece eee eee eene eene ene aa n nennen enne eee nnns 7 37 Setting Pin Names iueeeseceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee ehe ees 7 38 Changing Pin Names e ER tiec etia te e e Rehd e 7 38 SEL Pip Ty DOS died 7 38 Setting PIO SWaps d ai ed eed 7 39 Ghangine Sequence NUImDeES s re cte ee feriis vs fe dpt e cet ee dom Aceite rec tds 7 39 PowerLogic User s Guide xii Contents PEA DOS iii AAA De DR E 7 40 Creating New Special Symbols cccecccceeccceeeceeeeeeeeceeeeeeseeeceneeecsaeeesneeeseaeeessueeeenireseaaes 7 40 Select PIN Dec dia tirate dl aust aust nah petente the tta s 7 41 Assign Alternatives for Off page Part sensein a R Ee eere eene 7 41 Assign Alternatives for Power Part o
250. or which you define swap IDs and alternate decals You cannot modify the gate name Swap ID Swaps gates with the same Swap ID number If it is valid to swap the selected gate with another gate in the list assign a Swap ID to the gate To disable swap for the gate type a value of 0 Double click the Swap entry to edit or select the Swap entry and choose Edit Type a Swap ID between 0 and 100 in the text box CAE Decal 1 4 Define up to four alternate Logic decals for the gate You do not have to define alternates Double click the CAE decal to edit or select the CAE decal entry and choose Edit Type an alternate decal name in the text box or choose the Browse button to search for a decal from a library When you choose Browse the Assign Decal to Gate dialog box appears This dialog box works identically to the PCB Decals tab Edit Edits an entry in a multicolumn list box column Select the entry you want to edit and choose Edit You can also double click on the entry to edit it PowerLogic User s Guide 7 17 Part Information for Part Add Gate Adds a gate to the part The gate appears in the Gates multicolumn list box The first gate is automatically designated A the second gate B and so forth When you select a gate the Pins multicolumn list box shows the pin information for the selected gate Delete Gate Removes the selected gate from the Gates multicolumn list box The gates following the removed gate are automatically
251. ore information 1 Set the filter to search for specific decals for example CON to search for connector symbols Choose a decal from the list Choose OK PowerLogic User s Guide 7 29 Creating New Parts from Existing Parts Browse for Special Symbols x 12 Decals common 5V common 5VA Cancel Help r Filter Library All Libraries E Items Decals Displays the decals that PowerLogic matched to the search filter settings Choose the decal you want to use from this list The selected decal appears in the area to the left of the list box Filter Searches the selected library for a specific part or item name or for names that match a wildcard text string See the Preface for more information Creating a New Pin Decal Pin Decals represent the terminal pins on a part You can make a copy of an existing pin decal and modify it or you can create a new pin decal To create a new pin decal from an existing pin decal 1 Choose Tools Part Editor to enter the Part Editor 2 Choose File Open The Select Type of Editing Item dialog box appears 3 Choose Pin Decal 4 Choose OK The Pin Decal Browse dialog box appears 5 Choose an existing pin decal from the Pins area The highlighted decal appears in the Picture area 6 Choose OK 7 Modify the graphics for the decal and position the text strings as required 8 Choose File Save As The Save Item to Library dialog box appears 9 Typ
252. ormat 2 4 netlist output 2 6 p padsnet asc 11 11 Palette 3 8 Parallel checks 10 8 Parallel rules 10 16 Parent sheet 4 34 PowerLogic User s Guide 7 10 7 27 7 29 assigning alternates for ground part 7 43 assigning alternates for off page 7 41 assigning alternates for power part 7 42 changing parts 7 2 check part 7 46 creating CAE decals 7 9 creating connectors 7 28 creating multigate parts 7 7 creating parts 7 26 creating pin decals 7 30 creating new special symbols from existing symbols 7 44 creating single gate parts 7 2 decal wizard 7 34 get gate decal from library 7 32 get part type from library dialog box 7 33 managing special symbols in the library 7 46 modifying parts 1 29 overview 7 1 reviewing parts statistics 7 11 save part and gate decals 7 6 saving a modified decal 7 5 selecting gate decals 7 8 selecting pin decals 7 41 setting the part origin 7 46 special symbol naming conventions 7 45 special symbols 7 29 7 40 terminal toolbox 7 35 update off page from library 7 45 update pins from library 7 45 Part filter 1 14 Part information dialog box 7 10 alphanumeric pins tab 7 24 attributes tab 7 22 connector tab 7 25 gates tab 7 16 general tab 7 11 PCB decals tab 7 14 signal pins tab 7 21 In 10 Part statistics report 11 13 Part statistics reviewing 7 11 Part text visibility dialog box 4 29 Part text visibility query modify 5 7 Part
253. ose Tools Save OffPage to Library to open this dialog box 1 Choose the symbol to update 2 Choose OK The selected item is opened in the Part Editor 3 Modify the symbols as required 4 Choose File Save Follow the prompts to replace the versions currently in the library and update the symbols in the schematic Managing Special Symbols in the Library Special symbols create off page reference power and ground symbols and connectors The default location of these special symbols is the padspwr lib common library Reinstalling the library overwrites the padspwr lib common library If you modify a special symbol and want to keep the change use Library Export to transfer the symbol from the padspwr lib common library to your padspwr lib usr library or another library name Setting the Origin for a Part Use Setup Set Origin to specify a new origin for a CAE Decal When you add a part in PowerLogic the point of insertion is determined by the origin of the decal While creating or modifying a decal 1 Choose Setup Set Origin 2 Indicate a new origin An information window with the new X Y coordinate appears 3 Choose Yes to accept the new origin Check Part Use Tools Check Part to verify that a part contains all necessary information for use in a design and that no errors are present unnumbered terminals duplicate terminal numbers proper gate assignments etc Error messages appear on the screen PowerLogic does not
254. otter supports full 360 degree circular interpolation Plotting Sizes Area Lists plotting sizes Choose the icon for the plotting size you want to use If you choose Other define a paper size by X and Y dimensions in inches PowerLogic User s Guide 11 10 Creating Reports Suppress Repeated Coordinates Eliminates repeated coordinates from the output file PostScript Printing to a File PowerLogic supports PostScript printing to a file using the Windows Print Manager For information on using the Print Manager refer to the Microsoft Windows User s Guide To create a PostScript file set the printer to print to a file in the Print Manager Setting the Printer to Print to a File Using the Print Manager In Windows 95 and Windows NT 4 0 1 2 Di 4 Choose Start Settings Printers Select the PostScript printer you want to use to print to a file Choose File Properties For Windows 95 choose the Details tab in the Properties dialog box For Window NT 4 0 choose the Ports tab in the Properties dialog box For Windows 95 choose FILE in the Print to the following port drop down list box For Windows NT 4 0 choose FILE as the port option Choose OK You are now set up to print to a file Creating Reports Use the Reports dialog box to produce any of six different types of reports on the current schematic You can save these reports as text files on your hard disk or output them to a printer 1 Choose Report fro
255. ou can place the default or choose Alternate from the pop up menu Optionally you can rotate or mirror the symbol by choosing the appropriate command from the pop up menu 3 Locate the cursor and double click to end the connection or choose Complete from the pop up menu PowerLogic User s Guide 4 6 Design Toolbox 4 Type the net name in the dialog box and choose OK The sheet number for the connecting symbol appears next to the off page symbol if the Show Off Page Reference option is on in the Design tab of the Preferences dialog box Note If you display the off sheet numbers you can line them up or stack them by specifying Numbers per Line in the Design tab Adding Power and Ground Connections When you connect a part to ground or power nets the normal convention is to use a special symbol to represent the net The ground symbol ties the connection to ground The power symbol adds voltage to connections 1 To add a power or ground symbol 2 Specify the connection as described in the Adding Connections topic in this chapter 3 Choose Ground or Power from the pop up menu The symbol attaches to the connection and follows the cursor movement Optionally you can rotate or mirror the symbol by choosing the appropriate command from the pop up menu You can also modify the symbol representation by choosing Alternate from the pop up menu Choose Display PG Name from the pop up menu to toggle the visibility of the net n
256. outing or High speed rules for a net class Choose the appropriate icon Clearance Opens the Clearance Rules dialog box where you set net class Clearance rules See the Clearance Rules topic in this chapter for more information Routing Opens the Routing Rules dialog box where you set net class Routing rules See the Routing Rules topic in this chapter for more information High speed Opens the High speed Rules dialog box where you set net class High Speed rules See the High speed Rules topic in this chapter for more information When you select a class name an icon appears below each rule type to indicate the hierarchy level where the rule is defined for that class For example a class with only Clearance rules defined has a class icon below the Clearance icon and Default icons below the Routing and High Speed icons Report Produces a Class rules report See the Rules Report topic in this chapter for more information Show Classes with Rules Lists only classes with at least one set of rule definitions Nets Area Adds or removes selected nets from the net class Choose a class in the list box to display nets in the Available and Selected list boxes or choose the Add button to create a new class To assign nets to a class choose the nets in the Available list box and choose Add Note A net can only belong to one net class The Available list box only contains nets that do not belong to a net class To d
257. ovides net names in the new design followed by unmatched pins in the net If the net does not exist in the old design all pins in the net are listed Attribute differences This section of the report lists each object under the headings Attribute Name Old Value and New Value Subheadings including object type object name in old design and object name in new design appear for each object in the list if different Attribute differences are included only for objects that exist in both the old and new design If an attribute is missing in either design the value is listed as lt no attr gt If the attribute exists but has no value it is listed as no value PowerLogic User s Guide 2 11 ECO Operations Generate ECO File Allows you to specify the name of the ECO file you want to create You can type a path and filename or use Browse to locate a file The ECO file contains the differences between the original and the new file in ECO commands Once the ECO file is created update the original design by importing this ECO file Compare Attributes Restricts design comparison to only ECO registered attributes for PowerPCB version 3 designs only Turn off this check box to compare all attributes Note Via attributes are not registered attributes and cannot be added deleted or changed during the ECO process Include Value and Tolerance Controls whether the part value and tolerance fields for resistors capacitors etc
258. own as t routing Auto Route An autorouter can route the net Allow Ripup An autorouter can automatically rip up and reroute a routed net Interactive routing checks this setting You can rip up traces when you edit them if this check box is on You must turn this check box on if you want to unroute traces while using DRC Warn or Prevent Allow Shove An autorouter can move a routed net Interactive routing checks this setting You can shove traces when you edit them if this check box is on You must turn this check box on if you want to shove traces while using DRC Warn or Prevent Priority The priority an autorouter uses Specify a value from 0 to 100 Nets with higher priority are routed first Layer Biasing Area Restricts nets to certain layers for routing 1 Select the layers you want to restrict nets to in the Available Layers list box 2 Choose Add to add them to the Selected Layers list box To unrestrict layers 1 Select the layers you want unrestricted in the Selected Layers list box 2 Choose Remove to move them back to the Available Layers list box Nets are restricted to layers specified in the Selected Layers list box If the Available Layers list box is empty the net has no layer restrictions Vias Area Restricts which via types to use 1 Select the vias you want to use in the Available Vias box 2 Choose Add to add them to the Selected Vias list box To unrestrict via types 1 Select vias in the Selecte
259. owse and use the filter in the Get Part type from Library dialog box to locate the part Use the wildcard convention with or without leading characters to expand or narrow the filter Choose Apply to activate the filter See the Get Part type from Library Dialog Box topic in this chapter for more information 3 Choose a part and choose OK The part attaches to and follows the cursor movement Optionally you can rotate or mirror the item before you indicate its location Choose a pop up menu command as often as needed to set the correct orientation of the item See the Add Part Pop up Menu topic in this chapter for more information 4 Indicate the part location After you place one part another instance attaches to the cursor Optionally you can add multiple copies of the item after the initial part location is indicated Choose Step and Repeat from the pop up menu See the Step and Repeat topic in this chapter for more information 5 When you finish adding parts choose Cancel from the pop up menu The sixteen most recently used parts are available in the Part Name drop down list box You can clear this buffer by removing the entries in the powerlogic ini file under the Last Added Parts heading Get Part type from Library Dialog Box When you choose the Browse button from the Add Part dialog box the Get Parttype from Library dialog box appears AE Part type from Library common x DIP10 Parts common DIP12 co
260. ox 2 Type a name for the new decal in the Decal text box 3 Choose OK from the information window 4 Create the new decal Creating a New CAE Decal Creating a CAE Decal follows the same basic steps as creating a new packaged part The following steps place PowerLogic directly into decal editing mode 1 Choose Tools Part Editor to enter the Part Editor 2 Choose File New The Select Type of Editing Item dialog box appears See the Select Type of Editing Item topic in this chapter for more information Choose CAE Decal 4 Choose OK Four text entries appear in the work area U999 The default space reserved for the reference designator in the schematic Part Name The default location of the part type name in the schematic Free Label 1 The default location for the first attribute label See the Using Attribute Labels topic in the Working with Attributes chapter for more information on creating additional attribute labels Free Label 2 The default location for the second attribute label 5 Construct the new CAE decal for the part manually or use the Decal Wizard automatic part creation tool See the Constructing the New Part topic in this chapter for more information 6 Save the decal to the library See the Saving the Part to the Library topic in this chapter for more information PowerLogic User s Guide 7 9 Part Information for Part Constructing the New Part To manually construct the new part
261. ox to change the number assigned to a pin This command does not check for duplicate numbering 1 Choose the Change Pin Number icon from Terminal toolbox 2 Select the pin requiring a new number 3 Type the new pin number in the information window 4 Choose OK Use the Set Pin Number icon from the Terminal toolbox to assign numbers to several pins in an ascending sequence PowerLogic User s Guide 7 37 Terminal Toolbox Setting Pin Names Use Set Pin Name from the Terminal toolbox to add or to change the name for several pins Use pin names to label the function of a pin for example CLK DATAO etc The suffix of the name is incremented each time you select a pin This command does not check for duplicate naming conventions Precede the text with a backslash to add a bar over text characters 1 Choose the Set Pin Name icon from the Terminal toolbox 2 Type the pin name in the information window 3 Choose OK 4 Select each pin to which to assign a name To skip a name select the same pin until the correct pin name appears then continue selecting other pins 5 Choose Cancel from the pop up menu when you finish Use the Change Pin Name icon from the Terminal toolbox to change the name of a single pin Changing Pin Names Use Change Pin Name from the Terminal toolbox to change the name assigned to a single pin Use pin names to label the function of a pin for example CLK DATAO etc This command does not
262. p have an off page reference symbol added at the break point Once in the buffer you can use Edit Paste to place the copy anywhere on the design or you can close the design and open a different design to paste into You can paste the same copy repeatedly the copy remains in the temporary file until it is overwritten by a new copy action Copy as Bitmap The Copy as Bitmap command lets you define a rectangular area to copy graphics information to the temporary grp file as a bitmap image Once copied you can for example switch to Microsoft Word and use the Edit Paste command to insert the bitmap into a document To create a bitmap 1 Area select the area to copy 2 Choose Edit Copy as Bitmap All items in the rectangle including the background dot grid color etc are copied Open the application in which to place the bitmap and use the Paste command to place the image Note In addition to creating a bitmap of a defined area you can copy the entire work area as a picture to insert using the Paste Special command in products that support this feature Query Modify 9 Choose the Query Modify icon to place PowerLogic in Query Modify mode Use this mode to get information on and modify objects in PowerLogic When you select an object in Query Modify mode a dialog box or information window appears PowerLogic User s Guide 4 26 Query Modify Query Modify Part Use the Query Modify Part dialog box to create and edit
263. part options You can also define signal pins and control the visibility of options assigned to the part ie 1 Choose the Query Modify icon from the toolbar 2 Select the part to modify by selecting a construction line or text string associated with the part The Query Modify Part dialog box appears 3 Change the settings then choose Close This dialog box contains several other dialog boxes Before you can use any of these other dialog boxes apply changes you make in the Query Modify Part dialog box to the design m Reference Designator u1 eby Rename Gate Rename Part m Part Type Visibility 87C256 On Change Type m Part Information PCB Decal 5028 Pin Text Visibility On Pin Count s Signal Pin Count 2 Logic Family TTL Gate Count 1 Unused 0 Statistics Gate Decal m Modify e Visiblity Attributes PCB Decals SigPins Rename Gate Changes the reference designator of the selected gate You cannot assign reference designators already in use or an unused gate of a part with a different part type 1 Choose Rename Gate from the Query Modify Part dialog box An information window appears 2 Type the new gate reference designator information 3 Choose OK PowerLogic User s Guide 4 27 Query Modify Rename Part Changes the reference designator for the selected part or gate All gates are renamed if you change the reference designator of one gate of a multigate part
264. part to add or to modify the signal pins of by selecting a construction line or text string associated with the part EE 3 Choose the Signal Pins icon from the Query Modify Part dialog box The Query Modify Part Signal Pins dialog box appears 4 Choose an unused pin then choose Add You can also assign a signal name and trace width in the Signal Pins area Use the Apply Update area to apply the signal pin changes to the selected part or all parts of the same type PowerLogic User s Guide 4 29 Query Modify Change Part Type Dialog Box Use Change Type to change the selected part to a new part type which can already exist in the schematic or in the library Choose Change Type from the Query Modify Part dialog box The Change Part Type dialog box appears 7400 Part Types 7402 i 67404 ARTES ti 7404 CC Replace Common ti 24044 67405 Iv Keep Local ti 7405 CC zi Filter Apply update to Library on d All Libraries b C This Part Items C All Parts This Type Cancel Help Part Types Displays in the list box the part types that PowerLogic matched to the search filter settings Choose the part you want to change from this list The decal of a selected part displays in the area to the left of the list box Replace Common Updates common attributes with the values contained in the new part Keep Local Retains attributes in the current part even if they do not exist in the new part
265. parts that have either a different Value or Tolerance attribute as different part types Separate Reference Designator Combines into a single report entry any parts that have identical attribute values that only differ by their reference designators This reduces the BOM report size For example if U1 through U10 U12 and U16 to U18 are all identical parts then PowerLogic generates one entry with the reference designator column containing the string U1 10 U12 U16 18 When turned on parts always appear on separate lines Sort By Sorts the report list by the specified attribute If the sort field is off parts are sorted by Part Type name File Format Specifies the output file format Settings Saves BOM format settings for the current design to a specified file allowing you to create different format configurations for different designs When you finish setting the format choose Save and type a filename in the Save Scheme dialog box PowerLogic saves BOM format settings files in the padspwr powerlogic directory with a bom extension Choose Delete to remove the selected setting file from the drop down list box PowerLogic User s Guide 11 19 Creating Reports Clipboard View Tab The Clipboard View allows you to preview the Bill of Materials report format and copy any selected lines of the file to a Windows Clipboard The default view orders the attributes by a sort field you specify in the Format tab dialog To sort rows
266. pter for more information uy Swap Reference Exchanges the selected reference designators Designator See the Swapping Reference Designators topic in this chapter for more information gt Swap Pins Exchanges the selected pins See the Swapping Pins topic in this chapter for more information Adding Parts 3 Use the Add Part icon to load a part from a library into the current schematic drawing PowerLogic automatically assigns a reference designator when you add the part See the Adding Single Gate Parts and Adding Multigate Parts topics in this chapter for more information See the Copy Mode topic in this chapter for information on adding parts by making copies of parts that already exist in the schematic To add a part from the library 1 Choose the Add Part icon from the Design toolbox or choose Add Item Add Part from the pop up menu The Add Part dialog box appears Part Name Browse Cancel Help Part Name Specifies the part that is identified for adding To use a different part type the full part name Browse Opens the Get Part type from Library dialog box for library searching PowerLogic User s Guide 4 2 Design Toolbox 2 Type a part or choose one from the drop down list box If the list does not contain the part you need you can enter a part prefix followed by the asterisk character then choose Browse to retrieve the part from the available libraries You can also just choose Br
267. pts or a master script For example Include scriptA bas Include scriptB bas SInclude scriptC bas Sub Main Call scriptA Call script B Call script C End Sub Open Loads a new script file into the editor You can load up to nine scripts at a time Save Saves a script file to the padspwr logicole vbscripts directory with a bas extension Save All Saves all scripts currently loaded Print Prints a script file Cut Cuts the highlighted code to the Clipboard Copy Copies the highlighted code to the Clipboard Paste Pastes the selection from the Clipboard into the text window PowerLogic User s Guide 9 19 Visual Basic Scripting Undo Reverses the last action taken Redo Reverses an undo action Object Browser Opens the Object Browser dialog box This dialog box shows all objects available in PowerLogic such as Component Application and Pin and lists the properties and methods for each object Run Runs a script Pause Pauses a running script Stop Ends a running script Breakpoint Places or removes a break point Show Current Statement Moves the cursor before the Visual Basic statement that will be executed next Used during debugging when execution is paused Watch Watch a variable Step Into Enters the line of code at the cursor location Step Over Steps over the line of code at the cursor location Step Out Steps out of the
268. r to the Left Vertical Up at the Center or Down PowerLogic User s Guide 8 3 Drafting Toolbox Creating 2D Line Items LE To add drafting objects such as polygons circles rectangles paths and arcs to polygons or paths choose the Create 2D Line icon from the Drafting toolbox This changes the default pop up menu to a specific pop up menu for creating 2D line items 1 2 From the Drafting toolbox choose the Create 2D Line icon Click the right mouse button to display a pop up menu Set one or more of the following values before you add the drafting object Shape Choose to add a Polygon Circle Rectangle or Path Width Specify a width value to override the default Orthogonal Adds segments in 90 degree increments Diagonal Adds segments in 45 degree increments Any Angle Adds segments at any angle Adding Polygons or Paths To add polygons or paths with or without arcs 1 2 3 4 5 Choose the Create 2D Line icon from the Drafting toolbox Choose Polygon or Path from the pop up menu Indicate the start point A line follows the cursor movement Indicate the next corner Continue adding corners in the same manner If you want to add an arc rather than a straight segment choose Add Arc from the pop up menu Press BackSpace or choose Del Corner from the pop up menu to remove the last corner Double click to finish adding Polygons automatically close paths terminate at the last defined corner Addi
269. ration 3 Choose the Preview button to view the placement of the multiple objects based on the options you set The placement of the objects is based on the location of the original object selected You can not place objects until you preview the placement Note Zoom Mode is available during Step and Repeat 4 Once the placement preview is correct choose OK to place the objects After using Step and Repeat the original dynamic object is still attached to the cursor You can continue to add or copy using this object or you can press Esc to end the operation Step and Repeat Lx Preview Direction Defines the direction of the replication in the array For example if you choose Right the copies flow directly to the right of the original Count Sets the number of replications in the array Type the number of copies you want to place in the text box or click on the arrow buttons Distance Sets the distance between each copy of the object in the array based on the current Snap to Grid preference settings Type the distance value in the text box or click on the arrow buttons Preview When pressed displays a preview of the array The OK button is not available until you preview the Step and Repeat operation Copying Connections When copying connections only connections with valid start and end points remain after the Step and Repeat operation even if invalid connections appear during Preview A copied connectio
270. rc from a segment or corner splitting a segment changing the line width of an item filling a closed polygon or changing the line style to solid or dotted Combine Uncombine Combines selected line items into a complex line item or breaks combined line items into individual items Add from Library Adds a 2D line item from a library Save to Library Save a 2D line item to a library See the Drafting Toolbox topic in the Drafting Operations chapter for more information on these commands Modify Part When you choose the Modify Part command from the pop up menu a cascading menu with the following commands appears Edit Part Hierarchy Select this command and then select a part in the schematic to open the Part Editor Starts the Part Editor disabling the PowerLogic Schematic Editor Swap Reference Designator With no objects selected choose Modify Part Swap Ref Des from the pop up menu and then choose the parts you want to swap PowerLogic User s Guide 1 29 Pop Up Menus Swap Pins This command appears on two pop up menus With one pin selected using the Pins Filter on the Object Selector toolbar choose Swap Pins from the pop up menu With no objects selected choose Modify Part Swap Pins from the pop up menu and then choose the two pins you want to swap A prompt provides you with the opportunity to keep the connections tied to the current electrical pin or to swap the electrical connections along with the pin num
271. rea Use it to pan and zoom Snap to Grid check box Causes the cursor to snap to the current design grid if checked For more details see the Setting Preferences topic in the Design Setup chapter The net name and pin connects of a selected connection and part details of a selected part PowerLogic User s Guide 1 19 Controlling the View To display the status window choose Window Status Asu Mm E 80 U2D 8 5 U4B 12 L Using the Postage Stamp The postage stamp at the bottom of the status window uses a color rectangular image to show the relationship between the drawing format and the current view In the default startup state you can use the postage stamp to relocate the current zoom view to another part of the design To move the view use the left mouse button to click the part of the postage stamp which represents area you want to view The work area pans to that section e The white rectangle represents the drawing format outline e The empty black rectangle represents the screen view e The postage stamp perimeter represents the viewing bit map When you redraw the graphics are actually stored in the viewing bit map you can think of this as an invisible screen that is larger than the screen you can see A part of the bit map is copied to the screen to view When you pan a different part of the bit map is copied to the screen this is how smooth scrolling is implemented To pan the view 1 Move the cur
272. rea is the area of the board that PowerLogic can scroll across at any given zoom level Type a value in pixels Use Bitmap Turns the bitmap area in the Status Window on or off Turn it off to save memory or speed screen redraws If you turn the bitmap area off use the middle mouse zoom commands or the Status Window to scroll around the work area Cursor Style Displays the cursor as an arrow normal small cross large cross or full screen crosshair Choose a cursor style from the drop down list box Diagonal Cursor Displays the cursor diagonally Keep View on Resize Maintains the proportional scale and the same area of the screen in the window when you resize the view PowerLogic User s Guide 3 2 Setting Preferences Display Dot Grid Defines the spacing for the dot grid display in the work area This grid is a visible guide for drawing lines decals connections etc It is independent of the system grid on the Status Bar To change the display grid enter the new value in units of 2 mil increments If the grid is not visible when the work area redraws you probably set an interval that is too small to display at all zoom levels Zoom in several times to display the grid A reasonable value for the display grid is 500 or 1000 Real time Redraw Displays items one by one as they redraw rather than all at once When this check box is off your screen pauses until all objects are ready to redraw Turning Real time Redra
273. renamed in sequential order Unused Pins Lists all of the unused pins for the selected gate Add pins to the gate by selecting them from the Unused Pins list and choosing Add You can select multiple unused pins Add Pin Adds the selected pin s from the Unused Pins list to the selected gate You can add multiple pins at one time Remove Pin Removes the selected pin s from the selected gate The pin returns to the Unused Pins list You can remove multiple pins at one time Pins Multicolumn List Box Lists the pins defined for the selected gate Sequence Shows the mapping of the terminal number sequence to the pin and automatically maps the sequence to alternates In other words it shows how pins appear on the gate decal therefore in Gate A sequence number 1 could be pin 1 but in Gate B sequence number 1 would be pin 4 This option is mainly beneficial for PowerLogic users Pin Lists the pins assigned to the selected gate Type Assigns the pin type for example Source or Load Double click the Type entry to edit or select the Type entry and choose Edit Choose the Type you want to assign from the drop down list box Name Assigns a name to the pin for documentation purposes A pin name is not required Double click the Name entry to edit or select the Name entry and choose Edit Type a name for the pin in the text box PowerLogic User s Guide 7 18 Part Information for Part Swap Assigns a Swap ID to a pin If it i
274. ribute and automatically assign it to every part in your design You can also rename an attribute in or delete an attribute from the schematic All parts are automatically updated Note This dialog box does not manage attributes in the library Use the Manage Library Attributes dialog box to manage attributes in your libraries See the Managing Attributes in the Library topic in the Library Operations chapter for more information PowerLogic User s Guide 5 2 Creating New Attributes in a Schematic Manage Schematic Attributes x Attributes in Schematic Browse Lib Attr 50v Attributes Selected for Rename Edit New Name COLOR CORE LOSS Old Name New Name Geometry height VOLTAGE RATING MFG 1 VOLTAGE RATING VOLTAGE RATING Add Attr Delete Attrs Rename Ans Help Attributes in Schematic Lists the attributes in the open schematic design file Add Adds selected attributes in the Attributes in Schematic list box to the Attributes Selected for Rename multicolumn list box Once attributes are listed in the Attributes Selected for Rename multicolumn list box you can specify a new name for the attribute Remove Removes selected attribute names from the Attributes Selected for Rename multicolumn list box and places them in the Attributes in Schematic list box Removed attributes are renamed Remove All Removes all attribute names from the Attributes Selected for Rename multicolumn list box an
275. rigin Displays the 0 0 coordinate location X Y coordinates are calculated from this point PowerLogic User s Guide 1 3 Menu Commands Status Bar Displays information on a selected connection route or component Line Width Displays the default line width setting Design Grid Displays the design grid setting X Y Coordinates Displays the horizontal distance of the cursor from 0 0 as the X coordinate Displays the vertical distance of the cursor from 0 0 as the Y coordinate Work Area This is the area where all design information is displayed Shows the origin 0 0 coordinate marker and display grid The display grid is a drafting aid set in the Preferences dialog box using the Global tab Menu Commands File Menu ga New Clears the current design file if one is loaded or erases any existing objects If data exists a warning window appears to confirm the action Open Opens the File Open dialog box Save Saves the changes to the current schematic If this is a new unnamed schematic the File Save As dialog box appears PowerLogic User s Guide 1 4 Menu Commands Save As Opens the File Save As dialog box and automatically places the name of the currently open file in the filename box You can save an existing file with a new name or to a different directory using Save As Import Opens the File Import dialog box Export Opens the File Export dialog box Library Opens the L
276. rmation 2 E 4 Choose the New Hierarchical Symbol icon from the Design toolbox The Hierarchical Symbol Wizard dialog box appears Choose an existing sheet from the Sheet Number drop down list box 6 Type the symbol name in the Sheet Name text box 7 Choose the Pin Decal for both input and output pins from the appropriate drop down list box Once you have specified the pin details you can optionally choose Preview to display the symbol outline The number of input output pins is grayed because PowerLogic knows the number of pins of each pin type on an existing sheet 8 Choose OK The hierarchical symbol appears in the Part Editor window An input or output pin is added in the symbol for each off page reference 9 Choose File Complete This closes the Part Editor and the new symbol follows the cursor movement 10 Move the symbol and indicate its location You can navigate this hierarchy with the View Push and View Pop commands PowerLogic User s Guide 4 11 Design Toolbox Modifying a Hierarchical Symbol To modify a hierarchical symbol 1 Choose the Edit Part Edit Hierarchical Symbol icon from the Design toolbox 2 Select the hierarchical symbol 3 Modify the symbol in the Part Editor 4 Choose File Complete when you finish the changes If you add terminals to a hierarchical symbol ensure that you give them pin names and that the names also appear as off page references in the sheet with the underlying schematic
277. round 4 7 removing from group 4 22 removing outside boundary of group 4 22 splitting 4 21 Connector pins 4 5 adding 4 5 Connector tab part information dialog box 7 25 Connectors creating new 7 28 editing 7 25 Contents command 1 12 Control key shortcuts 1 25 Conventions design xvii documentation xviii Windows xix Converting an OLE object 9 1 9 10 9 11 Coordinate mode 3 14 3 15 Coordinates 1 4 Copper sharing 10 14 Copper thickness 10 20 Copy 1 6 4 26 as bitmap 1 6 4 26 group to file 4 25 hierarchical symbol 4 18 OLE objects 9 8 to file 1 6 Copy mode 4 18 Copy mode icon 1 13 Creating 2D line 8 1 8 attributes 5 1 5 2 In 3 attributes in the library 6 6 bottom up hierarchy 4 11 CAE decals 7 9 connectors 7 28 hierarchical symbols 4 9 labels 5 9 media from current session 1 24 media from previous session 1 25 multigate parts 7 7 netlists 2 5 new symbols from existing symbols 7 44 parts 7 26 PCB file 9 16 pin decals 7 30 reports 11 11 top down hierarchy 4 10 single gate parts 7 2 special symbols 7 40 Visual Basic scripts 9 19 Cross probing 9 13 9 15 Cross talk conditions checking 10 8 Customizing plots 11 2 Customizing PowerLogic 3 1 3 9 Cut 1 6 4 26 OLE objects 9 8 D Data types library 6 2 Database minimum xvii D code 11 8 11 9 Decal alternate assignments 7 19 filtering 7 15 gates 7 17 alternate assignments 7 17
278. roup Operatiofis tata 4 22 Setting a New Origin for the Group eee eere 4 22 Removing Connections Outside the Boundary sse nes 4 22 Adding to or Removing from a Group ssesssessserssstistttstttst tist tist tist tist ties trst EESE rre 4 22 MOVIE A GOD PEOPLE RIA PER rc eared ver Cep A cede e edi ete els 4 23 CODUIDES d CLOUD s estt ct he tet Phot it ete enetne retro ot fre fretis Cre retine Crete re Ere d 4 23 Displaying Groups During Move or Copy sssssseeeemeeennnemnnenennne 4 24 Deletnbs a GIOUpa sudo lida Gite itl C a Motel ore dil coe Hache seid M ea 4 24 Copying a Group to a Bile oo RE RR AA 4 25 Pasting a Group toma Ple eo ARA DAN tent eerie ee ree rere ie anne 4 25 Preserving Refereuce Desigpatots iu stie tones td ten tudtendedteniede eddie iat endt 4 25 Gut Copy and Paste aie oh oe que Rupee dud pn d Mit tte 4 26 CODY as OD D cesare ef fer e dei deese iint 4 26 OUEST UMOOIPY AAA AAA 4 26 Quety MOdGdILy PATES icio eoe ice A D Te e Ede P Cr deg 4 27 Change Part Type Dialog BOX 5 cid cides cheeses ie ien ee oce oe esu de Cos 4 30 Query Modify PCB Decal Assignment ssssssssseeeeeen eene eene 4 31 Get Decal from Library Dialog Box eee eee eene nennen 4 32 Quety Modify Net Name nicas 4 33 Query Modity BusiNAatne sts itus iiine ie ia ie aad d A occa 4 34 Quen Hierarchical Components ensenen ntn tenn ere iwi ire Are er fm hw heo 4 34 Editing Off Page Symbol Sheet Numbers Per Line 4 35 PowerLogi
279. rs to the part types in the copied sheets If the referenced sheet also contains hierarchical symbols then PowerLogic also copies the sheet s referenced by those symbols and so on down the entire sub tree of the hierarchy When you select a hierarchical symbol in copy mode the Copy hierarchical component Are you sure Y N prompt appears If you choose Yes PowerLogic copies the hierarchical symbol and all directly or indirectly referenced sheets If any numbered sheets are referenced PowerLogic assigns the copies new sheet numbers Step and Repeat Use Step and Repeat to multiply objects as you place them during an add or copy operation Step and Repeat is available in the Schematic Editor and the Decal Editor In the Schematic Editor the Step and Repeat command copies parts connections text or drafting items In the Decal Editor the Step and Repeat command copies terminals text or drafting items To use Step and Repeat 1 Select an object during an add or copy operation While a dynamic object is attached to the cursor choose Step and Repeat from the pop up menu The Step and Repeat dialog box appears Note When adding a new object in the Schematic Editor you must place the first object manually before you can use Step and Repeat 2 Setthe options for the array Options include the direction of placement the number of objects to place and the distance between objects PowerLogic User s Guide 4 18 Modes of Ope
280. rt information dialog box 7 22 Auto route 10 14 Automatically updating OLE links 9 10 Automation features in PowerLogic 9 1 9 17 Automation server 9 3 Automation tools 9 13 Autorouter 10 14 Backward annotation 2 8 attribute level 2 15 from PowerPCB 1 10 2 12 gate level 2 14 net level 2 15 part level 2 13 pin level 2 14 Base name 4 14 Biasing layers 10 14 Bill of materials report 11 17 attributes tab bill of materials setup dialog box 11 17 clipboard view tab bill of materials setup dialog box 11 20 format tab bill of materials setup dialog box 11 18 Bit range 4 14 Bitmap copying as 1 6 4 26 BLT modeless command 1 23 BMW modeless command 1 23 bom file 11 19 Breaking OLE links 9 9 Browse library attributes 5 1 6 10 Bus adding 4 13 adding connections to 4 14 deleting a segment 4 15 PowerLogic User s Guide Index extending 4 15 modifying 1 29 moving segment 4 15 naming 4 14 query modify name 4 34 splitting 4 15 Bus name query modify 4 34 Bus toolbox 1 17 4 13 adding bus 4 14 adding connections to a bus 4 14 deleting a bus segment 4 15 extending a bus 4 15 moving a bus segment 4 15 naming a bus 4 14 splitting a bus 4 15 viewing 1 11 1 13 C CAE decal 6 2 creating 7 9 editing 7 1 Cancel xx Capacitance 10 17 Capture view 1 9 1 21 ccf file 3 8 Change pin decal 7 35 Change source dialog box 9 9 Changing a connection
281. rules See the Routing Rules topic in this chapter for more information High speed Opens the High Speed Rules dialog box where you set default High Speed rules See the High speed Rules topic in this chapter for more information PowerLogic User s Guide 10 3 Setting Design Rules Report Produces a rules report See the Rules Report topic in this chapter for more information Class Rules i Use the Class Rules dialog box to define rules that apply to a collection of nets known as WW a net class and to multiple net classes 1 Choose Setup Design Rules The Rules dialog box appears 2 Choose the Class icon The Class Rules dialog box appears 3 Select the net classes you want to define Clearance Routing and High speed rules for and choose the appropriate icon we E Clearance Routing HiSpeed Report 4 Class Rules Help M 0 Default il Class Name Specifies the new or selected class name Class Lists defined net classes by name and parenthetically notes the rules that apply if any to the class Add Defines a class Type a name in the Class Name text box and choose Add Delete Removes the selected class from the list Choose a name in the list box and choose Delete PowerLogic User s Guide 10 4 Setting Design Rules Rename Modifies the class name Edit the name in the Class Name text box and choose Rename Net Class Rules Icons Defines Clearance R
282. rves the right to seek legal action against such attempts 4 LICENSE TERM The license granted under this Agreement shall commence upon delivery of the licensed Products by PADS to the Customer PADS may terminate this license at any time if the Customer neglects or fails i to pay all applicable license fees and maintenance fees within specified payment terms and ii to strictly adhere to any of the Customer s obligations under this Agreement If this license is terminated by PADS the Customer will within 10 days of request by PADS deliver to PADS either all product components including originals updates and copies related documentation security devices Gf applicable and other materials or an affidavit signed by an authorized representative of the Customer attesting to the fact that such have been completely destroyed 5 INSTALLATION Licensee shall be solely responsible to install the Licensed Products unless otherwise agreed upon in writing 6 PROHIBITED ACTS The Customer shall not without the express prior written approval of PADS Gi copy the Licensed Products except to load the Products into the computer or to make a backup copy for security purposes only ii employ any device or instructions with respect to the licensed Products iii modify decode reverse compile or disassemble the Licensed Products iv transfer or assign or attempt to transfer or assign the licensed Products related documentation or the rights under t
283. s A library can contain four kinds of items PCB Decal The graphical representation of the part when it is drawn in the PCB design program This is often referred to as the footprint Part Type Electrical information for the part such as a 74LS02 including logic family attributes pins and gates CAE Decal The graphical representation of a schematic part such as a NOR gate Lines General graphical data you can store in the library such as a company logo to use in any sch file Libraries store decal and part type attributes and attribute labels but they do not store attribute values See the Working with Attributes chapter for more information on using attributes in PowerLogic General Purpose Library Operations Use the following command buttons to perform general purpose library operations New Lib Initializes a library You can create a new library or reinitialize an existing library You cannot reinitialize a library that is marked as read only Lib List Opens the Library List dialog box which lets you specify libraries to search for decals parts and line items Attr Manager Opens the Manage Library Attributes dialog box that lists the attribute names in your libraries and lets you add an attribute to rename an attribute in or delete an attribute from a library See the Creating Attributes in the Library topic in this chapter for more information When you add an attribute in this dialog box each part in t
284. s chapter for more information PowerLogic User s Guide 9 12 Deleting OLE Objects Deleting OLE Objects You can delete OLE linked or embedded objects To delete an OLE object 1 Select the OLE object to delete 2 Choose Edit Delete or press the Delete key You are asked to confirm the deletion 3 Choose Yes to delete the object choose No to return to PowerLogic without deleting the object Note When you delete a sheet with OLE objects on it all of the OLE objects are also deleted OLE and Print Plot You can print OLE linked or embedded objects to any Windows supported printer or plotter You cannot photoplot or pen plot OLE objects Also OLE objects do not appear when previewing prints See the Plot Options dialog box for more information OLE PowerPCB Connection You can link to and cross probe PowerPCB using OLE This new function allows you to receive and send selections start a new PowerPCB session or document and manage certain net preferences This feature also automates certain tasks for you such as netlist comparisons and rules exports Once you connect to PowerPCB you can select objects in PowerPCB and the object is automatically highlighted and centered into the PowerLogic work area To initiate cross probing 1 Choose Tools OLE PowerPCB Connection If PowerPCB is already running PowerLogic automatically connects to it Proceed to Step 3 If PowerPCB is not running the Connect with New PCB Sessio
285. s rather than a single complete part When you use a connector on a schematic the pin number rather than the reference designation increments for example P1 1 P1 2 P1 3 instead of P1 P2 P3 Also you can assign several CAE Decals to a connector for left and right side locations on the schematic and for alternate decals The connectors supplied with PowerLogic use the prefix CON in their name You can open an existing connector to see how connectors are constructed To create a new connector 1 Choose Tools Part Editor El 2 Choose Edit Electrical or choose the Edit Electrical icon from the toolbar The Part Information dialog box appears 3 Turn the Connector check box on This modifies the Part Information dialog box for building a connector See the Connector Tab topic in this chapter for more information 4 Use Pin Count to indicate the number of pins in the connector Type the number of pins for the entire connector not the individual connector symbol Do not include mounting holes in the total E 5 Optionally choose the Decals icon from the Part Information dialog box to assign the PCB decal The pin count for the assigned PCB decal must be equal to or greater than the electrical description 6 Choose the Pin Decals icon from the Part Information dialog box The Assign Alternatives for Connectors dialog box appears PowerLogic User s Guide 7 28 10 11 12 13 Creating New Parts from Existing Parts Ass
286. s File Manager Read Only is an attribute that is set on files using the Windows File Manager The system administrator who owns the files is the only one who can control this process this ensures file protection Allow Search Searches the library when performing operations that involve libraries such as adding parts Turn on this library option if you want PowerPCB to search the library Managing Attributes in the Library Use the Manage Library Attributes dialog box to create new attributes to list the attribute names in your libraries and to add an attribute to rename an attribute in or delete an attribute from the library See the Managing Attributes in a Schematic topic in the Working with Attributes chapter for more information on managing attributes in an open design file Creating Attributes in the Library You can create an attribute that is assigned to every part in a library See the Working with Attributes chapter for more information on creating attributes in PowerLogic To create a new attribute in a library 1 Choose File Library The Library Manager dialog box appears 2 Choose Attr Manager The Manage Library Attributes dialog box appears 3 Choose a library from the Library drop down list box or choose All Libraries to add the attribute to all libraries 4 Choose Add Attr The Add New Attribute to Library dialog box appears 5 Type a name for the attribute in the Attribute Name text box or Choo
287. s dialog box choose Setup Display Colors PowerLogic saves the setup for the schematic with the schematic The color selection for display does not affect plotting of the schematic 4 Display Colors Selected Color SBE BERBER I Ie Y E E O SM O EE NINE MI E UI I FM qn Tes 3 Sheet utine Fig Box Background A Text pi A Foreground N Ref Des _ A Connections Part Type A A Buses E Part Text N A Eras E Pin Numbers A A gat a NetNames E A Hierar dL Vcc Selected Color Area Sets a color to assign to items To change the available colors choose Palette Miscellaneous Area Applies colors including foreground and background to the following items Sheet Outline Palette Default Palette WE Background work area surface Foreground dot grid and highlights Connections Busses Lines Parts Hierarchical components To make an item invisible set it to the Background color Do not set the Foreground color and Background color to the same color PowerLogic User s Guide Setting Colors Titles Area Applies colors to the following text items e Text e Reference Designators e Part Types e Part Text e Pin Numbers e Net Names Two color box columns appear next to the text item list Box indicates the color of the box drawn around the text This box indicates the exact size of the text item when it is plotted thereby helping
288. s valid to swap this pin with another pin in the gate assign a Swap ID to the pin You can swap pins in the same gate with the same Swap ID Double click the Swap entry to edit or select the Swap entry and choose Edit Type a Swap ID in the text box Up and Down Changes the sequence of pins in the decal This changes the order of pins this does not effect the sequence For example if sequence number 1 is pin 1 and you reverse the order of pin 1 and pin 2 sequence number 1 becomes pin 2 Assign Decal to Gate Dialog Box This dialog box appears when you assign an alternate decal to a gate This dialog box works identically to the PCB Decals tab except that it deals with Logic decals instead of PCB decals Alternates for the selected gate appear in the Assigned Decals list box in the same order as you entered them in the Gates list box If necessary you can reorder the alternates using Up and Down in this dialog box The Assign New button applies to Gate decals instead of PCB decals Assign Decal to Gate A of Part PGA 88P Library C padspwr lib common M Cancel Eilter Pin Count Cancel i 88 Apply Help Unassigned Decals Assigned Decals Assign New Assign gt gt lt lt Unassign d Library Lists all libraries Choose the library from which you want to assign decals The available decals from the selected library appear in the Unassigned Decals list box The list ch
289. se Aggressor to specify if a net is an aggressor or source of interference during parallel tandem checks PowerLogic User s Guide 10 16 Setting Design Rules Shielding Area Invokes the arrangement of certain nets to act as shields for others for example the net in Use Net is routed up and down both sides of a selected net to provide protection from interference Note You can only assign nets associated with plane layers in the Layer Definition dialog box to shield other nets If no plane layers exist the Shielding area grays If your router supports shielding you can specify the shield gap value and net to use as the shield in the Gap and Use Net text boxes Although you can create these rule types in PowerLogic and pass them to PowerPCB PowerPCB does not check against these values Rules Area Sets the verify design high speed checking routine that PowerPCB uses Length Sets a minimum and maximum length Stub Length Sets a maximum stub length The stub length is the distance from a T point to the end of the route Delay Sets a minimum and maximum delay time in nanoseconds Capacitance Sets a minimum and maximum capacitance in picofarads Impedance Sets a minimum and maximum impedance in ohms Matching Turns length matching on Length matching is a same length requirement parameter you can pass on to autorouters which support it The value represents the plus or minus tolerance inside which the router determines
290. se Browse Lib Attr to choose an attribute already defined in a different library Choose an attribute name from this dialog box and then choose OK 6 Optionally type a value for the attribute in the Attribute Value text box 7 Choose Close PowerLogic User s Guide 6 6 Managing Attributes in the Library Manage Library Attributes Dialog Box Choose Attr Manager on the Library Manager dialog box to open this dialog box Use this dialog box to list the attribute names in your libraries and to add an attribute to rename an attribute in or delete an attribute from the library When you add an attribute in this dialog box each part in the current library directory is updated to contain the new attribute See the Creating Attributes in the Library topic in this chapter for more information Note This dialog box does not manage attributes in the current design Use the Manage Schematic Attributes Dialog Box to manage attributes in an open design file See the Creating New Attributes in a Schematic topic in the Working with Attributes chapter for more information Manage Library Attributes x Select Library Item Types C Apadspwrilibiconnect lan types y Attributes in Library Attributes Selected for Rename ESTAS Old Name New Name PART DECRIPTION Add gt gt PART DESC PART DESCRIPTON PART NUMBER Remove lt lt Remove All Add Attr Delete Attrs Remame Ans Help Select Library Specifies th
291. se Lib Attr Attribute multicolumn list box Lists assigned attributes and their corresponding values Attribute Lists the attributes assigned to the part Value Lists the value of the attributes assigned to the part To edit an attribute or value double click on the entry to edit or select the entry and choose Edit Type the new attribute or value in the text box Add Adds a new attribute to the part you are editing or creating The attribute is added at the end of the current list You must assign a name to new attributes Delete Deletes the selected attribute from the Attribute multicolumn list box Browse Lib Attr Opens the Browse Library Attributes dialog box that lists all attribute names in all libraries Choose an attribute to add from this list See the Browse Library Attributes Dialog Box topic in the Library Operations chapter for more information PowerLogic User s Guide 7 23 Part Information for Part Alphanumeric Pins Tab Use the Alphanumeric Pins tab in the Part Information dialog box to assign alphanumeric names to pins Alphanumeric pin names are optional often the pin number is sufficient as a pin name To assign alphanumeric names you must first turn on the Alphanumeric Pins for Part check box When this check box is off the rest of the tab grays The pin number displayed in the list box is the CAE decal pin number This allows you to associate the decal pin with the alphanumeric pin name
292. signed by a numeric value The number for classes are 0 if the pin is not to be swapped under any circumstances and 1 through 99 A pin can be swapped with any other pin within the gate which has the same swap class number 1 Choose the Set Pin Swap icon from the Terminal toolbox 2 Type the character that identifies the swap class in the information window 3 Choose OK 4 Select each pin to assign to this swap class 5 Choose Cancel from the pop up menu when you finish setting pin swaps Changing Sequence Numbers H Use Change Sequence Number from the Terminal toolbox to change the sequence for 2 pins in the part The pin sequence number sets a corresponding number for the pins in alternate CAE decals When you assign pin numbers using Set Pin Number or change a pin number using Change Pin Number the same number is assigned to any alternate decals 1 Choose the Change Sequence Number icon from the Terminal toolbox 2 Select the pin requiring a new sequence number 3 Type the new sequence number in the information window 4 Choose OK PowerLogic User s Guide 7 39 Special Symbols Special Symbols Special symbols in PowerLogic include power symbols ground symbols and off page reference symbols PowerLogic allows only one part definition in the library for special symbols For this reason the options for these types gray when you choose File New You can modify the existing symbols and or add new symbols See the
293. sor over the drawing format on the postage stamp and click and hold the left mouse button 2 Move the cursor to drag over the outline The view changes while you drag 3 When you see the view you want to use release the left mouse button To resize the view 1 Position the cursor on the postage stamp at one corner of the new viewing rectangle 2 Click and hold the right mouse button Move the cursor to define the rectangle Release the right mouse button PowerLogic User s Guide 1 20 Controlling the View Using the Numeric Keypad You can also use the numeric keypad located on the far right of most keyboards to control the view The Num Lock light can be on or off except where noted Press To Home Fit the board to the view End Redraw the current view Arrows With Num Lock On pan the viewing window Moves one half the screen width in the direction of the arrow With Num Lock Off move the cursor on grid unit 5 With Num Lock On draw the zoom rectangle Pg Up Zoom In centered at cursor location Pg Dn Zoom Out centered at cursor location Ins Center the view at current cursor location without zooming 1 Position the cursor on the postage stamp at one corner of the new viewing rectangle 2 Click and hold the right mouse button Move the cursor to define the rectangle Release the right mouse button Saving and Restoring Views You can save a work area view for easy restoration 1 Arrange the work area to
294. ss 10 20 Length matching 10 17 Length minimization 10 13 Library 1 5 6 1 adding drafting items from 8 7 adding drafting items to 8 8 adding new attributes to 6 9 7 22 browsing attributes 5 1 6 10 changing ports 7 2 creating attributes in 6 6 data types 6 2 deleting objects 6 4 editing objects 6 3 edit operations 6 3 exporting 6 4 importing 6 4 list 6 2 managing attributes 5 1 6 7 managing special symbols in 7 46 modifying the list order 6 4 new 6 2 new objects 6 3 operations 6 1 selecting 6 2 updating parts 7 2 updating pin from 7 45 updating symbol from 7 45 Library list 6 2 modifying 6 4 Library manager 6 1 6 3 7 10 Library part attributes outputting 2 4 Limits job 11 14 Line width setting 1 4 Lines 6 2 modifying 8 1 8 5 outputting 2 4 Linked objects 9 2 Linking and embedding 9 1 See OLE Links command 1 8 List box xix In 7 log file 3 18 Log test 1 1 dialog box 1 25 Logic families 7 12 adding 7 13 deleting 7 13 dialog box 7 13 editing 7 13 prefix 7 13 logic00 sch 3 4 Macros 1 11 3 10 3 11 and dialog boxes 3 11 assigning shortcut keys 3 13 3 16 coordinate mode 3 14 creating 3 12 3 14 dialog box 3 12 editing 3 13 file format 3 12 files 3 11 macro status dialog box 3 16 mouse compression mode 3 14 overview 3 10 playing back 3 17 record prompt mode 3 14 recording 3 14 recording PowerLogic sessions 3 18 repeating 3 13 runn
295. ss 11 10 Zoom 1 8 1 14 1 19 In 15
296. sses IV All Classes Y Default Rules Class List Dutput 1 RueSels C Rule Values Rule Types Area Selects the rules to report Choose any combination of icons including Differential Pairs to report net pairs Nets Area Reports the specified rules for every net or selected nets Choose All Nets or choose specific nets Classes Area Reports the class rules for every selected rule set Choose All Classes or choose specific net classes PowerLogic User s Guide 10 10 Setting Design Rules Default Rules Reports the default rules for the specified nets and classes Output Area Reports all rules in the current hierarchy that are unique from the default Rule Sets or reports the values of all rules in the current hierarchy level even if they match the default Rule Values Clearance Rules zs Use the Clearance Rules dialog box to define the legal spacing between objects When imported into PowerPCB the On line DRC and Verify Design programs use these rules to check and report clearance violations You can use the Conditional Rules dialog box to save a clearance configuration as a set to apply for a selected item only when it comes in contact with different level of the hierarchical order To open the Clearance Rules dialog box 1 Choose Setup Design Rules The Rules dialog box appears 2 Choose the Default Class or Net icon The appropriate dialog box appears 3 Choose the Clearance ic
297. st pin number 3 Select the pin number to swap with The Keep connections tied to same electrical pin prompt appears Choose Yes to preserve the connections with the pin numbers Choose No to reconnect to the renumbered pins Bus Toolbox El Use the Bus toolbox to define bus structures in PowerLogic A bus is a collection of related connections that are grouped together into a single graphical symbol a special thickened line You can add name modify connect or delete busses as you would connections To make the Bus toolbox visible use the Window Bus Toolbox command or choose the Busses icon from the toolbar Iv 5r a fa Add Bus Adds and names a new bus See the Adding a Bus topic in this chapter for more information Split Bus Bisects a selected segment with a new perpendicular segment See the Splitting a Bus topic in this chapter for more information Es la Extend Bus Continues the bus definition from either end point See the Extending a Bus topic in this chapter for more information ET Move Bus Repositions the selected bus segment See the Segment Moving a Bus Segment topic in this chapter for more information Delete Bus Removes the selected bus segment See the Segment Deleting a Bus Segment topic in this chapter for more information Du PowerLogic User s Guide 4 13 Bus Toolbox Adding a Bus l To add a bus 1 Choose the Busses icon from the toolbar 2 Choose the Ad
298. t limited to any interruptions of service loss of business anticipatory profits or consequential damages resulting from the use of or operation of this software Updates may be made to this documentation and incorporated into later editions ActiveX is a trademark of the Microsoft Corporation Adobe Acrobat Reader is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Inc C LINK is a registered trademark of CAE Technologies Inc DXF and AutoCAD are registered trademarks of Autodesk Inc FLEX m is a registered trademark of Globetrotter Software Inc InstallShield is a registered trademark of the InstallShield Corporation Microsoft and MS DOS are registered trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation PostScript is a trademark of Adobe Systems Inc Pro ENGINEER is a registered trademark of Parametric Technologies Corporation Sax Basic Engine is a trademark of Sax Software Corporation SPECCTRA is a registered trademark of Cadence Design Systems Inc unInstallShield is a trademark of the InstallShield Corporation ViewDraw and Workview are registered trademarks of Viewlogic Systems VBScript Visual Basic Visual C Windows and Windows NT are trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation All products mentioned herein are trademarks of their respective companies First Printing April 1997 Second Edition June 1999 Printed in the United States of America y MA MA Y Contents Preface Welcome to
299. t make a multiple selection in the general area of the object you want to locate then select the particular object from the drop down list box Choose All in List to reselect all of the objects in the multiple selection Note To locate a very small object zoom in on the current sheet then select the object from the drop down list box Another way of locating an object is to type information about the object in the text area of the drop down list box Type the part name gate name part type name net name or pin name of the object you seek in the text area of the drop down list box then press Enter Next Previous The Object Locator group provides an efficient means of locating particular objects in your design Use the Next Previous Object icons to move the selection from one object to the next in the current multiple selection Previous Forward Sheet These icons work like the navigation icons in an Internet browser Choose the Previous Sheet icon to move to a previously viewed sheet Choose the Forward Sheet icon to move to the next sheet in the design Connect Makes an OLE connection to PowerPCB Behaves exactly like choosing Tools OLE PowerPCB Connection See the OLE PowerPCB Connection topic in the OLE in PowerLogic chapter for more information Once connected to PowerPCB the Connection Properties icon becomes available Choosing this icon a second time disconnects from PowerPCB Connection Properties Opens
300. t part not the current version in the schematic See the Query Modify Part topic in the Design Operations chapter for information on updating parts on the schematic with the modified version See the Updating Off page from Library and Updating Pins from Library topics in this chapter for information on updating special symbols on the schematic with those from the library Creating Single Gate Parts Below is the basic procedure for creating a single gate part in PowerLogic Single gate parts are parts that are represented by a single schematic symbol for example an application specific integrated circuit There are many steps used to create a new part but there are dialog boxes and information windows to help you Refer to the referenced documentation in the steps below for additional information In the following steps you create the CAE decal that shares the same name as the part type before entering electrical information If you want to use an existing CAE decal instead of creating a new one enter the electrical information first See the Creating Multigate Parts topic in this chapter for the sequential steps 1 Choose Tools Part Editor to enter the Part Editor PowerLogic enters part creation mode D 2 Choose Edit Gate or choose the Edit Gate Decal icon from the toolbar 3 Choose OK to create a decal for the new part Four text entries appear in the work area U999 The default space reserved for the reference
301. t to add Do not reuse one of the existing PADS supplied plotter device names Device Type Specifies the plotter interface language either HPGL or HGML PowerLogic User s Guide 11 7 Print Plot Operations Plotter Units Area Defines the plotter resolution with a scaling ratio that you form by specifying both a Multiplier and Divisor value The ratio defined is the scale factor to convert from mils 0 001 in to plotter units For example most Hewlett Packard plotters have a resolution of 0 025 mm or 1 40 mm This means that a distance of one inch 1000 mils is 1016 plotter units 25 4 X 40 So a ratio of 1016 to 1000 would be defined The ratio actually used is 254 to 250 which is the same as 1016 to 1000 Origin at Center Sets the origin at the center of the paper Most plotters have their plotter origin either in the center of the paper or at the lower left corner Ensure that this check box is on if the origin is in the center Photo Plotter Setup Use the Photo Plotter Setup dialog box to define the apertures and other photoplot options To open this dialog box first choose Photo in the Output Device area of the Print Plot dialog box and then choose Device Setup D Code dio adi ok 2 C Flash Line Delete Cancel D13 D14 F Same Aperture for Flashes Lines D15 B D16 Width fis Help D17 Regenerate D18 Beeren D19 Advanced Aperture Count 1999 Iv Augment on
302. tains the reference designation and part type name with the component s value and tolerance For example instead of R1 you may see R1 R1 4W 10K 5 R2 R1 4W 100K 10 PowerLogic evaluates parts that have either a different Value or Tolerance attribute as different part types Therefore if Output of value tolerance is on when you generate the netlist it must be on when you perform an ECO comparison Otherwise the comparison will report errors because it sees the part types as different Browse Opens the Export Netlist dialog box You can choose a different file name or location Select All Select all sheets in the Select Sheets list box Unselect All Unselect all sheets in Select Sheets list box PowerLogic User s Guide 2 7 ECO Operations ECO Operations ECO Forward and Backward Annotation You can export an ECO engineering change order file to update a PCB design with new schematic data forward annotation or import an ECO file to automatically update a schematic with data from a PCB design backward annotation Forward Annotation Forward annotation can be accomplished manually using Tools Forward ECO to PCB or automatically using Synchronize PCB from the OLE PowerPCB Connection dialog box Design tab Synchronize PCB compares the current PowerLogic schematic to the current PowerPCB design then automatically updates the PowerPCB design using the resulting eco file This comparison uses the E
303. te Delete Attrs Deletes selected attributes from the library Rename Attrs Starts the rename process for attributes in the Attributes Selected for Rename multicolumn list box Renamed attributes are removed from this list box and added to the Attributes in Library list box PowerLogic User s Guide 6 8 Managing Attributes in the Library Add New Attribute to Library Dialog Box Choose Add Attr on the Manage Library Attributes dialog box to open this dialog box Use this dialog box to specify the attribute name and value you want to add to the selected library See the Creating Attributes in the Library topic in this chapter for more information on attributes in the library Note If the attribute name already exists in some parts in the design the message Items exist with this attribute name do you wish to overwrite old value with tbe new name value appears Choose Yes to add the new name and value to all parts Choose No to not update the existing attribute Choose Cancel to return to the Add New Attribute to Library dialog box where you can re enter a new name and value Add New Attribute to Library x Attribute Name Attribute Value Cancel Help Attribute Name Type the new attribute name in the text box Attribute Value Type the new attribute value in the text box PowerLogic User s Guide 6 9 Managing Attributes in the Library Browse Library Attributes Dialog Box Use this dialog box to
304. te the hierarchy level where the rule is defined for that net For example a net with both Clearance and High Speed rules defined has net icons below the Clearance and High speed icons and a Default icon below the Routing icon Report Produces a Net rules report See the Rules Report topic in this chapter for more information PowerLogic User s Guide 10 6 Setting Design Rules Show Nets with Rules Lists only nets with at least one set of rule definitions Default Returns the net rules to the default rules Conditional Rules CL Once you set up Clearance rules for a group in the hierarchical order the rules are A applied to all other objects Use the Conditional Rules Setup dialog box to apply a third overriding set of rules that apply only when the item meets other specific levels of the hierarchical order You can use a layer as an against object where rules you set for an object like a net apply only when the net is routed on that layer You can further refine this to use another net as an against object and specify a layer to which the rules to apply If these two nets meet on this layer they must adhere to this clearance You define these relationships by making conditional rule sets Choose Setup Design Rules The Rules dialog box appears Choose the Conditional Rules icon The Conditional Rules Setup dialog box appears Identify the items in the source and against list boxes 1 2 3 4 Set the option under Curr
305. tems to maintain from each other Choose Matrix to enter more item specific standoffs High speed Rule Set Specifies High speed rules for the rule set High speed lets you enter clearance values for parallel and tandem length checking for the condition and it uses your source against entries as the victim aggressor designations for cross talk conditions checking Once you specify a high speed rule set you can set specific maximum length and minimum gap for Parallel and Tandem checks These rules apply only to the source and against object when they meet each other For parallelism reporting purposes the source object is treated as the aggressor Whatever clearances are set for the source object local or default appear in the Values boxes as a reference If you specify a class as the source all nets in the class are checked as victims Create Compiles the new rule set parameters and adds a description to the Existing Rule Sets list box After you create a rule set define the Clearance or High Speed values Delete Removes the selected rule set from the Existing Rule Sets list box PowerLogic User s Guide 10 8 Setting Design Rules Differential Pairs Use the Differential Pairs dialog box to associate two nets and define rules related to the pair 1 Choose Setup Design Rules The Rules dialog box appears 2 Choose the Differential Pairs icon The Differential Pairs dialog box appears Note These rules are not chec
306. tere etes bbes bel esee t ea bo Hebe deidad ve WE PESE ped de 1 18 Oriein and Desiefi Grid imeem oret e pot et sete diee unie iue iuit vote ivt 1 18 Controlling the Views s eset ttr E tete re e tete ete to PEE dt 1 18 Using the View Commands and Scroll Bars ens 1 19 Using the Middle Mouse Button eene rennen nennen 1 19 Status WIndOW ssim epe dedu dudes dde 1 19 Saving and Restoring Views eene enne ener eene nennen nennen nens 1 21 Modeless Cortmandseos d e Re A RR C a EC RR n RR 1 22 BMNW and BLET ete t teet oe bte edt dede dete ede dudtededu tdeo tu dtitutgs 1 23 M dia Wizard Dialos BOK tada 1 24 Los Test Dial g BORA due dudes 1 25 Sliortcut KEYS ami dada tt s t tees e E 1 25 Control Key Shortcuts adi 1 25 Tuncti mn Key shes seta eta nca DI recur Phe na Dua oe mu PE PE wl en als men meta oy 1 26 Other Key Shortcuts ae ere teinte M LEE LII Md ts 1 26 ROp U pp MENUS E E Sese a 1 27 Pop Up Menu Co mmionds s Aad Ana setae m d redit d AR t 1 27 Chapter 2 File Operations Opening Files ees dv utu tute tuve E tuf us tu etui 2 1 Fil Open Dialog Box iu 2 1 Dg M 2 1 Saving Files iie Pd d dae aeg elg ded dad f o dede 2 2 Importine and Exportins Files artistes ete ertet oe e ee a ea ARA a 2 2 Ireportitig MSS ce Ment tit anion atin fet fee fois Freire fre iu frei fee fase fev oett etn 2 2 O NN 2 3 OLE Import EXpOTt 4 uiestisdc it ud MS EAR suas A HO a e e err dial dd dd du 2 3
307. th and filename or use Browse to locate a file If you want to use the current design as the original turn on the Use Current Schematic Design check box New Schematic Design with Changes Area Specify the schematic design file that contains the updates that you want to place in the older design Use Current Schematic Design Turn this option on to use the open design as the new design that contains changes You cannot choose the current design as both the original design and the new design If you do not want to use the current design as the new design turn this option off and specify a new design in the New Schematic Design File text box To compare a schematic to a design first export the PCB file to ASCII format New Schematic Design File Specify a design to use as the new design that contains changes You can specify a sch file a schematic netlist file in ASCII format or a PCB design in ASCII format Either type a path and filename or use Browse to locate a file If you want to use the current design as the new design turn on the Use Current Schematic Design check box PowerLogic User s Guide 2 10 ECO Operations Generate Differences Report The Generate Differences Report check box produces a report powerpcb rep containing five sections Part differences This section of the report includes the reference designator and the part type for both the old and new designs Parts that exist only in the old design are listed un
308. the fly D Code Lists all defined apertures Add Adds a new aperture to the list A prompt asks for the new D code number Delete Deletes an aperture from the list Select the aperture and choose the Delete button Confirm the deletion Augment Automatically adds D codes for items in the schematic file that are not in the current list PowerLogic User s Guide 11 8 Print Plot Operations Regenerate Clears the current list and automatically adds D codes for all items in the schematic file Shape Area Specifies a shape for a D code Choose a D code and type values in the text boxes to define the following Flash Indicates a flash aperture Line Indicates a paint aperture Same Aperture for Flashes Lines Draws lines and flashed items with the same aperture Round and square shapes for lines gray Width Specifies the width or the diameter for round shapes The text box grays if the value is not appropriate for the specified shape Aperture Count Defines the maximum aperture count type a value in the text box Augment On the fly Automatically adds apertures to the list as you create the lines that use them Necessary apertures always appear in the Photo Plotter Setup dialog box Advanced Opens the Photo Plotter Advanced Setup dialog box where you can define additional photoplotter global parameters Photo Plotter Advanced Setup Use the Photo Plotter Advanced Setup dialog box to set global photoplott
309. the pop up menu or the Edit menu The outline of the group is attached to the cursor 2 Move the cursor to the location you want and click the left mouse button to anchor the group You can place a temporary copy of a group to check for positioning connection arrangement etc 1 Place the cursor at the location you want 2 Choose Draw Group from the pop up menu The contents of the group appear but the group remains attached to the cursor 3 Use Erase Group from the pop up menu to erase the temporary copy placed with Draw Group Copying a Group You can copy all of the items in a group When a group is copied the names of the parts are automatically incremented and assigned Reference designator names are automatically assigned using the next available names and gaps in the reference designator name sequence are filled Note If the group contains hierarchical symbols the message Group contains Hierarchy Warning there in no Undo for this operation appears Choose OK to continue the operation or Cancel to abort PowerLogic User s Guide 4 23 Group Operations After defining a group 1 Choose Group Copy from the pop up menu or the Edit menu The outline of the group is attached to the cursor 2 Move the cursor to the desired location and click the left mouse button to anchor the copy Repeat these steps to create additional copies You can set PowerLogic to display only the group s outline during copy op
310. tribute name does not exist If the attribute command specifies an object type not supported for general attributes such as net or net class the attribute command is ignored ECO File Format The format used is similar to the PADS layout program s ASCII format Each type of data begins with a header line with a key word surrounded by asterisks The first line of the file is PADS ECO The end of the file EOF entry is END Add remark lines with the entry REMARK remark information etc These are the available ECO commands Add a pin to net The command starts with NET A line indicating the net to which the pin is added follows this line SIGNAL netname 10 where netname is the net to add the pins to and 10 is the trace width to associate with the connections If the net name does not currently exist in the design it will be added This is followed by the pin s to add to the net ref1 pinl ref2 pin2 Add a part The command is PART The format for the part entry is refdes parttype where refdes is the part reference name and parttype is the part type name When parts are added in the PCB they will be placed at system origin of 0 0 PowerLogic User s Guide 2 16 ECO Operations Join two nets together The command starts with JOINNET This is followed with the line indicating the nets to join OLDNETO OLDNET1 where OLDNETO and OLDNETI are the names of th
311. tting Preferences also allows you to set up a working environment that best suits your design and the way you work 1 Choose Preferences from the Setup menu The Preferences dialog box appears 2 Choose the tab that represents the PowerLogic area you want to set preferences for Choose from Global Design or Heights Widths 3 When you choose the tab the options for that tab appear Set the options you want to change 4 Choose another tab to set preferences for 5 When you finish setting preferences choose OK The changes are saved and the Preferences dialog box closes Choose Cancel to close the Preferences dialog box without saving any of the changes you make PowerLogic User s Guide 3 1 Setting Preferences Global Tab The Global tab sets interface parameters and attributes that are global to the design process regardless of the current editing mode Global Design Heights widths m Bitmap m Cursor Sizex 1280 Style Sey 1280 Large cross m Diagonal Drawing Linking amp Embedding Keep View on Resize IV Display OLE objects Real Time Redraw r DLE Document Server Display Dot Grid 1000 v Update On Redraw Realwidh 20 Iv Draw Background Automatic Backups Interval Backup File Number Backups E Cancel Help Bitmap Size X and Y Sets the size of the bitmap area in the Status Window The bitmap a
312. ttom of character placement PowerLogic User s Guide 5 10 ama ma Chapter 6 Y Library Operations This chapter discusses the library system in PowerLogic and how to use it Library management is performed in the Library Manager dialog box This dialog box provides access to part and decal modification as well as logic family assignments and the order of library searches The topics in this chapter include Library Manager Managing Attributes in the Library Library Manager Choose File Library to open the Library Manager Use the library Manager to perform operations associated with editing and copying the contents of libraries such as Creating new libraries Adding deleting and modifying library items Printing library contents Importing and exporting library data to ASCII files Choosing which libraries to search Adding attributes to parts Library Manager Browsing All Libraries CI Library Close Edit RESNI New Lib Lib List Decals Parts NO DECAL LEER Attr Manager Pe D Help Part Types Lines CAE PowerLogic User s Guide 6 1 Library Manager Selecting a Library Use the Library list box at the top of the Library Manager dialog box to select a library to edit You can add to and delete from the library list using the Library List button See the Modifying the Library List Order topic in this chapter for more information Library Data Type
313. tus bar To open a toolbar use the Standard or Object Selector command under the Window menu Choosing the command again will close the toolbar Standard Toolbar i l ss Sheet 1 iw EN x 0 2 1 PowerLogic User s Guide 1 12 Toolbars and Toolboxes Open Icon Displays the File Open dialog box Save Icon Saves the changes to the current schematic If this is a new unnamed schematic the File Save As dialog box appears Sheet List Box Displays the sheet set of the current schematic in a drop down list box on the Standard toolbar To change the sheet in the work area choose a sheet from this list Sheets that contain objects selected using the Object Selector display in bold Select Icon Places PowerLogic in default Autoselect mode Copy Mode Icon Invokes Copy mode Move Mode Icon Places PowerLogic in Move mode Delete Mode Icon Places PowerLogic in Delete mode Query Mode Icon Places PowerLogic in Query Modify mode Drafting Displays the Drafting toolbox Design Displays the Design toolbox Busses Displays the Busses toolbox Undo Rescinds the last editing action such as move delete swap add connection create 2D line and others Redo Repeats the last editing action made prior to an undo action PowerLogic User s Guide 1 13 Toolbars and Toolboxes Zoom Choosing the Zoom icon invokes Zoom mode The magnifying glass cursor indicates Zoom mode To zoom in locat
314. type 6 2 changing 4 28 4 30 editing 7 1 Parts adding 4 2 adding multigate 4 4 adding single gate 4 4 changing from library 7 2 modifying 1 29 outputting 2 4 query modify 4 27 renaming 4 28 renaming ECO file format 2 18 updating from library 7 2 Paste 1 6 4 26 Pasting from file 1 7 group from file 4 25 OLE objects 9 8 PCB decals 4 29 6 2 editing 7 1 query modify assignment 4 31 PCB decals tab part information dialog box 7 14 Pen plotter 11 2 advanced setup 11 7 setup 11 6 Photoplotter 11 2 advanced setup 11 9 setup 11 8 Pins adding 7 18 assigned to seleted gate 7 18 assigning signal names to 7 21 changing sequence number 7 36 naming 7 18 removing 7 18 sequence in decal 7 19 swap ID 7 19 swapping 4 13 7 36 PowerLogic User s Guie Index terminal number sequence 7 18 type 7 18 updating from library 7 45 Pin decal list management dialog box 7 31 Pin decals changing 7 35 7 37 creating new 7 30 managing 7 31 Pin filter 1 15 Pin names changing 7 35 7 38 setting 7 35 7 38 Pin numbers changing 7 35 7 37 setting 7 35 7 37 Pin sequence numbers changing 7 39 Pin swaps setting 7 39 Pin types changing 7 38 setting 7 35 Plane layer nets dialog box 10 21 Plane layers 10 21 net assignments 10 21 Playback macros 3 17 Playback recorded PowerLogic session 1 1 Plot 11 1 colors 11 4 customizing 11 2 device setup 11 2 justification 11
315. ufacturer and cost This information travels with the part type information and you can write out selections to an ASCII file Attributes consist of two fields the attribute name such as Maker and the attribute value such as Motorola See the Query Modify Part topic in the Design Operations chapter for more information on the Query Modify Part dialog box e 2 Choose the Query Modify icon from the toolbar Select the part to add or modify the attributes for by selecting a construction line or text string associated with the part Choose the Attributes icon from the Query Modify Part dialog box The Query Modify Part Attributes dialog box appears Choose Add Type a name in the Name column or choose Browse Lib Attr to choose an existing attribute name Choose an attribute from the list and then choose OK Type a value for the attribute in the Value column Choose This Part to only update the selected part or choose All Parts This Type to update all of the parts in the schematic that match the selected part Note Adding or changing attributes in a part at the schematic level does not update the part type Edit the part in the Part Editor to update the library part PowerLogic User s Guide 5 5 Managing Attributes in a Schematic Query Modify Part Attributes xi Attributes Browse Lib Attr Value Add Description 1024 X 1 IMOXII ECL BIPOLAR R DET Manufacturer 1 ADVANCED MICRO DEVICES
316. up select mode 1 14 4 17 grp file 1 6 GUI descriptions 1 3 H Heights widths of text 8 3 Heights widths preferences 3 6 Help xx Help menu 1 12 HGML 11 7 Hierarchical component query modify 4 34 Hierarchical design 4 8 creating bottom up 4 11 creating top down 4 10 moving up 4 12 pushing into 4 12 rules hierarchy 10 2 Hierarchical symbol wizard 4 9 Hierarchical symbols copying 4 18 creating 4 9 deleting 4 21 modifying 4 12 Hierarchy of design rules 10 2 10 3 In 6 High speed rules 10 1 10 15 class 10 4 10 5 deleting 10 17 net 10 6 rule sets 10 8 How to use command 1 12 HPGL 11 7 Sl IEEE symbol standards 4 5 Impedance 10 17 Import 1 5 ASCII 2 2 design rules from PowerPCB 1 10 9 16 10 18 library 6 4 OLE 2 3 Include design rules netlist output 2 7 Include part attributes netlist output 2 7 Include subsheets netlist output 2 6 Include value and tolerance netlist output 2 7 Inner electrical layers 10 19 Insert new OLE objects 1 8 9 3 Insert OLE objects from file 9 4 Insert PowerPCB objects 1 8 Interface 1 3 J Job limits 11 14 Join two nets together ECO file format 2 17 Justification 8 3 11 5 L Labels 5 8 creating 5 9 Layers adding electrical 10 22 biasing 10 14 definition 1 9 10 19 documentation 10 19 inner 10 19 PowerLogic User s Guie Index plane 10 21 reassigning 10 22 setup 10 19 10 21 thickne
317. ustomize the user interface for PowerLogic by modifying system settings and saving the files The most important file is default txt This ASCII file is read into memory when you start PowerLogic or choose File New to begin a new design The list of files used for customizing PowerLogic are e default txt e width dat e future dat default txt This file is a PowerLogic ASCII file The settings in this file are used every time you start PowerLogic or start a new schematic it contains default preference settings To change the default start up conditions for PowerLogic 1 Choose Setup Preferences to open the Preferences dialog box 2 Change the tab settings to your preferred work environment 3 Choose OK to save the changes 4 Choose File Export and then use the controls at the top of this dialog box to set the directory to padspwr powerlogic 5 Choose default txt from the list of files and answer Yes to the prompt to overwrite the existing file Type the name in the File Name area if it does not exist 6 Choose Save The ASCII Out dialog box appears 7 Choose Select All then choose Save The next time you start PowerLogic or when you choose File New your customized settings are used width dat This file defines the trace widths for nets when PowerLogic creates the net list You can define specific net names with their associated trace width You can also assign a default net width for all other signals When Power
318. w off is the faster redraw setting Real Width Defines the minimum width to display text 2D lines decal outlines in addition to connections with their actual width Lines with a width smaller than this value appear with only a center line to save memory and speed redraws If you set this to zero all lines appear at their actual width Larger values speed up redraws Type a value in current design units Display OLE Objects When on displays linked and embedded objects in the work area Update on Redraw Updates the PowerLogic linked or embedded object in the container application when the following is true e You are editing the PowerLogic object in a separate window e You choose the Redraw icon in the separate window To increase performance turn this option off This option only effects PowerLogic when it is embedded in another application Draw Background Draws the PowerLogic background color in the linked or embedded PowerLogic object You set this color in the Display Colors Setup dialog box When this option is off the background of the PowerLogic object is transparent you can see the through the object to the container application s background This option only effects PowerLogic when it is embedded in another application PowerLogic User s Guide 3 3 Setting Preferences Backup Interval Defines the time in minutes between automatic backups Type a value between 1 and 30 minutes Number Backups Sets th
319. ward annotation After creating an ECO file in your PCB layout system 1 Start PowerLogic and open the schematic that you want to update 2 Choose Tools Backward Annotate from PCB PowerLogic prompts you to save or overwrite the existing file Type the ECO file name or choose it from the list of files Choose Open The schematic file automatically updates If no errors are found the message ECO Input Completed appears 5 Choose OK to continue Error Report File If errors occur during back annotation PowerLogic creates a file named eco err This file lists the ECO file format keyword and line number for the each error The error report file automatically opens using the default text editor Part Level Backward Annotation You can backward annotate the following part level information Added Parts A new sheet is created and all new parts are added to the sheet Parts are placed on a grid so that parts of a medium size do not overlap No attempt is made to avoid overlapping of larger parts An error message is generated if the reference designator of the newly added part already exists or if the part doesn t exist in the Library Note The part is not added to the schematic if the reference designator already exists If the part contains Signal Pins these pins are included in the add pin function Backward annotation does not currently support signal pins so an error message is created PowerLogic User s Guide
320. werLogic User s Guide 8 1 Drafting Toolbox be Combine Combines selected 2D line items into a complex line item See the Combining 2D Line Items topic in this chapter for more information Add from Adds a 2D line item from a library See the Library Adding Drafting Items from a Library topic in this chapter for more information Save to Library Save a 2D line item to a library See the Adding Drafting Items to a Library topic in this chapter for more information Adding Text gee To add free text text not belonging to another object choose the Add Text icon from the Drafting toolbox The Add Free Text dialog box appears for you to type the text and specify other text string properties All alphabetic numeric and special characters on the keyboard are valid The maximum text string length is 72 characters including spaces To add a text entry with a bar over the characters precede the text with the character To place a bar over only a portion of text enclose that section with the character For example typing READ WRITE places a bar over READ 1 Choose the Add Text icon from the Drafting toolbox 2 Type the text string The other fields are optional 3 Choose OK If you did not specify the X Y coordinate location the text item follows the cursor movement 4 Indicate the text item location if necessary Optionally you can add multiple copies of the text after the initial text location is indicate
321. werPCB PowerLogic automatically connects to this file Open PCB File Allows you to choose an existing PowerPCB file to open You need to locate the file to open PowerLogic automatically connects to this file OLE Preferences Tab The Preferences tab manages the unused pins net created by SPECCTRA and netlist comparison preferences OLE PowerPCB Connection Receive Send Design Document Preferences I Ignore unused pins net Y Compare Value Tolerance Net Name NOT_CONNECTED ee mw PowerLogic User s Guide 9 16 Visual Basic Scripting Ignore Unused Pins Net Turn this option on to ignore the unused pins net in the original design essentially preserving the existing unused pins net in the design you re updating Otherwise the unused pins net is deleted Specify the net name when you turn this option on To compare a schematic to a design first export the schematic to ASCII format Net Name Specify the name of the unused pins net in SPECCTRA The default name is NOT_CONNECTED See the Unused Pins Net topic in the SPECCTRA Translator On line Help for more information For Output of value tolerance see this option in the Net List topic in Reports doc This dialog box which appears when you choose Netlist to PCB contains the same option the same meaning Visual Basic Scripting PowerLogic provides an internal Visual Basic scripting capability or Visual Basic Engine which makes the Automation
322. windows to help you Refer to the referenced documentation in the steps below for additional information 1 El 2 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Choose Tools Part Editor to enter the Part Editor Choose Edit Electrical or choose the Edit Electrical icon from the toolbar The Part Information dialog box appears See the Part Information for Part topic in this chapter for more information Use Pin Count to indicate the number of pins in the part Enter the number of pins for the entire package including signal pins not for an individual gate Optionally choose the Decals icon from the Part Information dialog box to assign the PCB decal The pin count for the assigned PCB decal must be equal to or greater than the electrical description Choose the Gates icon from the Part Information dialog box The Gate Information for Part dialog box appears Choose Add Gate once for each gate in the part The gates are listed alphanumerically in the Gates and Pins area See the Gates Tab topic in this chapter for more information Highlight a gate and then choose Assign Decals The Assign Decal to Gate dialog box appears See the PCB Decals Tab topic in this chapter for more information Set the filter and select a symbol from the Unassigned Decals area Choose Assign Choose additional CAE decals if you want to assign alternate decals Optionally assign gate swapping information for the part from the Gate Information for
323. x 2 Type a name for the ASCII file in the File Name text box The default is the name of the currently open design 3 Choose Save This opens the ASCII Output dialog box Use it to define what information to write to the ASCII file OLE Import Export PowerLogic allows you to embed files from other applications as OLE objects in your design using Edit Insert New Object Once you have an OLE object in your design you can export the object as a singular item to an ole file You can import an ole file containing OLE objects into a PowerLogic schematic and you can export an OLE object from a schematic to an ole file To import an ole file 1 Choose File Import The File Import dialog box appears 2 Choose OLE Cole as the file type 3 Locate the file you want to open 4 Choose Open The OLE objects import into the current schematic OLE objects are placed on the sheet on which they were created For example if you originally placed an OLE object on Sheet 1 and a second object on Sheet 2 these OLE objects are placed on Sheets 1 and 2 when imported If some of the OLE objects you want to import exist on sheets that do not exist in the current schematic these objects are deleted For example you originally created OLE objects on Sheets 1 2 and 3 The schematic you are importing the OLE objects into only has Sheets 1 and 2 The OLE objects from Sheet 3 are deleted To export an OLE object 1 Select the OLE object Hand
324. x Managing Attributes in a Schematic Use the Manage Schematic Attributes dialog box to manage attributes at the schematic level You can rename an attribute in or delete an attribute from the schematic All parts are automatically updated To rename an existing attribute and apply the change to each part in the design 1 Choose Tools Attribute Manager The Manage Schematic Attributes dialog box appears 2 Highlight one or more attributes in the Attributes in Schematic list box 3 Choose Add The attributes are added to the Attributes Selected for Rename list box PowerLogic User s Guide 5 4 Managing Attributes in a Schematic Highlight the attribute in the New Name column and choose Edit New Name or double click on the attribute Type a new name for the attribute or choose Browse Lib Attr to choose an attribute already defined in the library Choose an attribute name from this dialog box and then choose OK Choose Rename Attrs to rename the attribute and remove it from the Attributes Selected for Rename list box To delete an attribute from each part in the design 1 Choose Tools Attribute Manager The Manage Schematic Attributes dialog box appears Highlight one or more attributes in the Attributes in Schematic list box Choose Delete Query Modify Part Attributes Use the Attributes button on the Query Modify Part dialog box to assign or modify part attributes which is information about the part such as man
325. y Drop down list box A dialog box area containing a single item list box that requires you to select the down arrow to view the hidden contents Multicolumn list box Check boxes Option buttons Toolbar Toolbox Grayed Text PowerLogic User s Guide A dialog box area containing a tabular list area that contains multiple items with multiple properties You can individually choose each item and property A dialog box option that is individually on selected or off A check mark in the box indicates the selected option s A group of mutually exclusive dialog box options A filled button indicates the selected option An icon list across the top of the application window that changes depending on whether the PowerLogic Schematic Editor or Part Editor is active A secondary icon list beneath the toolbar that appears changes or disappears depending on which icon you choose from the toolbar Indicates based on context sensitivity unavailable options or commands xix Conventions General Commands The following commands appear in several PowerLogic dialog boxes The functionality of these commands is identical in each occurrence OK Apply Cancel Help Accepts and executes the changes and closes the dialog box Accepts and executes the changes without closing the dialog box Cancels all changes and closes the dialog box Opens a help window and displays help text for the current operation Press F1 if n
326. you want to use or modify 4 Choose Close to close the Links dialog box You cannot cancel changes you make in the Links dialog box PowerLogic User s Guide 9 8 Editing OLE Links Links L2 x MWINTERMUTES Commonly doc Document Automatic Update Now Dpen Source Ehange Source Break Link Source SWINTERMUTESTECHPUBS Commonly doc Type Microsoft Word 6 0 Document Update Automatic C Manual Links Lists the current links for all linked objects in the current design The list also includes the source path and file for the object Type Lists what kind of file the source file is for example a document The object is linked to this file type Update Lists the Update setting assigned to the object Choose between assigning an Automatic or Manual update to the linked file Change the setting using Update Update Now Updates any linked objects that you select in the Links list Open Source Opens the source file in the source application Change Source Opens the Change Source dialog box where you can choose a different source for the object selected in the Links list Break Link Breaks the object s link to the source file The object is embedded After you break an object s link you cannot reconnect the link PowerLogic User s Guide 9 9 OLE Visual Editing Automatic Update Updates the object s data when you open the PowerLogic file that contains the object and when the source fi

PowerLogic User's Guide - Electrical and Information Technology

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents